• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Discipline
  • Chapters on Monastic Discipline
  • Toh 1-6

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh1-6.pdf

སྨན་གྱི་གཞི།

The Chapter on Medicines
Glossary

Bhaiṣajya­vastu
འདུལ་བ་གཞི་ལས། སྨན་གྱི་གཞི།
’dul ba gzhi las/ sman gyi gzhi
“The Chapter on Medicines” from The Chapters on Monastic Discipline
Vinaya­vastuni Bhaiṣajya­vastu

Toh 1-6

Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 277.b–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–50.a

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Palgyi Lhünpo
  • Sarvajñādeva
  • Vidyākaraprabha
  • Dharmākara
  • Paltsek

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2021

Current version v 1.1.5 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 10.28am on Monday, 20th January 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 11 chapters- 11 chapters
p. General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines
1. Chapter One
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· I. The Authorization of Medicines
· II. Fat
· III. Scabies
· IV. Collyrium
· V. A Man Gone Mad
· VI. Pilinda
· VII. Revata
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. Rice Flour and Guḍa
· B. Barley Flour and Guḍa
· VIII. Sauvīraka
2. Chapter Two
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· I. Mahāsenā
· II. Flesh
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. Elephant Flesh
· B. Nāga Flesh
· III. Hemorrhoids
· IV. One Who Has a Wind Illness
· V. Pūrṇa
· VI. Agnidatta
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Story of the Two Nāga Kings and King Bimbisāra
· B. The Quarrel between the Brahmin Agnidatta and the Citizens of Rājagṛha
3. Chapter Three
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· I. Rājagṛha
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Disaster of Rājagṛha and Its End
· B. The Epidemic in Vaiśālī
· II. Nālandā
· III. Veṇuyaṣṭikā
· IV. Pāṭali Village
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· A. The Sermon at Pāṭali Village
· B. The Donation by the Brahmin Varśākāra
· C. The Donation of Parasols
· D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana
· V. The Ganges
· VI. Mahāpraṇāda
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· A. The Appearance of King Mahāpraṇāda’s Pillar
· B. The Former Life of the Monk Bhaddālin
· C. The Prediction of the Appearance of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha
· D. The Former Lives of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha
· E. The Sermon in Kuṭi Village
· F. The Sermon in Nādikā
· G. The Invitation by Āmrapālī
· VII. Vaiśālī
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. The Visit of Āmrapālī
· B. The Visit of the Licchavis
· C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī
· D. The Former Lives of the Licchavis
· E. The End of the Epidemic in Vaiśālī
4. Chapter Four
+ 13 sections- 13 sections
· I. Veṇu
· II. Middle Village
· III. Mithilā
· IV. Videha
· V. Sālā
· VI. The Well
· VII. Bhārgava
· VIII. Kāṣāya
· IX. Crown of the Head
· X. Kanthaka
· XI. Gośālaka
· XII. Pāpā
· XIII. Kuśinagarī
5. Chapter Five
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· I. The Axe
· II. Devadṛśa
· III. Lumbinī
· IV. Kapila
· V. Where There Is Cotton
· VI. Kanakamuni
· VII. Kārṣaka
· VIII. A Robe
· IX. Bath
· X. Sikatin
6. Chapter Six
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· I. Icchānaṅgalā
· II. Utkaṭā
· III. Saptaparṇa
· IV. Sunrise
· V. Śrāvastī
· VI. Valaya
· VII. Where There Is Ground
· VIII. Lion Village
· IX. New Village
· X. City
· XI. Pīṭha
· XII. Nyagrodhikā
7. Chapter Seven
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· I. Kimpilā
· II. Ahicchattra
· III. Mathurā
· IV. Rāṣṭrapāla
· V. Hastināpura
· VI. The Great City
· VII. Śrughnā
· VIII. Brahmin Village
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. A Fire Caused by an Old Man from the Śākya Clan
· B. The Former Life of the Old Man
· IX. The City of Kāla
· X. Rohitaka
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· A. Offerings of the Yakṣa Elephant Power
· B. Departure to the Northern Region
· C. Awakened Power in Heaped Up
· D. Dharma Power in Retuka
· E. Great Cup in the Indus, Feet
· F. Having a Shaved Head and Water Jar
· G. Apalāla
· H. The Nāga Huluḍa
· I. Bhraṣṭolā, Ṛṣi, Āpannaka
· J. Kanthā
· K. In Dhānyapura, Converting the Mother of Best Army
· L. The Potter in Naitarī
· XI. Śādvalā
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Great Yakṣa of Śādvalā
· B. Pālitakūṭa
· XII. Nandivardhana
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. Bhavadeva’s, Caṇḍālī’s Seven Sons’, and the Yakṣa Earth-Protector’s Conversion in Nandivardhana
· B. Giving an Image to Nāgas, Aśvaka, and Punarvasuka
· C. Converting Nāḍikā and Naḍadaryā
· D. In the City of Kuntī, the Yakṣiṇī Named Kuntī
· E. Kharjūrikā and the Stūpa Made of Dirt
8. Chapter Eight
+ 9 sections- 9 sections
· I. Ādirājya
· II. Bhadrāśva
· III. Mathurā
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. The Prediction about Upagupta
· B. The Former Life of Upagupta
· C. The Brahmin Nīlabhūti
· D. The Obstruction of the Buddha’s Way by a Goddess
· E. The Yakṣa Gardabha
· IV. Otalā Park
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Visit of the Brahmin Otalāyana
· B. Kacaṅgalā
· V. Vairambhya
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· A. The Brahmin in a Park
· B. King Agnidatta’s Offer
· C. Breaking a Hut
· D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin
· VI. Ayodhyā
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Simile of a Log and the Going Forth of Nanda, the Herdsman
· B. The Former Lives of Nanda and the Frog
· VII. The Ganges
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles
· B. The Former Lives of the Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles
· VIII. Hungry Ghosts
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Conversation with the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts
· B. The Previous Lives of the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts
· IX. Velāma
9. Chapter Nine
+ 13 sections- 13 sections
· I. Kumāravardhana
· II. Krauñcāna
· III. Aṅgadikā
· IV. Maṇivatī
· V. Sālabalā
· VI. Sālibalā
· VII. Suvarṇaprastha
· VIII. Sāketā
· IX. Rice Soup
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· A. The Peasants’ Going Forth and the Oxen’s Rebirth in Heaven
· B. The Former Lives of the Peasants and Oxen
· C. Toyikā
· X. Śrāvastī
+ 13 sections- 13 sections
· A. A Leprous Beggar Woman’s Offering of Water Used for Boiling Rice
· B. The Offerings by King Prasenajit
· C. The Former Life of King Prasenajit
· D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman
· E. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Offerings Made by the Buddha in His Former Lives
· F. Former Life Stories I
+ 11 sections- 11 sections
· 1. Māndhātṛ
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· a. The Story of King Māndhātṛ
· b. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: The Son of the Head of a Guild
· c. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: A Grain Merchant
· 2. Mahāsudarśana
· 3. Velāma
· 4. Kuśa
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. The Story of Prince Kuśa
· b. The Former Life of Prince Kuśa
· 5. Triśaṅku
· 6. Mahādeva
· 7. King Nimi
· 8. Ādarśamukha
· 9. Sudhana
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. The Story of King Sudhana
· b. The Story of Prince Sudhana
· 10. Viśvantara
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. Viśvantara’s Story I
· b. Viśvantara’s Story II
· 11. Saṃdhāna
· G. Former Life Stories II
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Bālāha
· 2. A King
· 3. The Snake
· 4. Two Heads
· 5. The Lapwing
· 6. The Parrot
· 7. The Banquet
· 8. The Turtle
· 9. Susena
· 10. Merchants
· H. Former Life Stories III
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· 1. Six Tusks
· 2. The Rabbit
· 3. Parents
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· a. The Story of Śyāma
· b. Breaking Wrong Laws
· 4. Water Born
· 5. Words of the Forest
· 6. The Elephant
· 7. The Nāga
· 8. Dhṛtarāṣṭra
· I. The Bodhisattva as Four Teachers
+ 4 sections- 4 sections
· 1. The Story of the Teacher Sunetra
· 2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu
· 3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi
· 4. The Story of the Teacher Govinda
· J. The First Resolution and the First Veneration of a Buddha
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· 5. The Story of King Prabhāsa
· 6. The Story of the Potter Bṛhaddyuti
· K. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Veneration of Past Buddhas
· L. The Question of Ānanda or Section of Many Buddhas
· M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā
· XI. Anavatapta
+ 7 sections- 7 sections
· A. The Buddha’s Visit to Lake Anavatapta
· B. The Contest of Magical Power between Śāriputra and Mahā­maudgalyāyana
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· 1. A Story of the Present
· 2. A Story of the Past: The Painter and the Mechanic
· 3. A Story of the Past: The Two Painters
· 4. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (1)
· 5. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (2)
· 6. A Story of the Past: The Ivory Carver and the Painter
· C. Verses of the Elders I
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Kāśyapa
· 2. Śāriputra
· 3. Maudgalyāyana
· 4. Śobhita
· 5. Sumanas
· 6. Koṭīviṃśa
· 7. Vāgīśa
· 8. Piṇḍola
· 9. Svāgata
· 10. Nandika
· D. Verses of the Elders II
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Yaśas (1)
· 2. Śaivala
· 3. Bakkula
· 4. Sthavira
· 5. The Three
· 6. Yaśas (2)
· 7. Jyotiṣka
· 8. Rāṣṭrapāla
· 9. Svāti
· 10. Jaṅghākāśyapa
· E. Verses of the Elders III
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· 1. Panthaka
· 2. Sarpadāsa
· 3. Aniruddha
· 4. Kāla
· 5. Rāhula
· 6. Nanda
· 7. Dravya
· 8. Upasena
· 9. Bhadrika
· 10. Lavaṇabhadrika
· F. Verses of the Elders IV
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· 1. Madhuvāsiṣṭha
· 2. Hetu
· 3. Kauṇḍinya
· 4. Upālin
· 5. Prabhākara
· 6. Revata
· 7. The Sugata (prose)
+ 10 sections- 10 sections
· a. The Son of a Householder
· b. A Caravan Leader
· c. A Young Brahmin
· d. Bharadvāja
· e. The Cause of the False Slander by Cañcā
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· I) A Brahmin
· II) Mṛṇāla
· f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha
· g. Uttara
· h. A Physician
· i. The Son of a Fisherman
· j. A Wrestler
· 8. The Sugata (verse)
+ 12 sections- 12 sections
· a. Introduction
· b. Mṛṇāla
· c. A Brahmin
· d. Bharadvāja
· e. The Son of a Householder
· f. A Caravan Leader
· g. The Son of a Fisherman
· h. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha
· i. A Physician
· j. A Wrestler
· k. Uttara
· l. Conclusion
· G. The Invitation by Viśākhā
· XII. Nagarabindu
· XIII. Vaiśālī
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· A. The Invitation by Dhanika and His Family
· B. The Former Lives of Dhanika and His Family
· C. The Rules on Food
10. Chapter Ten
+ 8 sections- 8 sections
· I. The Sick
· II. Foods
· III. Breakfast
· IV. Leftovers
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· A. Alms-Food Obtained Previously
· B. Leftovers Taken by Monks to the Monastery
· C. Leftovers Brought by Laymen
· V. Fruits Growing in the Forest
· VI. Lotus
· VII. Lotus Roots
· VIII. Miṇḍhaka
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· A. The Conversion of Miṇḍhaka
· B. Invitation after Mealtime
· C. The Acceptance of Money
· D. The Acceptance of Guḍa
· E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family
11. Chapter Eleven
+ 5 sections- 5 sections
· I. The Drink Offered by Kaineya Was Received
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Prose)
+ 6 sections- 6 sections
· 1. The Sermon to the Four Great Kings
· 2. The Former Lives of the Four Great Kings
· 3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One
· 4. Śaila and Kaineya Go Forth
· 5. The Instruction by Three Disciples of the Buddha
· 6. The Former Lives of the Three Disciples
· B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse)
· II. The Town of Kāśi, Barley Porridge
· III. Khādyaka in Pāpā
· IV. Doubts
· V. Foul Foods
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· A. A Story of the Present about the Great Peacock Charm
· B. Stories of the Buddha’s Former Lives Related to the Great Peacock Charm
ab. Abbreviations
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· 1. A Work Referred to in the Bhaiṣajyavastu
· 2. Works Related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu
· 3. Works Referred to in the Introduction, Notes, etc.
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Bhaiṣajyavastu, “The Chapter on Medicines,” is a part of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, the corpus of monastic law of one of the most influential Buddhist schools in India. This chapter deals with monastic regulations about medicines. At the same time, it also includes various elements not restricted to such rules: stories of the Buddha and his disciples, a lengthy story of the Buddha’s journey for the purpose of quelling an epidemic and converting a nāga, a number of stories of the Buddha’s former lives narrated by the Buddha himself, and a series of verses recited by the Buddha and his disciples about their former lives. Thus, this chapter preserves not only interesting information about medical knowledge shared by ancient Indian Buddhist monastics but also an abundance of Buddhist narrative literature.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This text was translated by the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team. Fumi Yao translated the Tibetan text into English and prepared the ancillary materials. Shayne Clarke proofread the translation and ancillary materials.

The translation has been completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­2

We gratefully acknowledge the generous sponsorship of Leo Tong Chen and his family; Zhang Wei, Li Mo, Zhang Mo Tong and Zhang Mo Lin; (Chi Xian Ren) Mao Gui Rong and Chi Mei; and Joseph Tse 謝偉傑, Patricia Tse 鄒碧玲 and family, in dedication to all eczema sufferers. Their support has helped make the work on this translation possible.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Bhaiṣajyavastu, “The Chapter on Medicines,” is the sixth chapter of the Vinayavastu, “The Chapters on Monastic Discipline,” of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya. The Mūlasarvāstivāda was one of the most influential Buddhist schools in India, and its Vinaya, the corpus of monastic law, is reported to have circulated not only in various parts of the Indian subcontinent but also in Southeast Asia, at least in the late seventh century. When this Vinaya was composed is an unresolved question, and we are presently unable to say more than that the corpus seems to have taken its present shape in the first few centuries of the common era.1


Text Body

The Translation
From The Chapters on Monastic Discipline
The Chapter on Medicines

p.

General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines

[V1] [F.277.b]


p.­1
Medicines, Mahāsenā,
Rājagṛha, Veṇu,
Carpenter, Icchānaṅgalā,
Kimpilā, Ādirājya,
Kumāravardhana, Sick People, and Kaineya.
p.­2

The entire chapter is thus summarized.


1.

Chapter One

1.­1

Summary of Contents:

The Authorization of Medicines,
Fat, Scabies, Collyrium,
A Man Gone Mad, Pilinda,
Revata, and Sauvīraka.

I. The Authorization of Medicines

1.­2

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was staying in the Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park. On that occasion some monks [F.278.a] caught an autumn disease. Because they had caught an autumn disease, they turned pale, became emaciated, lost their strength, and were weakened.

II. Fat

III. Scabies

IV. Collyrium

V. A Man Gone Mad32

VI. Pilinda33

VII. Revata

A. Rice Flour and Guḍa

B. Barley Flour and Guḍa

VIII. Sauvīraka


2.

Chapter Two

2.­1

Summary of Contents:

Mahāsenā, Flesh, Hemorrhoids,
One Who Has a Wind Illness, Pūrṇa,
Agnidatta, be’i ra to,
One Who Has Clouds, and Crows.38

I. Mahāsenā

2.­2

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once traveling through the country of Kāśi and arrived in Vārāṇasī. He stayed in the Deer Park at Ṛṣivadana near Vārāṇasī.


2.­3

A householder named Mahāsena was living in Vārāṇasī. He was rich and had great wealth and many possessions. His wife’s name was Mahāsenā. Both he and his wife were pious and good and had virtuous dispositions. Mahāsena heard that the Buddha, the Blessed One, had arrived in Vārāṇasī, having traveled through the country of Kāśi, and that he was staying in the Deer Park at Ṛṣivadana near Vārāṇasī. When Mahāsena heard that, he thought, “Although the Blessed One has been invited to my house many times and has had meals, he has never been offered all the requisites. Now I will offer the Blessed One all the requisites for three months.” [F.284.b]

II. Flesh41

A. Elephant Flesh

B. Nāga Flesh

III. Hemorrhoids

IV. One Who Has a Wind Illness

V. Pūrṇa60

VI. Agnidatta

A. The Story of the Two Nāga Kings and King Bimbisāra108

B. The Quarrel between the Brahmin Agnidatta and the Citizens of Rājagṛha114


3.

Chapter Three

3.­1

Summary of Contents:119

Rājagṛha, Nālandā,
Veṇuyaṣṭikā, Pāṭali Village,120
The Ganges, Massed Cloud,121
Mahāpraṇāda, and Vaiśālī, which is the last.

I. Rājagṛha

A. The Disaster of Rājagṛha and Its End

3.­2

The Buddha, the Blessed One, was once staying in Kalandaka­nivāpa Bamboo Grove near Rājagṛha.


3.­3

When Prince Ajātaśatru was enticed by Devadatta to kill his own father, who was a righteous Dharma king, and crown himself king, he began to perform a number of disrespectful acts toward the Blessed One [F.13.b] and set the elephant Dhanapālaka122 and a fierce dog on the Blessed One in order to kill him.

B. The Epidemic in Vaiśālī126

II. Nālandā131

III. Veṇuyaṣṭikā135

IV. Pāṭali Village

A. The Sermon at Pāṭali Village

B. The Donation by the Brahmin Varśākāra

C. The Donation of Parasols

D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana144

V. The Ganges145

VI. Mahāpraṇāda149

A. The Appearance of King Mahāpraṇāda’s Pillar150

B. The Former Life of the Monk Bhaddālin151

C. The Prediction of the Appearance of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha152

D. The Former Lives of the Buddha Maitreya and the Wheel-Turning King Śaṅkha156

E. The Sermon in Kuṭi Village159

F. The Sermon in Nādikā160

G. The Invitation by Āmrapālī165

VII. Vaiśālī

A. The Visit of Āmrapālī169

B. The Visit of the Licchavis172

C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī

D. The Former Lives of the Licchavis

E. The End of the Epidemic in Vaiśālī178


4.

Chapter Four

4.­1

Summary of Contents:185

Veṇu, Middle Village,
Mithilā, Videha,
Sālā, The Well, Bhārgava,
Kāṣāya, Crown of the Head, Kanthaka,
Gośālaka, Pāpā,
And Kuśinagarī, which is the last.

I. Veṇu

4.­2

Thereupon the Blessed One said to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, let us go to Veṇu Village.”

“Certainly, O Honored One,” replied the venerable Ānanda to the Blessed One.

4.­3

Thereupon the Blessed One, traveling through the country of Vṛji, arrived in Veṇu Village, and he stayed in a śiṃśapā forest to the north of Veṇu Village. At that time a famine broke out, a calamity in which it became difficult for a beggar to find food. The Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, now here a famine has broken out, a calamity in which it has become difficult for a beggar to find food.186 Therefore, monks, those of you who have any acquaintances, who have any allies, who have any friends in the villages of Vṛji near Vaiśālī, should enter the rainy-season retreat there. [F.49.b] I will enter the rainy-season retreat, too, in this Veṇu Village with my attendant monk, Ānanda. None of you should want for almsfood.”

II. Middle Village

III. Mithilā194

IV. Videha205

V. Sālā208

VI. The Well210

VII. Bhārgava213

VIII. Kāṣāya214

IX. Crown of the Head215

X. Kanthaka216

XI. Gośālaka218

XII. Pāpā219

XIII. Kuśinagarī


5.

Chapter Five

5.­1

Summary of Contents:227

The Axe, Devadṛśa, Lumbinī,
Kapila, Where There Is Cotton,
Kanakamuni, Kārṣaka, A Robe,
Bath, Sikatin.228 These are the group of ten.

I. The Axe229

5.­2

The Blessed One stayed in Kalmāṣadamya, a village of the people of Kuru. At that time the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, having known and seen that defilements had been exhausted, I said . . . .” (Here the Sūtra of the Parable of the Axe in the section on the aggregates in the Saṃyuktāgama is to be recited in detail).230

II. Devadṛśa231

III. Lumbinī233

IV. Kapila234

V. Where There Is Cotton

VI. Kanakamuni

VII. Kārṣaka

VIII. A Robe

IX. Bath

X. Sikatin


6.

Chapter Six

6.­1

Summary of Contents:237

Icchānaṅgalā, Utkaṭā,
Saptaparṇa, Sunrise, [F.62.b]
Śrāvastī, Valaya, Where There Is Ground,
Lion Village, New Village,
City, Pīṭha,
And Nyagrodhikā, which is the last.
These twelve cities are explained.

I. Icchānaṅgalā238

6.­2

In Icchānaṅgalā, the Blessed One stayed in the Icchānaṅgalā Forest. At one point the Blessed One said to the monks, “Monks, I will go into seclusion here for three months.239 No monks should come to me except when someone brings me almsfood or when it is the day of poṣadha, which is held every fifteen days.”

II. Utkaṭā242

III. Saptaparṇa

IV. Sunrise316

V. Śrāvastī331

VI. Valaya

VII. Where There Is Ground

VIII. Lion Village

IX. New Village

X. City340

XI. Pīṭha342

XII. Nyagrodhikā349


7.

Chapter Seven

7.­1

Summary of Contents:353

Kimpilā, Ahicchattra,
Mathurā, Rāṣṭrapāla,
Hastināpura, The Great City,
Śrughnā, Brahmin Village,
The City of Kāla, Rohitaka,
Śādvalā, and
Nandivardhana.
These are correctly explained.

I. Kimpilā354

7.­2

The Blessed One arrived in Kimpilā and stayed in Kimpilā Forest.355


7.­3

Thereupon the Blessed One said to the venerable Kimpila, “O Kimpila, I will teach you to meditate on the four applications of mindfulness. Listen to it well and keep it in mind; I shall teach it.”

II. Ahicchattra

III. Mathurā360

IV. Rāṣṭrapāla366

V. Hastināpura378

VI. The Great City

VII. Śrughnā383

VIII. Brahmin Village386

A. A Fire Caused by an Old Man from the Śākya Clan387

B. The Former Life of the Old Man392

IX. The City of Kāla

X. Rohitaka

A. Offerings of the Yakṣa Elephant Power394

B. Departure to the Northern Region401

C. Awakened Power in Heaped Up409

D. Dharma Power in Retuka413

E. Great Cup in the Indus, Feet415

F. Having a Shaved Head and Water Jar416

G. Apalāla418

H. The Nāga Huluḍa426

I. Bhraṣṭolā, Ṛṣi, Āpannaka430

J. Kanthā432

K. In Dhānyapura, Converting the Mother of Best Army433

L. The Potter in Naitarī434

XI. Śādvalā

A. The Great Yakṣa of Śādvalā

B. Pālitakūṭa

XII. Nandivardhana

A. Bhavadeva’s, Caṇḍālī’s Seven Sons’, and the Yakṣa Earth-Protector’s Conversion in Nandivardhana

B. Giving an Image to Nāgas, Aśvaka, and Punarvasuka440

C. Converting Nāḍikā and Naḍadaryā

D. In the City of Kuntī, the Yakṣiṇī Named Kuntī

E. Kharjūrikā and the Stūpa Made of Dirt


8.

Chapter Eight

8.­1

Summary of Contents:451

Ādirājya, Bhadrāśva,
Mathurā, Otalā Park,
Vairambhya,
Ayodhyā, The Ganges,
Hungry Ghosts, and Velāma.

I. Ādirājya

8.­2

Traveling through the country of Śūrasena, the Blessed One then went to Ādirājya. There the Blessed One said to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, in this place King Mahāsammata, who was the first king, was anointed. Therefore, this place was named Ādirājya (first kingship).”452

II. Bhadrāśva

III. Mathurā

A. The Prediction about Upagupta454

B. The Former Life of Upagupta457

C. The Brahmin Nīlabhūti459

D. The Obstruction of the Buddha’s Way by a Goddess

E. The Yakṣa Gardabha

IV. Otalā Park

A. The Visit of the Brahmin Otalāyana476

B. Kacaṅgalā486

V. Vairambhya

A. The Brahmin in a Park

B. King Agnidatta’s Offer496

C. Breaking a Hut521

D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin524

VI. Ayodhyā

A. The Simile of a Log and the Going Forth of Nanda, the Herdsman525

B. The Former Lives of Nanda and the Frog

VII. The Ganges

A. Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles

B. The Former Lives of the Haṃsas, Fish, and Turtles

VIII. Hungry Ghosts

A. The Conversation with the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts

B. The Previous Lives of the Five Hundred Hungry Ghosts

IX. Velāma552


9.

Chapter Nine

9.­1

Summary of Contents:560

Kumāravardhana, Krauñcāna,
Aṅgadikā, Maṇivatī
Sālabalā, Sālibalā,
Suvarṇaprastha, Sāketā
Rice Soup,561 Śrāvastī,
Anavatapta, Nagarabindu,
And Vaiśālī.

I. Kumāravardhana

9.­2

Thereupon the Blessed One arrived in the country of Kumāravardhana, where he said to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, in this place a king named Upoṣadha was born and grew up.562 Therefore, this city was named Kumāravardhana.”563

II. Krauñcāna

III. Aṅgadikā

IV. Maṇivatī

V. Sālabalā567

VI. Sālibalā

VII. Suvarṇaprastha

VIII. Sāketā568

IX. Rice Soup574

A. The Peasants’ Going Forth and the Oxen’s Rebirth in Heaven577

B. The Former Lives of the Peasants and Oxen581

C. Toyikā584

X. Śrāvastī

A. A Leprous Beggar Woman’s Offering of Water Used for Boiling Rice598

B. The Offerings by King Prasenajit604

C. The Former Life of King Prasenajit605

D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman610

E. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Offerings Made by the Buddha in His Former Lives613

F. Former Life Stories I618

1. Māndhātṛ620

a. The Story of King Māndhātṛ621

b. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: The Son of the Head of a Guild656

c. A Former Life of King Māndhātṛ: A Grain Merchant661

2. Mahāsudarśana662

3. Velāma668

4. Kuśa672

a. The Story of Prince Kuśa673

b. The Former Life of Prince Kuśa683

5. Triśaṅku685

6. Mahādeva687

7. King Nimi691

8. Ādarśamukha696

9. Sudhana706

a. The Story of King Sudhana707

b. The Story of Prince Sudhana708

10. Viśvantara769

a. Viśvantara’s Story I770

b. Viśvantara’s Story II808

11. Saṃdhāna814

G. Former Life Stories II817

1. Bālāha819

2. A King825

3. The Snake828

4. Two Heads833

5. The Lapwing835

6. The Parrot837

7. The Banquet839

8. The Turtle841

9. Susena842

10. Merchants844

H. Former Life Stories III846

1. Six Tusks848

2. The Rabbit857

3. Parents860

a. The Story of Śyāma861

b. Breaking Wrong Laws864

4. Water Born866

5. Words of the Forest874

6. The Elephant876

7. The Nāga878

8. Dhṛtarāṣṭra880

I. The Bodhisattva as Four Teachers882

1. The Story of the Teacher Sunetra883

2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu884

3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi885

4. The Story of the Teacher Govinda895

J. The First Resolution and the First Veneration of a Buddha

5. The Story of King Prabhāsa901

6. The Story of the Potter Bṛhaddyuti903

K. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Veneration of Past Buddhas904

L. The Question of Ānanda or Section of Many Buddhas909

M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā934

XI. Anavatapta938

A. The Buddha’s Visit to Lake Anavatapta939

B. The Contest of Magical Power between Śāriputra and Mahā­maudgalyāyana943

1. A Story of the Present944

2. A Story of the Past: The Painter and the Mechanic947

3. A Story of the Past: The Two Painters950

4. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (1)951

5. A Story of the Past: The Ṛṣis Śaṅkha and Likhita (2)952

6. A Story of the Past: The Ivory Carver and the Painter953

C. Verses of the Elders I957

1. Kāśyapa958

2. Śāriputra961

3. Maudgalyāyana964

4. Śobhita966

5. Sumanas967

6. Koṭīviṃśa969

7. Vāgīśa970

8. Piṇḍola972

9. Svāgata974

10. Nandika976

D. Verses of the Elders II980

1. Yaśas (1)981

2. Śaivala982

3. Bakkula984

4. Sthavira986

5. The Three987

6. Yaśas (2)988

7. Jyotiṣka991

8. Rāṣṭrapāla992

9. Svāti996

10. Jaṅghākāśyapa998

E. Verses of the Elders III1001

1. Panthaka1002

2. Sarpadāsa1004

3. Aniruddha1005

4. Kāla1013

5. Rāhula1015

6. Nanda1017

7. Dravya1019

8. Upasena1020

9. Bhadrika1021

10. Lavaṇabhadrika1022

F. Verses of the Elders IV1024

1. Madhuvāsiṣṭha1025

2. Hetu1026

3. Kauṇḍinya1027

4. Upālin1030

5. Prabhākara1033

6. Revata1034

7. The Sugata (prose)1036

a. The Son of a Householder1037

b. A Caravan Leader1040

c. A Young Brahmin1042

d. Bharadvāja1044

e. The Cause of the False Slander by Cañcā

I) A Brahmin1049

II) Mṛṇāla1050

f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha1053

g. Uttara1054

h. A Physician1063

i. The Son of a Fisherman1065

j. A Wrestler1066

8. The Sugata (verse)1067

a. Introduction

b. Mṛṇāla

c. A Brahmin

d. Bharadvāja

e. The Son of a Householder

f. A Caravan Leader

g. The Son of a Fisherman

h. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha

i. A Physician

j. A Wrestler

k. Uttara

l. Conclusion

G. The Invitation by Viśākhā

XII. Nagarabindu

XIII. Vaiśālī

A. The Invitation by Dhanika and His Family1075

B. The Former Lives of Dhanika and His Family

C. The Rules on Food


10.

Chapter Ten

10.­1

Summary of Contents:1077

The Sick, Foods,
Breakfast, Leftovers,
Fruits from Forests, Lotus,
Lotus Roots, and Miṇḍhaka.

I. The Sick

10.­2

The following took place in Śrāvastī.


10.­3

There once was a sick monk in Śrāvastī. He requested a doctor, “Sir, prescribe medicine for me.”

Having asked the cause of the disease, the doctor said, “O noble one, have rice soup, and you will recover your health.”

II. Foods1087

III. Breakfast

IV. Leftovers

A. Alms-Food Obtained Previously

B. Leftovers Taken by Monks to the Monastery

C. Leftovers Brought by Laymen

V. Fruits Growing in the Forest

VI. Lotus

VII. Lotus Roots

VIII. Miṇḍhaka1097

A. The Conversion of Miṇḍhaka

B. Invitation after Mealtime

C. The Acceptance of Money

D. The Acceptance of Guḍa

E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family1112


11.

Chapter Eleven

11.­1

Summary of Contents:1122

The Drink Offered by Kaineya Was Received,1123 The Town of Kāśi, Barley Porridge,1124
Khādyaka in Pāpā,1125 Doubts, and Foul Foods.

I. The Drink Offered by Kaineya Was Received1126

A. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Prose)

11.­2

The Blessed One was once staying in the dwelling place in Ādumā.

1. The Sermon to the Four Great Kings1127

2. The Former Lives of the Four Great Kings1144

3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One

4. Śaila and Kaineya Go Forth

5. The Instruction by Three Disciples of the Buddha

6. The Former Lives of the Three Disciples

B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse)1153

II. The Town of Kāśi, Barley Porridge

III. Khādyaka in Pāpā

IV. Doubts

V. Foul Foods1184

A. A Story of the Present about the Great Peacock Charm

B. Stories of the Buddha’s Former Lives Related to the Great Peacock Charm


ab.

Abbreviations

AA Aṅguttara­nikāya-Aṭṭhakathā. Edited by Walleser and Kopp (1924–56).
AG Anavatapta­gāthā.
AKBh Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya. Edited by Pradhan = Pradhan 1967.
AKUp Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā. (Section numbers are based on Honjō 1984 and 2014.)
AN Aṅguttara­nikāya = Morris et al. 1885–1961.
AdhvG Adhikaraṇa­vastu. Edited by Gnoli (1978).
Ap Apadāna = Lilley 2000.
BAK Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā = Chandra Das and Vidyābhūshana 1940.
BHSD Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. Vol. II Dictionary = Edgerton 1953.
Bhv Bhaiṣajya­vastu.
BhvY Bhaiṣajya­vastu. Japanese translation by Yao = Yao 2013a.
CPD The Critical Pāli Dictionary = Trenckner et al. 1924–92.
Ch. Chinese translation.
ChDas Tibetan English Dictionary = Das 1902.
Crv Carma­vastu.
Cīv Cīvara­vastu.
D Degé xylograph (scanned and published by the Buddhist Digital Resource Center).
DA Dīgha­nikāya-Aṭṭhakathā = Rhys Davids et al. 1968–71.
DN Dīgha­nikāya = Rhys Davids and Carpenter 1890–1911.
DPPN Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names = Malalasekera 1937.
DhpA Dhamma­padattha­kathā = Norman 1906.
Divy Divyāvadāna = Cowell and Neil [1886] 1987.
DĀ Dīrghāgama.
DĀ 35 Ambāṣṭha­sūtra. Edited by Melzer (2010a).
DĀc Dīrghāgama. Chinese translation (Taishō no. 1 Chang ahan jing 長阿含經).
EĀc Ekottarikāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 125 Zengyi ahan jing 増壹阿含經).
GBhv The Bhaiṣajya­vastu in the Gilgit manuscript = GMNAI i, 46–134.
GM Gilgit manuscripts of the Vinaya­vastu edited by Dutt = Dutt 1942–50 (page numbers of Bhv, which is in part i, is referred to just with “GM,” and those of other vastus with “GM ii, iii, and iv,” with part numbers).
GMNAI i Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 1, Vinaya Texts = Clarke 2014.
H Hemis manuscript.
J Jātaka = Fausbøll [1877–96] 1962–64.
Jäschke Tibetan English Dictionary = Jäschke 1881.
KA Kaṭhināvadāna = Degener 1990.
Kṣv Kṣudraka­vastu.
MN Majjhima­nikāya = Trenckner et al. [1888–1925] 1974–79.
MPS Mahā­parinirvāṇa-sūtra = Waldschmidt 1950–51.
MSA Mahā­sudarśanāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
MSV Mūla­sarvāstivāda Vinaya.
MW A Sanskrit-English Dictionary = Monier-Williams 1899.
MdhA Māndhātāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
Merv-av Avadāna anthology from Merv = Karashima and Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya 2015.
Mma Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī-sūtra = Skilling 1994–97, 608–22.
Mmvr Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rajñī = Takubo 1972.
Mv Mahā­vastu = Senart 1882–97.
Mvy Mahā­vyutpatti = Sakaki 1916.
MĀc Madhyamāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 26 Zhong ahan jing 中阿含經).
N Narthang xylograph.
NBhv The newly identified Bhaiṣajya­vastu fragments held in a private collection, Virginia, and the Schøyen Collection.
Negi Tibetan–Sanskrit Dictionary = Negi 1993–2005.
P Peking xylograph.
PLv Pāṇḍulohitaka­vastu.
PTSD PTS’s Pāli–English Dictionary = Rhys Davids and Stede 1921–25.
Ph phug brag manuscript.
Prjv Pravrajyāvastu. Translation in Miller 2018.
PrjvVW Pravrajyāvastu edited by Vogel and Wille. I: Vogel and Wille 1984; II: 1992; III: 1996; IV: 2002 (all these files are now available in one pdf file online, Vogel and Wille 2014).
R Ragya printed Kangyur.
S Stok Palace Manuscript.
SHT Sanskrithandschriften aus den Turfanfunden.
SN Saṃyutta­nikāya = Feer [1884–98] 1975–2006.
SWTF Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden = Waldschmidt et al. 1973–2018.
Sbhv Saṅghabheda­vastu.
SbhvG Saṅghabheda­vastu. edited by Gnoli (1977–78).
Sh Shey Palace manuscript.
Skt. Sanskrit.
Sn Sutta­nipāta = Andersen and Smith [1913] 1984.
Sumav Sumāgadhāvadāna = Iwamoto 1979.
SĀc Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 99 Za ahan jing 雜阿含經).
SĀc2 Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 100 Bieyi za ahan jing 別譯雜阿含經).
SĀc3 Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 101 Za ahan jing 雜阿含經).
T Tokyo manuscript.
Taishō Taishō shinshū daizōkyō 大正新脩大藏經. 100 vols. Tokyo: Taishō Issaikyō Kankōkai 大正一切經刊行會, 1924–34.
TheraG Theragāthā = Oldenberg and Pischel 1883.
Tib. Tibetan translation.
U Urga printed Kangyur .
Ud  Udāna = Steinthal 1982.
Ug Uttara­grantha.
Uv Udāna­varga = Bernhard 1965–68, i.
UvTib Udāna­varga in Tibetan translation = Champa Thupten Zongtse 1990.
VS Vinaya­sūtra transliterated by Study Group of Sanskrit Manuscripts in Tibetan dBu med Script.
Vin Vinayapiṭaka in Pāli = Oldenberg [1879–83] 1982–1997.
Viś I The first story of Viśvantara in the Bhv.
Viś II The second story of Viśvantara in the Bhv.
Viś III The story of Viśvantara in the Sbhv.
Viś IV Viśvantarāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
Vvbh Vinaya­vibhaṅga.
ms Manuscript.
Śav Śayanāsana­vastu.
ŚavG Śayanāsana­vastu. Edited by Gnoli (1978).

n.

Notes

n.­1
For an overview of the entire Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, see Clarke 2015, 73–81.
n.­2
Folios 91–293: GM i; GMNAI i plates 46–134.
n.­3
For details, see Yao 2018 and literature referred to therein.
n.­4
8.­22–8.­61 in the Tibetan version; see note to the corresponding translation.
n.­5
See Hiraoka 1998.
n.­6
Taishō no. 1448, Genben shuoyiqieyoubu pinaiye yaoshi 根本説一切有部毘奈耶藥事, Taishō 24.1a1–97a24.
n.­7
See the Pedurma edition, bka’ ’gyur ii 745, 867n14–15.
n.­8
Csoma [1836] 1984.
n.­32
Cf. the Nidāna in the Ug, pa F.81.a.6–81.b.1; Taishō no. 1456, 24.420a7–12 (Kishino 2013, 144–45).
n.­33
Cf. Kṣv, tha F.181.b–182.b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.269c.
n.­38
The last words of this summary, be’i ra to// sprin can bya rog rnams yin no, cannot be identified in the following passages. GBhv is damaged here.
n.­41
Whereas this section of the Bhv prohibits only eating the flesh of elephants and nāgas, the Muktaka of the Ug prohibits the flesh of other kinds of beings such as crows, dogs, raptors, mules, foxes, and monkeys (pa F.157.a.2–158.b.7; Taishō no. 1456, 24.439b21–24). Cf. Kishino 2016, 242.
n.­60
This story of Pūrṇa has a parallel in the Pūrṇāvadāna, chapter 2 of the Divy (English trsl. Tatelman 2000; Rotman 2008–17, i).
n.­108
This story has a parallel in the Vvbh, D ja F.221.a–F.224.a, Taishō no. 1442, 23.842c–844a). It explains the origin of a festival held for two nāga kings, which is also mentioned in the Prjv (1.144), the Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga, and the Avadāna­śataka (Schopen 2007, 218ff.).
n.­114
Here, the story of the nāga king Apalāla begins. See n.­128. The series of episodes including that of a brahmin’s rebirth as Apalāla, his conversion by the Buddha, the competition between Magadha and Vaiśālī at the occasion of the Buddha’s crossing the Ganges, the quelling of an epidemic by the Buddha in Vaiśālī, etc. have parallels in Taishō no. 155 Foshuo pusa benhang jing 佛説菩薩本行經.
n.­119
Tib. sdom la; Ch. nei she song yue 内攝頌曰: “said in the internal summary of contents (i.e., “section index” in the present translation).” We opt for Tib.
n.­120
Ch. bo zha zhu zhang lin 波吒竹仗林 (*Pāṭali, *Veṇuyaṣṭikā). Despite this Summary of Contents, Ch. does not include the episode of the Buddha’s stay in Nālandā and Veṇuyaṣṭikā.
n.­121
Strangely, neither this word nor the corresponding episode appears in the following story.
n.­122
This event is explained in detail in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 186ff.; nga F.238.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.197b28ff.). The Bhv presents the story of the birth of this elephant in a later part (10.­54).
n.­126
In this section, the story of how the Buddha was asked to end the epidemic that had swept through Vaiśālī is recounted. The subject of the epidemic fades away and then suddenly reappears at the end of the section about Vaiśālī, ending with the quelling of the epidemic.
n.­131
This section corresponds to SĀc 987 and SĀc2 212.
n.­135
This section corresponds to SĀc 403.
n.­144
This story has a parallel in EĀc 38.11. Cf. Kuan 2013, 611. The Bhv presents in a later part (2. Mahāsudarśana) another story of King Mahāsudarśana, the content of which is totally different from that in this section.
n.­145
The story extending from this section (“The Ganges”) to the next section (“Mahāpraṇāda”) has a parallel in the Maitreyāvadāna, chapter 3 of the Divy (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 119–33).
n.­149
Cf. J 264 (ii 333) and J 489 (iv 325).
n.­150
BhvY 3.6.1 (p. 102).
n.­151
BhvY 3.6.2 (p. 102ff.).
n.­152
BhvY 3.6.3 (p. 105ff.). For variations of the story of King Śaṅkha (and the Buddha Maitreya), see Anālayo [2014b] 2017, 349–91.
n.­156
BhvY 3.6.4 (p. 107ff.).
n.­159
BhvY 3.a (p. 110ff.). Hereafter the story corresponds to the MPS (p. 160ff.).
n.­160
BhvY 3.b (p. 111ff.). This section corresponds to SĀc 854, SN 55.10, and AKUp 9035. Cf. Honjō 2014, ii 921–23; Yao 2010, 3.2.7.
n.­165
BhvY 3.c (p. 114ff.). This section corresponds to AKUp 2051. See Honjō 2014, i 225–28.
n.­169
This and the following sections (A to E) have been divided by the present translator for convenience. This section (VII.A) and the third section (C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī) correspond to SĀc 622. See Yao 2010, 3.2.8. For parallels to this sūtra and a Sanskrit text of this part of the MPS revised with later identified manuscript fragments, see Hosoda 2014, 115–21.
n.­172
This section has a parallel in AN 5.195. SĀc 1149 is also close to this story. See Yao 2010, 3.2.9.
n.­178
This section has parallels in the Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra, which survives in Tibetan translation, and the Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī­sūtra, which survives in Sanskrit. See Yao 2010, 3.2.10 and n.­126. See Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, trans., The Mahāsūtra “On Entering the City of Vaiśālī”, Toh 312.
n.­185
Ch. lacks this summary of contents. It is unknown whether NBhv included it, due to the damage to the corresponding folio.
n.­186
Here Ch. abbreviates the section with the statement: “As explained in detail in the teachings of the Jijian jing 飢儉經, the Sūtra of Famine, and also as in the Daopin chuanlai jing 道品傳來經, the Sūtra of the Tradition of the *Mārgavarga, Liuji jing 六集經, the Sūtra of the group of six, and Daniepan jing 大涅槃經, the *Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.” On the other hand, the contents of this section in Tib. (Chapter 4. I) correspond to SN 47.9 and, presumably, a missing sūtra in the SĀc, the contents of which are included in the MPS (see Yao 2010, 3.2.11). NBhv provides a sentence that, in spite of the manuscript’s damaged state, seems to be similar to the original Skt. that Yijing translated. The manuscript reads: “…as in the Sūtra of Famine in the *Mārga­varga­nipāta, in the Ṣaṭsūtrika­nipāta…” This proves that “The Sūtra of the Tradition of the *Mārgavarga” in Ch. is, properly speaking, the title of a chapter of the Saṃyuktāgama that includes the Sūtra of Famine. In addition, “The Sūtra of the Group of Six” is the title of a chapter of the Dīrghāgama that includes the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra. To sum up, NBhv and Ch. both state that they abbreviate this section, which corresponds to the Sūtra of Famine in the *Mārga­varga­nipāta in the Saṃyuktāgama and also to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra in the Ṣaṭsūtrikanipāta in the Dīrghāgama. See Yao 2013b.
n.­194
The following passage corresponds to MĀc 67, MN 83, EĀc 50.4, and the introductory section of the EĀc, AKUp 2050, etc. The story of King Mahādeva and Nimi appears again in the Bhv (6. Mahādeva and 7. King Nimi). While the story here follows exactly the Mahādevasūtra in the Madhyamāgama of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins, the second story mentioned above has been slightly changed from the Madhyamāgama version in accord with the context of the Bhv (Yao 2007; Forthcoming b). For a study of parallels to this story based on the EĀc version, see Anālayo 2011a, i 466–74; 2016b, 113–214.
n.­205
Ch. lacks this section. NBhv corresponds to Tib.
n.­208
Ch. lacks this section. The following story corresponds to SĀc 1095, etc. (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.13). A story related to this encounter between the Buddha and Māra in Sālā appears in the Bhv (c. A Young Brahmin).
n.­210
Panglung mentions Taishō no. 2121 as a parallel to this story. But the parallel story in Taishō no. 2121, Jinglü yixiang 經律異相 (more precisely, sūtra no. 45.14, Taishō 53.237c19ff.) is an extract from Taishō no. 212, Chuyao jing 出曜經 (Taishō 4.626c29ff.).
n.­213
The following four sections, from VII. Bhārgava to X. Kanthaka, are related to a series of episodes in the life story of the Buddha in the Sbhv. For the ṛṣi Bhārgava, see SbhvG i 93; nga F.15.b.
n.­214
Cf. SbhvG i.92–93; nga F.14.b–15.a.
n.­215
Cf. SbhvG i. 91; nga F.13.b.
n.­216
Cf. SbhvG i 91; nga F.14.a.
n.­218
The Sbhv does not mention this place name.
n.­219
The following story corresponds to a part of the MPS (Waldschmidt 1948) and a part of EĀc 42.3 (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.14). The story is depicted in reliefs from Gandhāra, where it is clearly connected to the Buddha’s nirvāṇa (Zin 2006b).
n.­227
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­228
D bya can; S byed can. This entry indicates a place name bye ma can (*Sikatin), which later appears in the corresponding section ( X. Sikatin).
n.­229
In this short section, a sūtra abbreviated in Tib. is fully narrated in Ch., which is a rather rare occurrence. The sūtra in question, the title of which is not mentioned in Ch., corresponds to SĀc 263, SN 22.101 (mistakenly referred to as SN 47.19 in BhvY 149), etc. Cf. Salomon 2018, 121ff., 149ff.; Yao 2011, 3.2.15. Both SĀc 263 and SN 22.101 include a parable of a carpenter using an axe, which explains the two different ways of referring to this section in the General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines and the Summary of Contents of Chapter Five: “The Carpenter” and “The Axe.”
n.­230
This sentence is an editorial insertion in the text.
n.­231
This passage is related to a part of the Buddha’s life story in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 32–33; ga F.273.a–b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.105a–b).
n.­233
Cf. SbhvG i 45; ga F.280.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.108a.
n.­234
For the related passage in the Sbhv, see n.­232.
n.­237
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­238
This section corresponds to SĀc 807, SN 54.11, etc. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.17, Yao forthcoming a, and Anālayo [2007] 2015, 333–45.
n.­239
Ch. “two months.”
n.­242
This section corresponds to the Ambāṣṭhasūtra, the thirty-fifth sūtra of the Dīrghāgama manuscript identified at the end of the twentieth century (DĀ 35), manuscript fragments of a sūtra found in Central Asia, a part of the Kṣv, DĀc 20, and DN 3. For a detailed study of DĀ 35, including a comparison with the Bhv and Kṣv, see Melzer 2010a, 93–281. The present translation generally follows Melzer in DĀ 35 regarding the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­316
The following passage corresponds to MĀc 212, MN 90. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.9. Ch. abbreviates the section with this statement: 復至日出聚落. 爲二姊妹女人, 一名賢喜, 二名明月, 廣説如經, “Again (the Blessed One departed and) arrived at Sunrise Village. For two sisters named Excellent Pleasure and Bright Moon‍—as explained in detail in the sūtra.”
n.­331
This section has a parallel in the Chuyao jing 出曜経 32 (Taishō no. 212, 4.760a–b).
n.­340
Although the place name mentioned in this section is “Where There Is a City,” the section is referred to as “City” in the summary of contents.
n.­342
Most of this section corresponds to SĀc 971 and SĀc2 205, with a number of differences. See Yao 2011, 3.2.20. The story is employed as an explanation of the rule that is established at the end of this section.
n.­349
This section corresponds to Divy 4 Brāhmaṇa­dārikāvadāna (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 135–42). There is also a parallel in the Dazhidulun 大智度論, Taishō no. 1509, 25.115a–b (Hiraoka 2009, 43). The present translation follows Divy 4 regarding the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­353
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­354
This section corresponds to SĀc 813 and SN 54.10. The text in the Bhv is too abbreviated to make adequate sense. See Yao 2011, 3.2.21 and forthcoming a. Regarding the mindfulness of breathing in and breathing out explained in this section, see Choong 2000, 225–27.
n.­355
Here Ch. abbreviates this section with the statement 此經廣説如雜阿笈摩, “This sūtra should be recited as explained in detail in the Saṃyuktāgama.”
n.­360
The first half of this section corresponds to the first half of SĀc 36 and SN 22.43 (this part has been translated into English in Dhammadinnā 2014), and the second half of the section corresponds to the second half of SĀc 813 (see I. Kimpilā in this chapter). See Yao 2011, 3.2.22 and Yao forthcoming a. Cf., also, SĀc 639, which includes the teachings about “the island that is yourself,” etc., and is set in the same place.
n.­366
This section parallels MĀc 132, MN 82, and the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra that survives in Skt. manuscript (Waldschmidt 1980). For a comparative text of the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra and Bhv Tib., see Matsumura 1985. Cf., also, Anālayo 2011a, i 451–66; ii 1047–48. The story of Rāṣṭrapāla is narrated in verse in a later part of the Bhv, in the Anavatapta­gāthā section (9.­1875).
n.­378
The story in this section has a parallel in the Stuti­brāhmaṇāvadāna, chapter 5 of the Divy (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 143–49). Étienne Lamotte has identified the place names that appear in this and the following sections, although he has not given in full the grounds for his identifications (Lamotte 1951, 152–58).
n.­383
The first half of the Indra­nāma­brāhmaṇāvadāna, chapter 6 of the Divy, is parallel to this section (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 151–59; for other parallels, see Hiraoka 2011, 236–37).
n.­386
The beginning of the following story resembles a part of the story of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (10.­68–10.­72).
n.­387
Cf. Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XLII (English trsl. from Bhv Tib.); Chavannes 1910–11, ii 420–24 (French trsl. from Bhv Ch.); Merv-av 295.
n.­392
English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XLII. Parallel stories: J 177; Merv-av, 295.
n.­394
BhvY 7.10.1 (p. 227ff.). This story has a parallel in the Muktaka in the Ug: pa F.198.b.1–199.a.4; Taishō no. 1452, 24.454b–c.
n.­401
BhvY 7.10.2 (p. 228ff.). The following story of the Buddha’s travel to the north to convert the nāga king Apalāla is narrated in different texts (Ono 1916, 91–100, 482–89; Lamotte 1966, 130–36). Place names vary considerably in these sources.
n.­409
BhvY 7.10.3 (p. 230).
n.­413
BhvY 7.10.4 (p. 231).
n.­415
BhvY 7.10.5 (p. 231).
n.­416
BhvY 7.10.6 (p. 231).
n.­418
BhvY 7.10.7 (p. 231ff.).
n.­426
BhvY 7.10.8 (p. 233).
n.­430
BhvY 7.10.9 (p. 233ff.).
n.­432
BhvY 7.10.10 (p. 234).
n.­433
BhvY 7.10.11 (p. 234).
n.­434
BhvY 7.10.12 (p. 234).
n.­440
This story has parallels in the Binaiye 鼻奈耶 (Taishō no. 1464, 24.858a) and the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.28b–29b).
n.­451
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­452
The Sbhv gives the story of the beginnings of kingship, in which the first king in the world is called Mahāsammata (SbhvG i 15; ga F.262.b). However, in the story in the Sbhv there is no mention of either the place name or the anointing of the king.
n.­454
This prediction has parallels in Divy 26 and 27, SĀc 604 and 640. Cf., also, AKBh 183.10, AKUp 3097 (Honjō 2014, i 467). In the Kṣv, the prediction is repeated by Ānanda to Śāṇakavāsin after the nirvāṇa of the Buddha and Mahākāśyapa (da F.320.b.1–4; Taishō no. 1451, 24.410b).
n.­457
Cf. Strong 1992, 44–45 (English trsl. from Skt. Bhv); Deeg 2007, 46–47 (English trsl. from the Divy).
n.­459
For Skt. parallels to this story, see Wille 2014a, 193; 2014b, 230.
n.­476
This story is entitled Otalāyanasūtra in Skt., in which the story is abbreviated, and corresponds to SN 48.42 and AKUp 9005. Fumio Enomoto has suggested that the SĀc once included a parallel sūtra to this in a fascicle that is lost today (Enomoto 1984). See Yao 2011, 3.2.25, and forthcoming a.
n.­486
For comparative studies of the parallel stories of Kacaṅgalā, see Durt 2005, Muldoon-Hules 2009, and Matsumoto 2010. In addition to the parallels referred to by Durt, see Merv-av, 210–11.
n.­496
This story, in which the Buddha and his monks have to eat horse-fodder barley during the rainy-season retreat despite a brahmin king’s promise to provide food for them, has parallels in different vinayas and other sources. Hirakawa has noted that the story’s subject and location in vinaya s differ: in the Pāli Vinaya, the Sifen lü (Dharmaguptaka Vinaya), and the Wufen lü (Mahīśāsaka Vinaya), this story is located in the introductory section of the entire vinaya as the account of the event that caused the Buddha to declare the general principle that each regulation should be established only after some practical problem has arisen. In the Shisong lü (the so-called Sarvāstivāda Vinaya) and the MSV (Bhv), utterly unrelated to the above principle, the story is focused on a karmic teaching about the Buddha’s evil action in his former life and its result in the present (Hirakawa 1993–95, i 107–115). The following is the plot of these parallels (proper names, etc., based on the Bhv): 1. The Buddha arrives at Vairambhya (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 2. A brahmin (king) asks the Buddha questions (Pā = AN 8.11; MĀc 157, etc.). 3. The brahmin (king) offers food, etc., for the rainy-season retreat (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 4. The brahmin fails to carry out the above offer and the Buddha and monks experience difficulty in obtaining food (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 5. A caravan leader offers horse-fodder barley to the Buddha (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 6. Mahā­maudgalyāyana offers to resolve the matter using his magical power, but the Buddha refuses (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi = EĀc 42.3; MPS 31.56–83). 7. A woman cooks the barley (Shi; Bhv = SĀc 722 [parallel only to Bhv]). 8. Śāriputra requests the Buddha to establish the rules of training, but the Buddha refuses (Pā; Si; Wu). 9. Only after the rainy-season retreat, the brahmin (king) realizes that the food has not been provided. He repents and offers food to the Buddha (Pā; Wu; Shi; Bhv). Park 2012 also gives a comparison of the parallel stories. For another parallel, see Rosen 1959, 165–68.
n.­521
Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the main content of this section, referring to “the Vairambhya­sūtra in the chapter of the fours (catuṣkanipāta) in the Ekottarikāgama” and “the fourth chapter (第四品) of the Ekottarikāgama (増一阿笈摩),” respectively. The abbreviated part, the Buddha’s teaching to the monks, corresponds to AN 4.51; however, AN 4.51 does not include the conversation about whether the hut should be broken or not and has a different location for the narrative. In contrast, AKUp 4010 corresponds to this entire section (Honjō 2014, ii 524–26). Although the AKUp does not mention any sūtra title, it is likely to be quoting a sūtra, not the vinaya, since the relevant part of the AKBh on which the AKUp comments states “said in the sūtra,” quoting a few lines. Waldschmidt, basing himself on the place name Vairambhya, assumes AN 8.11 and MĀc 157 to be parallels to the sūtra abbreviated here, but this has to be rejected on the basis of Tib. (Waldschmidt 1980, 141–42; Schopen 2000, 94, 136n16). For the connections between these sūtras and the story of the Buddha’s eating horse-fodder barley, see n.­496.
n.­524
This story is narrated again later in the Bhv, in the “Tathāgata chapter” in the Anavatapta­gāthā section (f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha).
n.­525
This section corresponds to SĀc 1174, SN 35.200, and EĀc 43.3 (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.28). SĀc 1174 consists only of the conversation between the Buddha and a monk and the story of Nanda’s going forth, with neither the episode of the frog nor that of Nanda’s cry of fear. The SN and EĀc versions are more concise. Due to the lack of any other evidence, it is not particularly clear which part of this section belongs to “a sūtra.” For a Gāndhārī parallel, see Glass 2007, 14; for parallels to stock passages, see Chung 2008, 82. For the reference to the story in the Vyākhyāyukti, see Skilling 2000, 346.
n.­552
This story, narrating a king’s encounter with an old man, a sick man, and a dead man, resembles a part of the Buddha’s biography. Cf. SbhvG ii 65–71; ga F.291.b–nga F.5.a.
n.­560
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­561
In the text, a story about “rice soup” is followed by a story of five hundred peasants, but the latter is not mentioned in the summaries of contents in either Skt. or Tib. Further, there is an episode located in Toyikā before the scene moves to “Śrāvastī.” Although the summary of contents in Skt. gives the entry “Toyikā” before “Śrāvastī,” Tib. lacks the former.
n.­562
Upoṣadha is the father of King Māndhātṛ, whose story is narrated later in the Bhv (Chapter Nine, VIII. Sāketā).
n.­563
The name Kumāravardhana is a compound consisting of kumāra (“prince”) and vardhana (“growth”). It seems that this and the next episode have been conflated here in Ch.: “Then the Blessed One arrived at the city of Kumāravardhana (tongchang 童長) and said to the venerable Ānanda, ‘Once a king was born and grew up in this city. His name was Upoṣadha. Therefore this city was named Krauñcāna (xiangsheng 象聲).’ ”
n.­567
The episode of Sālabalā is absent in the Degé edition, probably as a result of confusion of the two episodes of Sālabalā and Sālibalā. In contrast, Ch. gives only Sālabalā, suoluolishu 娑羅力樹, and lacks Sālibalā. Skt. gives both.
n.­568
The story of King Māndhātṛ in this section, VIII. Sāketā, partially corresponds to the Māndhātṛsūtra narrated in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit later in the Bhv (9.­138 ff.) with many differences. See the notes there for parallels and comparisons.
n.­574
Only Ch. has a summary of contents just before this section: “The cause of the well of gruel and golden barley, of peasants and oxen, of a leprous woman’s water used for washing rice, of King Prasenajit, of a poor woman’s lamp, and of King Māndhātṛ.”The series of stories from Rice Soup to C. Toyikā corresponds to Divy 31. According to Hiraoka, Sudhana­kumārāvadānam, the title given at the end of Divy 31, is incorrect and should be corrected to Pañca­kārṣaka­śatāvadānam (Hiraoka 2007, ii 275n56). A story somewhat similar to the story of Rice Soup is found in Merv-av 219.
n.­577
Section label 9.a.1 in BhvY (p. 286ff.). This section does not appear in the summary of contents in Skt. and Tib. (9.­1), but is mentioned there in Ch.
n.­581
Section label 9.a.2 in BhvY (p. 287ff.). This section does not appear in the summary of contents (9.­1).
n.­584
Section label 9.b in BhvY (p. 288ff.). This section is not referred to in the summary of contents (9.­1) and corresponds to the second half of Divy 6 and the second half of Divy 31 (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 154–59, 419–20). The parallel in Divy 6 seems to have been caused erroneously (Hiraoka 2007, i 160). André Bareau has summarized parallel stories of the stūpa of the Buddha Kāśyapa in the Sifen lü (Dharmaguptaka Vinaya), Wufen lü (Mahīśāsaka Vinaya), Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya, Binaiye, and the Kṣv (1962, 257ff.). Takushū Sugimoto has also listed the first three of these stories and the story of Toyikā in the Bhv along with other materials, including the DhpA, and has pointed out reports about the Buddha Kāśyapa’s stūpa made by Faxian and Xuanzang (Gaoseng Faxian zhuan 高僧法顕伝, Taishō no. 2085, 51.861a; Datang xiyuji 大唐西域記, Taishō no. 2087, 51.900c; Sugimoto 1978). Whereas Bareau considered the stories in the Sifen lü, Wufen lü, and Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya to originate from an old common source, Gregory Schopen proposed the opposite view, introducing the stories in the Bhv and Divy ([1985] 1997, 28–29). Schopen regarded this version in the Bhv and Divy as an old account preceding the other parallel stories, based on his observations that the version does not have the subplots found in the other versions and knows nothing about a stūpa at Toyikā, only about relics.
n.­598
Section number 9.10.1 in BhvY (p. 292ff.). The series of stories from here to D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman corresponds to Divy 7 Nagarāvarambikāvadāna (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 161–75, 420–22). Cf. TheraG 1054–56. Cf., also, BAK 17 Ādarśa­mukhāvadāna (Straube 2009, 108–21, 254–59), which summarizes the series of stories from this section to F. 8. Ādarśamukha in the Bhv. There is another parallel in the Gilgit manuscripts (Hinüber 2014, 97).
n.­604
Section number 9.10.2 in BhvY (p. 296ff.). For parallels, see n.­598.
n.­605
Section number 9.10.3 in BhvY (p. 297ff.). For parallels, see n.­598.
n.­610
Section number 9.10.4 in BhvY (p. 299ff.). For parallels, see n.­598. Cf., also, Xian’yu jing 賢愚経 (Taishō no. 202, 4.370c–371c).
n.­613
Section number 9.10.5 in BhvY (p. 301). A story somewhat similar to this episode, in which the Buddha remonstrates with King Prasenajit for expecting a great result from his offerings, is in EĀc 23.1 (Taishō no. 125, 2.609a ff.). Cf. Anālayo [2014a] 2016b, 392–93.
n.­618
Section number 9.10.6 in BhvY (p. 301ff.).
n.­620
Section number 9.10.6.1 in BhvY (p. 302ff.). Cf. VIII. Sāketā in this chapter. This section was translated from Tib. by Schiefner (tr. by Ralston, 1882, chap. I). Although the story is referred to as “the Māndhātṛsūtra in the Section Connected to Kings in the Madhyamāgama” in Skt. and Ch., which abbreviate the story after the first few lines, it is not entirely clear which part of the story in the Bhv corresponds to the sūtra. The story has parallels in MĀc 60 Sizhou jing 四洲経, Divy 17 Māndhātāvadāna (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 336–71, 438–43), and the Māndhātāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (MdhA; see Matsumura 1980, 163–97, 348–54). For further parallels, see Hiraoka 2007, i 398; Wille 2014a, 197. For Māndhātṛ’s story in art, see Zin 2012.
n.­621
Section number 9.10.6.1.1 in BhvY (p. 302ff.).
n.­656
Section number 9.10.6.1.2 in BhvY (p. 317ff.). The following two stories of the former lives of King Māndhātṛ appear in Tib., Divy 17, and MdhA, whereas Skt. and Ch. lack them.
n.­661
Section number 9.10.6.1.3 in BhvY (p. 308).
n.­662
Section number 9.10.6.2 in BhvY (p. 318ff.). The following story corresponds to the Mahā­sudarśanāvadāna from Gilgit (ms no. 1550–67, hereafter MSA), the first half of the story of Mahāsudarśana in the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra, and its parallel in the Kṣv (D da F.266.a–274.b; Taishō no.1451, 24.393a–394.b; see also Matsumura 1988b, 3–29 and 86–128), the first half of MĀc 68 Dashanjianwang jing 大善見王経 (Taishō no. 26, 1.515b–516c), a part of DN 17 Mahā­sudassana­suttanta (ii 169–85), and so on. Cf., also, the story of King Mahāsudarśana and his son in the Bhv (D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana).
n.­668
Section number 9.10.6.3 in BhvY (p. 323ff.). This story has parallels in MĀc 155 Xudaduo jing 須達哆經, AKUp 3079, Taishō no. 72 Foshuo sangui wujie cixin yanli gongde jing 佛説三歸五戒慈心厭離功徳經, Taishō no. 73 Foshuo xuda jing 佛説須達經, Taishō no. 74 Foshuo zhangzhe shibao jing 佛説長者施報經, EĀc 27.3, and AN 9.20. Cf. Anālayo 2010, 70–71. The story in AKUp 3079 mostly corresponds to MĀc 155, including its introduction, the Buddha’s conversation with the householder Anāthapiṇḍada, which is absent in our Bhv version. Probably the redactors of the Bhv borrowed the story of Velāma from their Velāmasūtra, ignoring its introduction, for the purpose of fitting the story into the framework of the Bhv.
n.­672
Section number 9.10.6.4 in BhvY (p. 326ff.).
n.­673
Section number 9.10.6.4.1 in BhvY (p. 326ff.). This story was translated from Tib. by Schiefner (tr. by Ralston, 1882, chap. II). The story has parallels in J 531 Kusajātaka, Mv ii 420–96 and iii 1–25, Pusa bensheng manlun 菩薩本生鬘論 (Taishō no. 160, 3.336b–c), Xian’yu jing 賢愚經 14 (Taishō no. 202, 4.364b–365b), and Liudu jijing 六度集經 84 (Taishō no. 152, 3.46b–47b).
n.­683
Section number 9.10.6.4.2 in BhvY (p. 332ff.). This story is narrated only in Skt. and Tib., being absent in Ch.
n.­685
Section number 9.10.6.5 in BhvY (p. 333ff.).
n.­687
Section number 9.10.6.6 in BhvY (p. 334ff.). The stories in this and the next section are partially different from the stories of the kings Mahādeva and Nimi already narrated in the Bhv, Chapter 4, III. Mithilā (for other parallels, see n.­194). The difference between these two sets of stories seems to be mainly due to the editorial transformation of their common source (the Mahādevasūtra in the Madhyamāgama) into stories included in the sermon to King Prasenajit, which we are now reading. The first set of stories seems to preserve the exact contents of the sūtra. For a detailed discussion, see Yao 2007.
n.­691
Section number 9.10.6.7 in BhvY (p. 336ff.). See n.­687.
n.­696
Section number 9.10.6.8 in BhvY (p. 339ff.). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, III. Parallel stories: J 257 Gāmaṇicaṇḍajātaka, Xianyu jing 賢愚經 53 (Taishō no. 202, 4.237c ff.); D no. 341 mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo, chap. 39 (mdo sde A.F.270.b ff.); BAK 17 (including a summary of the preceding part; see Straube 2009, 108–21, 341); and Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā 30 (cf. Panglung 1981, 39). For a Jaina parallel of the story of Daṇḍin, see Wu 2017.
n.­706
Section number 9.10.6.9 in BhvY (p. 344ff.).
n.­707
Section number 9.10.6.9.1 in BhvY (p. 344ff.). This story is narrated in both Tib. and Skt., but is absent in Ch.
n.­708
Section number 9.10.6.9.2 in BhvY (p. 345ff.). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, V; German trsl. from Ch., Li 2012. Parallel stories: Divy 30 Sudhana­kumārāvadāna (English trsl., Tatelman 2005, 219–307); fragments of the Sudhana­kumārāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (Kudō 2015, 255–58); Mv ii 94–105; Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā 25 (Khoroche 2017, 147ff.); BAK 64 (Straube 2006); the Sudhanajātaka in the Paññāsajātaka (Tanabe 1981, 1983); Liudu jijing 六度集經 83 (Taishō no. 152, 3.44b–46b); and the Khotanese Sudhanāvadāna (de Chiara 2013).
n.­769
Section number 9.10.6.10 in BhvY (p. 369ff.). Strangely enough, the famous story of Prince Viśvantara appears twice in succession in Tib. and NBhv here, and these two stories (Viś I and Viś II) share a rough outline with differences in many details. Ch. has only Viś I. Each of the two stories has some elements absent in the other (scenes, conversations, proper names, etc.), and therefore neither is simply an abbreviated or expanded version of the other. Among various editions of Tib., the Stok Palace manuscript (S) shows a unique recension in which Viś I is absent and two passages from Viś I have been inserted in Viś II (Yao 2012b).There are further parallels in the Sbhv (Viś III: SbhvG ii 119–33; Degé nga F.192.a–200.b; Taishō no. 1450 24.181a–184b. English trsl. from Tib. Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882: XVI), the Viśvantarāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (Viś IV: Das Gupta 1978; Matsumura 1980, 119–18 and 272–333. Cf., also, Tsai 2000), and BAK 23, etc. (Lamotte (1944–80, ii 713–15n1; Hikata 1978, appendix 116; Panglung 1981, 40–41; Murakami 1984, 35 and 47n31). Cf. Panglung 1980, 229, Durt 1999 and 2000, and Anālayo 2017, 113–41.
n.­770
Section number 9.10.6.10.1 in BhvY (p. 369ff.). For the absence of this story in S and some other manuscripts belonging to the same lineage, see Yao 2012b and Clarke 2018.
n.­808
Section number 9.10.6.10.2 in BhvY (p. 381ff.).
n.­814
Section number 9.10.6.11 in BhvY (p. 388ff.). The story has parallels in the Vvbh (D nya F.195.a–b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.892c27–28), a part of Divy 36 Mākandikāvadāna (the chapter itself is parallel to the Vvbh; the correspondence with the present story is in 540.1–14), Sbhv (SbhvG ii 14–16; nga F.119.a–120.b; Ch. missing), Xianyu jing 賢愚経 30 (Taishō no. 202, 4.386aff.), and D no. 341 mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo, chap. 34 (mdo sde a F.247.a ff.). The story also has parts in common with the story of Triśaṅku and that of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (5. Triśaṅku and E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family, respectively).
n.­817
Section number 9.10.7 in BhvY (p. 391ff.). The order of the stories in this section generally corresponds to that in the Merv-av. See notes to the title of each story. Cf., also, Yao forthcoming b.
n.­819
Section number 9.10.7.1 in BhvY (p. 391ff.). Parallel stories: Vvbh (D nya F.176.a–183.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.888a–889c), MĀc 136 商人求財経, EĀc 45.1, J 196, etc. A brief mention in Merv-av, 156. Divy 36, which corresponds to a part of the Vvbh listed above, abbreviates this story, referring to the Rākṣasīsūtra (524.20). Cf., also, Divy 8, which is a story partially corresponding to the present section.
n.­825
Section number 9.10.7.2 in BhvY (p. 396ff.). Parallel story: Merv-av, 156.
n.­828
Section number 9.10.7.3 in BhvY (p. 397ff.). For parallel stories, see Merv-av, 159n7.
n.­833
Section number 9.10.7.4 in BhvY (p. 398ff.). This story has a parallel in SbhvG ii 177–178; nga F.232.b–233.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.195b. For other parallels, see Merv-av 159n8.
n.­835
Section number 9.10.7.5 in BhvY (p. 398ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 161n10.
n.­837
Section number 9.10.7.6 in BhvY (p. 399ff.). The Merv-av gives a story of a parrot in the same order as the Bhv, but the story is quite different from the present one in the Bhv. See Merv-av 160n13. The story in the Bhv has parallels in J 329 and the Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya (Taishō no. 1425, 22.258b–c).
n.­839
Section number 9.10.7.7 in BhvY (p. 399ff.). Parallel: Merv-av 162.
n.­841
Section number 9.10.7.8 in BhvY (p. 400ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 163n16.
n.­842
Section number 9.10.7.9 in BhvY (p. 401ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 163n17.
n.­844
Section number 9.10.7.10 in BhvY (p. 401ff.). For parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.34 and Merv-av 167n21. Cf., also, Anālayo 2017, 294ff.
n.­846
Section number 9.10.8 in BhvY (p. 403ff.). The order of the stories in this section generally corresponds to that in Merv-av.
n.­848
Section number 9.10.8.1 in BhvY (p. 403ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 153n1. This story is related to the story of the brahmin girl Cañcā in the Bhv (M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā). Cf., also, BAK 49 (Straube 2009, 319–22).
n.­857
Section number 9.10.8.2 in BhvY (p. 409ff.). This story has many parallels, including J 316 and BAK 104 (see Straube 2009, 335–37). Cf. Panglung 1981, 45; Hikata 1978, appendix 104–5.
n.­860
Section number 9.10.8.3 in BhvY (p. 410ff.).
n.­861
Section number 9.10.8.3.1 in BhvY (p. 410ff.). This story has many parallels, including J 540 and BAK 101 (see Straube 2009, 332–35). Cf. Panglung 1981, 45–46; Hikata 1978, appendix 115. Merv-av mentions this story only in a summary of contents (Merv-av 176n126). For parallels in Chinese materials, see Hashimoto 2002; Andō 2008, 45. Cf., also, Brockington 2010, 95–100. For an edition and German translation of the story in the Bhv, see Demoto and Hahn 2010, 238–45. Schlingloff 1985 has pointed out the close relationship between the depiction of this story in Gandharan relief and the Bhv. Cf., also, Schlingloff 2000, 31 (Eng. 2013, 31).
n.­864
Section number 9.10.8.3.2 in BhvY (p. 413ff.).
n.­866
Section number 9.10.8.4 in BhvY (p. 414ff.). This story is absent in Ch. and NBhv. Instead, Ch. mentions the title of a sūtra, Najia yaocha jing 那迦藥叉經 (Sūtra of the Yakṣa *Naka (?)), and then gives a brief summary of the next story, which is a story of the leader of the monkeys (parallel to J 407). NBhv agrees with Ch. in mentioning the leader of the monkeys. Due to the fragmentary state of NBhv, it is unknown if there was a title corresponding to the Najia yaocha jing in the manuscript. The following story of Prince Mūkapaṅgu has been translated into English from Tib. in Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XIV. The story has parallels in J 538, etc. See Panglung 1981, 46 (note that Panglung seems to be confusing Taishō no. 1444 and Taishō no. 1442); Hikata 1978, appendix, 115; Zin 2004; Tamai 2017. There is a parallel in the Vvbh (cha F.89.a–95.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.723c–725c). The story in the Vvbh consists of two parts: the story of the prince’s birth, growth, and going forth (parallel to the following story in the Bhv) and the story of the same person as a teacher instructing disciples (parallel to another story in the Bhv: 2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu).
n.­874
Section number 9.10.8.5 in BhvY (p. 420ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 46–47; Hikata 1978, appendix 93–94.
n.­876
Section number 9.10.8.6 in BhvY (p. 421ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 47.
n.­878
Section number 9.10.8.7 in BhvY (p. 423ff.). For parallels, see Okada 1993. Cf. the rule against eating nāga flesh in the Bhv (Chapter Two. II. B. Nāga Flesh).
n.­880
Section number 9.10.8.8 in BhvY (p. 423ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 48; Hikata 1978, appendix 113; Merv-av 155n3.
n.­882
Section number 9.10.9 in BhvY (p. 426ff.). This part of Tib. lacks a summary of contents. However, only S and the Shey Palace manuscript among the other editions the present translator examined (D, London, N, P, T) give a summary of contents (S kha F.348.a.6–7; Shey kha F.329.a.2–3). On the peculiarity of S and the Bhutanese recension, see Clarke 2018. Cf., also, Yao 2011. Ch. is completely silent about the four stories constituting this part. NBhv does not give the stories but only a list of protagonists, in which only the name of Govinda (the protagonist of the fourth story) is legible in a broken folio. For details, see Yao forthcoming b.
n.­883
Section number 9.10.9.1 in BhvY (p. 426ff.). This story has a parallel in MĀc 130 Jiao tanmi jing 教曇彌經. This sūtra is mentioned in the story of Araṇemi (3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi). For other parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.35. Cf., also, Skilling 2000, 343 and Anālayo 2010, 70n52.
n.­884
Section number 9.10.9.2 in BhvY (p. 427ff.). In the Vvbh, this story follows the story of Mūkapaṅgu’s going forth (cha F.95.a–96.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.725c–726b). See n.­866.
n.­885
Section number 9.10.9.3 in BhvY (p. 429ff.). For parallels, see Ogihara 2011 and Yao 2012a, 3.2.36. Cf., also, Merv-av 168.
n.­895
Section number 9.10.9.4 in BhvY (p. 432ff.). This story has a parallel in DĀ 14 Govindasūtra (see Hartmann and Wille 2014, 140). For other parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.37.
n.­901
Section number 9.10.9.5 in BhvY (p. 441ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 49–50; Sugimoto 1993, 260; Murakami 1984; Hikata 1978, appendix 42. For an edition and German translation of this story in Tib., see Schlingloff 1977. Cf., also, BAK 1 and BAK 100 in Straube 2009; Bingposha lun 鞞婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1547, 28.506b ff.).
n.­903
Section number 9.10.9.6 in BhvY (p. 443ff.). For parallels, see Murakami 1984, 35, 45n24, 277–78, 280n17–20; Ogihara 2010.
n.­904
Section number 9.10.10 in BhvY (p. 444ff.). For the names of the buddhas in the past mentioned in this section and the next, see Murakami 1984, 273–76, 283. Cf. AKBh 266.14.
n.­909
Section number 9.10.11 in BhvY (p. 445ff.). For the murals in Bezeklik, Turfan (eleventh to twelfth c.), representing the verses in this section of the Bhv, see Murakami 1984. The title of this section, “Section of Many Buddhas,” is given at the end of the section. For parallels, see Ogihara 2015a and 2016a; Tournier 2017, esp. Chap. 2. Some of the reconstructions of Skt. names of buddhas in the present translation are based on their Tocharian parallels given in Ogihara 2015a.
n.­934
Section number 9.10.12 in BhvY (p. 454ff.). This story is related to “Section of the Tathāgata” in the Anavatapta­gāthā (kha F.316.b–317.a) and was translated into English by Hisashi Matsumura (1989b). For parallels, see Akanuma 1931, 131b. Cf., also, BAK 49 (Straube 2009, 319–22) and BAK 50 (Okano 2007).
n.­938
Section number 9.11 in BhvY (p. 456ff.). This part of the Bhv, which consists of verses of the Buddha and his disciples and some prose concerned with their past lives, is called Anavatapta­gāthā (AG) and has parallels in the Fo wubaidizi zishuo benqi jing 佛五百弟子自説本起經 (Taishō no. 199), the Apadāna, and the Gāndhārī Anavatapta­gāthā, which was studied in Salomon 2008. For the research history of the AG, see Salomon ibid., 18–22. Tib. has been edited and translated into French by Hofinger (1954, the chapters of disciples; 1990, the chapter of the Tathāgata). In the following notes, some other modern translations are also mentioned. Skt. (GBhv) was transliterated by Bechert (1961) and Wille (1990). The framework of the entire story of the AG and some of its episodes are borrowed by the Kaṭhināvadāna (Degener 1990, 1991; Salomon ibid., 32–33). Parts of a Mahāyāna sūtra, The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 99), echo the Anavatapta­gāthā in some respects; see 2.­24 ff. and Introduction i.­14.
n.­939
Section number 9.11.1 in BhvY (pp. 456–57).
n.­943
Section number 9.11.2 in BhvY (p. 457ff.). The stories included in this part are not found in either the Gāndhārī Anavatapta­gāthā or Taishō no. 199.
n.­944
Section number 9.11.2.1 in BhvY (pp. 457–58). This part has a parallel in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 207–13) and KA §23. A parallel also appears in a Mahāyāna sūtra, The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 99), 2.­26 ff., in a longer passage that echoes in some respects the Anavatapta­gāthā.
n.­947
Section number 9.11.2.2 in BhvY (p. 459). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 2; German trsl. from Ch., Ji 1943, 323–24. The story has parallels in the Za piyu jing 雜譬喩經 8 (Taishō no. 205, 4.523c–524a); KA § 24, 25; a Tocharian manuscript (Pinaut 2008, 251–68; Melanie Malzahn, “A Comparative Edition of Tocharian Manuscripts,” accessed January 31, 2018‍—see A5–A10, including bibliography).
n.­950
Section number 9.11.2.3 in BhvY (p. 460). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 3. The story has a parallel in KA §26.
n.­951
Section number 9.11.2.4 in BhvY (pp. 460–61). The story has a parallel in KA § 27 and is briefly mentioned in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 214).
n.­952
Section number 9.11.2.5 in BhvY (p. 461). The story has parallels in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 214–16) and the Liuduji jing 六度集經 82 (Taishō no. 152, 3.43c–44b). Cf., also, the second half of J 497.
n.­953
Section number 9.11.2.6 in BhvY (pp. 461–62). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 1.
n.­957
Section number 9.11.3 in BhvY (p. 462ff.).
n.­958
Section number 9.11.3.1 in BhvY (pp. 462–63). Cf. Salomon 2008, 405–12 (comparative texts of Skt. and Tib.; English trsl.). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (1), 4.190a–b. The story is quoted in the Nettippakaraṇa 141.12–142.5 (Salomon 2008, 30). Whereas the verses in all the other sections in the AG are written in śloka, the verses in this section are written in various meters (Salomon ibid., 350 and 67–70). Related stories are found in the Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga: D ta F.39.b–41.a, Taishō no. 1443, 23.911b–c (Kāśyapa’s going forth); D ta F.71.b.6–73.a.5, Taishō 23.917b–c (his former life).
n.­961
Section number 9.11.3.2 in BhvY (pp.463–64). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (2), 4.190b–c. A related story is found in the Prjv (Skt. missing; D ka 1.333–44.a; Taishō no. 1444, 23.1029b–c).
n.­964
Section number 9.11.3.3 in BhvY (pp. 464–65). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (3), 4.190c–191a. The story of Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s wish made in his past life is narrated in the Prjv (Skt. missing; D 1.353–1.360; Taishō no.1444, 23.1030a–b). The stories of his death and its cause in the past are narrated in the Kṣv (tha F.237.b ff.; Taishō no.1451, 24.287a ff.), with some differences from this section.
n.­966
Section number 9.11.3.4 in BhvY (pp. 465–66). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (4), 4.191a–b.
n.­967
Section number 9.11.3.5 in BhvY (pp. 466–67). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (5), 4.191b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 320–23. Cf., also, Salomon 2008, 36, 62–63.
n.­969
Section number 9.11.3.6 in BhvY (p. 468). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (6), 4.191c–192a; Ap i 298 Soṇakoṭivīsa (Salomon 2008, 28–29, 64–67). Related stories are narrated in the Sbhv: SbhvG ii 134–49; D nga F.200.b–211.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.184b–187c.
n.­970
Section number 9.11.3.7 in BhvY (p. 469). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (7), 4.192a–b.
n.­972
Section number 9.11.3.8 in BhvY (pp.469–70). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (8), 4.192b.
n.­974
Section number 9.11.3.9 in BhvY (pp. 470–72). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (9), 4.192b–193a. A related story is in the Vvbh (nya F.19.a ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.857a14ff.) and Divy 13 Svāgatāvadāna.
n.­976
Section number 9.11.3.10 in BhvY (p. 472). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (10), 4.193a–b.
n.­980
Section number 9.11.4 in BhvY (p. 473ff.).
n.­981
Section number 9.11.4.1 in BhvY (pp. 473–74). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (11) 4.193b–194a. Related stories are narrated in SbhvG i 139–46; D nga F.45.b–50.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.128c–129c (Ch. lacks the story of the former life). For other parallels, see Akanuma 1931, s.v. “Yasa.”
n.­982
Section number 9.11.4.2 in BhvY (pp. 474–76). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (12), 4.194a–b; EĀc 33.2. Cf. Kuan 2013, 612.
n.­984
Section number 9.11.4.3 in BhvY (p. 476). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (13), 4.194b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 297–300. Cf., also, MĀc 34 Bojuluo jing 薄拘羅經, esp. Taishō no. 26, 1.475b29–c2.
n.­986
Section number 9.11.4.4 in BhvY (p. 477). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (14), 4.194c–195a.
n.­987
Section number 9.11.4.5 in BhvY (p. 478). Verses in this section and part of the next section, 6. Yaśas (2), are translated with seven syllables in Ch., whereas they are written in śloka in Skt. and seven syllables in Tib., as are the other verses. The Sbhv provides the story of the three Kāśyapas’ former lives (SbhvG i 162–63; D nga F.76.a–77.a; Taishō no.1450, 24.137b–c) and their conversion (Skt. missing [cf. SbhvG i 217–31]; D nga F.55.b–67.b; Taishō 24.131a–134b). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (15), 4.195a. This section of Taishō no. 199 mentions only Uruvilvā-Kāśyapa and Nadī-Kāśyapa, and the name Gayā-Kāśyapa appears in the next section, which corresponds to the section of Yaśas in the AG.
n.­988
Section number 9.11.4.6 in BhvY (pp. 478–79). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (16), 4.195a–b. See n.­987.
n.­991
Section number 9.11.4.7 in BhvY (pp. 480–82). Related stories are found in the Kṣv (D tha F.25.b–31.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.215c–217b) and Divy 19 Jyotiṣkāvadāna. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (17), 4.195b–196a. For other parallels, see Hikata 1978, Appendix 25.
n.­992
Section number 9.11.4.8 in BhvY (pp. 482–83). Unlike Skt. and Tib., Ch. does not narrate Rāṣṭrapāla’s going forth. The story of Rāṣṭrapāla’s going forth is narrated in the Bhv: Chapter Seven, IV. Rāṣṭrapāla. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (18), 4.196b–c.
n.­996
Section number 9.11.4.9 in BhvY (pp.483–85). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (19), 4.196c–197b.
n.­998
Section number 9.11.4.10 in BhvY (pp. 485–86). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (20), 4.197b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 295–97.
n.­1001
Section number 9.11.5 in BhvY (p. 486ff.).
n.­1002
Section number 9.11.5.1 in BhvY (pp. 486–87). Related stories are found in the Vvbh (D ja F.79.b–80.b; Taishō no.1442, 23.799b–c) and Divy 35 Cūḍā­pakṣāvadāna. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (21), 4.197c–198a. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 243–46.
n.­1004
Section number 9.11.5.2 in BhvY (pp. 487–89). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (22), 4.198a–b. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 245.
n.­1005
Section number 9.11.5.3 in BhvY (pp. 489–90). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (23), 4.198c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 274–77, 300–303; Salomon 2008, 29. A related story is found in SbhvG i 200ff.; D nga F.102.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.144b ff.
n.­1013
Section number 9.11.5.4 in BhvY (pp. 490–91). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (24), 4.198c–199a.
n.­1015
Section number 9.11.5.5 in BhvY (p. 492). A related story is in SbhvG ii 43–44; D nga F.139.b–140.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.162b–c. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (25), 4.199a–b. For other parallels, see Salomon 2008, 36.
n.­1017
Section number 9.11.5.6 in BhvY (pp. 493–94). This section has a parallel in the Kṣv: D tha F.153.a–158.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.260c–262a. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (26), 4.199b–c and, also, Wille 1990, 107.
n.­1019
Section number 9.11.5.7 in BhvY (pp. 494–96). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are in the Vvbh (ca F.252.a ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.691b ff.), with some differences from the AG.
n.­1020
Section number 9.11.5.8 in BhvY (pp. 496–97). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are in the Vvbh (D ca F.126.b ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.656c ff.). For other parallels, including SĀc 252, see Hikata 1978, Appendix 70.
n.­1021
Section number 9.11.5.9 in BhvY (pp. 497–99). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (27), 4.199c–200a. A related story is found in SbhvG ii 4–47; nga F.141.a–143.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.162c–163c.
n.­1022
Section number 9.11.5.10 in BhvY (pp. 499–500). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (28), 4.200a–b.
n.­1024
Section number 9.11.6 in BhvY (p. 500ff.).
n.­1025
Section number 9.11.6.1 in BhvY (pp. 500–501). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (29), 4.200b–201a. Related stories are in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 47ff.; nga F.143.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.163c ff.) and MĀc 32 Weicengyoufa jing 未曾有法經. Cf. Deeg 2007, 46ff.
n.­1026
Section number 9.11.6.2 in BhvY (pp. 501–3). No parallel in Taishō no. 199.
n.­1027
Section number 9.11.6.3 in BhvY (pp. 504–5). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are narrated in SbhvG i 136–38; nga F.43.b–44.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.128a–b and SbhvG ii 2–4; nga F.110.a–111.b (Ch. absent).
n.­1030
Section number 9.11.6.4 in BhvY (pp. 505–7). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are found in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 204–211; D nga F.105.a–109.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.145b–147b).
n.­1033
Section number 9.11.6.5 in BhvY (pp. 507–9). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Ap 333 (i 269–70) gives a parallel. The end of the Section of Upālin and the beginning of the Section of Prabhākara are different from those of other sections.
n.­1034
Section number 9.11.6.6 in BhvY (pp. 509–11). No parallel in Taishō no. 199.
n.­1036
Section number 9.11.6.7 in BhvY (pp. 511–26). This section and the next section provide the same stories of the Buddha’s former lives in prose and verse, respectively, in different order. However, the third story of the former, c. A Young Brahmin, is not shared by the latter. Cf. Hofinger 1990 (Tibetan text and French trsl.). For the history of the formation of these sections, see Okano 2006. Parallels to the verses are found in Taishō no. 199 (30), 4.201a–202a; parallels to the verses and prose in Taishō no. 197 Foshuo xingqixing jing 仏説興起行経. Cf., also, BAK 50 (see n.­934). According to the Saṃskṛtā­saṃskṛta­viniścaya, the Sāṃmitīyas too transmitted stories of evil acts performed by the Buddha in his former lives (Namikawa 2011, 371ff.).
n.­1037
This story has a parallel in SbhvG ii 184–85; nga F.237.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.197a–b (Panglung 1981, 53). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (7), 4.170b–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 226–37); KA 32 (Degener 1990, 37–38). BAK 66 provides a completely different story regarding the injury to the Buddha’s foot.
n.­1040
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (6), 4.168a–170b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 237–39); KA 33 (Degener 1990, 38).
n.­1042
This story is related to the story of Māra and the Buddha in Sālā in the Bhv (Chapter Four, V. Sālā) and has a parallel in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 239–41). This story is not narrated in verse.
n.­1044
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (8), 4.170c–172a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 241–47); KA 34 (Degener 1990, 38–39).
n.­1049
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (2), 4.166a–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 247).
n.­1050
A similar story is found in SbhvG i 22ff.; ga F.267.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.102b ff. (Panglung 1981, 55), with some differences. There, however, the story is not related to the Buddha’s former life. Cf. Taishō no. 197 (1), 4.164b–166a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 247–76).
n.­1053
This story has already been narrated in the Bhv (Chapter Eight, V. Vairambhya, D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (9), 4.172a–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 277–79).
n.­1054
According to Skt. and Ch. (see n.­1055), this story corresponds to the Nandīpālasūtra in the Rājasaṃyuktakanipāta of the Madhyamāgama, which is parallel with MĀc 63 Bingpolingqi jing 鞞婆陵耆経 and MN 81 Ghaṭikārasutta. The Sbhv also includes a parallel (SbhvG ii 22.1–30.22; nga F.124.b–131.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.156c–158c). Cf. Yao 2012a, 3.2.38. For comparative studies, see Anālayo 2010, 71–84; 2011a, i 441–51; 2012a, 155–74. Note, however, that in these works the Bhv version of the story (Tib.) is erroneously connected to the Sbhv version (Skt.). Cf., also, Taishō no. 197 (10), 4.172c–174b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 279–81) and SĀc 595 (Taishō no. 99, 2.159c); SĀc2 189 (Taishō no. 100, 2.442c); SN 1.5.10; SN 2.3.4; Tocharian fragments (Ogihara 2016a; 2016b).
n.­1063
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (4), 4.167a–b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 281–89).
n.­1065
A related story is narrated in the Kṣv, where the story of the massacre of the Śākyans is narrated (tha F.95.a–b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.242a–b). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (3), 4.166c–167a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 289–90). Cf., also, the final part of EĀc 34.2 (Taishō no. 125, 2.693b–c).
n.­1066
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (5), 4.167c–168a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 290–92).
n.­1067
Section number 9.11.6.8 in BhvY (pp. 527–30). Cf. Okano 2007, appendix (Japanese trsl. from Tib.). This section is absent in Ch. Although the stories narrated in the previous section are given here in verse, the story of the young brahmin who abused a self-awakened one (7. Sugata [prose] c. A Young Brahmin) is missing. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (30), 4.201a–202a, with the stories in the same order; Ap 299–301 (Salomon 2008, 28–29).
n.­1075
There is a parallel story in BAK 90 (Panglung 1981, 57–58). There is also a Tocharian fragment of another parallel (Ogihara 2015b, 302).
n.­1077
It is unknown if GBhv included this uddāna due to damage to the folio.
n.­1087
For the three kinds of allowable meat, see Shimoda 1997, 401–4, 668–69.
n.­1097
The story of Miṇḍhaka and his family and the story of their former lives have parallels in Divy 9 Meṇḍhaka­gṛha­pati­vibhūti­pariccheda and Divy 10 Meṇḍhakāvadāna and other vinayas (see Hiraoka 2007, i 235–56. For Eng. trsl., see Rotman 2008–17, i 223–41). The Bhv’s Miṇḍhaka stories are generally briefer than the Divy’s Meṇḍhaka stories.
n.­1112
This episode corresponds to Divy 10 Meṇḍhakāvadāna and a folio of an avadāna manuscript from Gilgit (Kudō 2017, xxxii; Plate 43).
n.­1122
Skt. from here to the end of I. A. 3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One is edited in Chung and Wille 2002, 119–24.
n.­1123
Tib. ke na’i bu yis btud ba blangs (lit., “Drinks were received by Kaineya”); Skt. kaineyapānam ādāya (Chung and Wille 2002, 119 reads kaineya<ḥ> pānam). Tib. seems problematic because, in the following story, Kaineya is not the recipient of the drink but the donor. Skt. might be translated “Having received Kaineya’s drink (i.e., the drink offered by Kaineya).” Hence the present translation, which supplies the word “offered.” Among the eleven uddānas in the Bhv, only this final uddāna includes gerund phrases in Skt., “…ādāya” and “… kṛtvā” (see the note after next), whereas the others simply list nouns.
n.­1124
Tib. ka shi’i tshong rdal nas thug; Skt. kāśipaṭṭaṃ ca yavāgvā (“cloth from Kāśi, by barley porridge”). Edgerton suggests that paṭṭa is an error for paṭṭana (“city”) (BHSD s.v. paṭṭa). Cf. Mvy 5531: tshong rdal = pattana.
n.­1125
Tib. sdig can du ni bca’ ba dang; Skt. pāpāyāṃ khādyakaṃ kṛtvā (“having made khādyaka in Pāpā”). Cf. n.­1089.
n.­1126
This story has a parallel in MN 92 Selasutta (= Sn 3.7), etc. Cf. Anālayo 2011a, ii 545–49 and Yao 2012, 3.2.39. Kōgen Mizuno identified the story in the Bhv with Śailagāthā, a title included in the list of texts to be recited in times of danger which appears several times in the Mūla­sarvāstivādin literature (Mizuno 1992, 23–24). Cf. 2.­198 and n.­73. For a parallel in EĀ 49.6, see Anālayo [2011b] 2016b, 325–43. Cf., also, BAK 77 (Okano 2010, 62ff.), Merv-av 210ff., Karmaśataka 34 (See “The Story of Kaineya” in Jamspal and Fischer, trans. The Hundred Deeds, Toh 340).
n.­1127
This episode is discussed in the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.410a5ff.).
n.­1144
This story has a parallel in Merv-av 210–13. Cf., also, SHT X 3827.
n.­1153
Cf. Mizuno 1992; Yao 2012a, 3.2.39.
n.­1184
This episode corresponds to the Mahā­māyūrī­vidyārājñī and some other texts. Cf. Pathak 1989; Yao 2012b, 3.2.40. For a related passage in the Muktaka in the Ug, see Kishino 2016, 237, 243 (§1.10.2).

b.

Bibliography

ched du brjod pa’i tshoms (Udāna­varga). Toh 326, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 209.a–253.a. English translation in Champa Thupten Zongtse (1990).

sman gyi gzhi (Bhaiṣajya­vastu). Toh 1, ch. 6, Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 277.b–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–50.a.

sman gyi gzhi. bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–2009, vol. 1, pp. 644–721, vol. 2, pp. 3–745, vol. 3, pp. 3–117.

man gyi gzhi (Bhaiṣajya­vastu). Stok no. 1, ch. 6, Stok Palace Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 396.b–455.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–444.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.b–56.b.

Bhaiṣajya­vastu in the Gilgit manuscripts. Dutt 1942–50, pt. 1 (1947).

Genben shuoyiqieyoubu pinaiye yaoshi 根本説一切有部毘奈耶藥事, Taishō no. 1448, 24.1a1–97a24.

1. A Work Referred to in the Bhaiṣajyavastu

yang dag par ldan pa’i lung (Saṃyuktāgama). Not included in the Kangyur. Cf. Za ahan jing 雜阿含經, Taishō no. 99, 2.1a1–373b18.

2. Works Related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu

’dul ba gzhi (Vinayavastu). Toh 1, 17 chaps. Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 1.a1–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–293.a; and vol. 4 (’dul ba, nga), folios 1.a–302.a5.

’dul ba rnam par ’byed pa (Vinayavibhaṅga). Toh 3, Degé Kangyur vol. 5 (’dul ba, ca), folios 21.a1–292.a; vol. 6 (’dul ba, cha) folios 1.a–287.a; vol. 7 (’dul ba, ja) folios 1.a–287.a; and vol. 8 (’dul ba, nya) folios 1.a–269.a6.

’dul ba phran tshegs kyi gzhi (Vinaya­kṣudraka­vastu). Toh 6, Degé Kangyur vol. 10 (’dul ba, tha), folios 1.a1–310.a; vol. 11 (’dul ba, da), folios 1.a–333.a7.

’dul ba gzhung bla ma (Vinayottara­grantha). Toh 7, Degé Kangyur vol. 12 (’dul ba, na), folios 1.a1–302.a; vol. 13 (’dul ba, pa) 1.a–313.a5.

ko lpags kyi gzhi (Carmavastu). Toh 1-5, Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 251.a–277.b.

dge slong ma’i ’dul ba rnam par ’byed pa (Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga). Toh 5, Degé Kangyur vol. 9 (’dul ba, ta), folios 25.b–328.a.

dge ’dun gyi dbyen gyi gzhi (Saṅgha­bheda­vastu). Toh 1, ch. 17, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 255.b–293.a; vol. 4 (’dul ba, nga), folios 1.a–302.a.

gos kyi gzhi (Cīvaravastu). Toh 1-7, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 50.a–115.b.

rgya cher rol pa (Lalita­vistara). Toh 95, Degé Kangyur vol. 46 (mdo sde, kha), folios 1.b–216.b. English translation in the Dharmachakra Translation Committee (2013).

’dul ba gzhung dam pa (Vinayottara­grantha). Toh 7a, Degé Kangyur vol. 12 (’dul ba, na), folios 92.b–302.a; vol. 13 (’dul ba, pa), folios 1.b–313.a.

’dul ba’i mdo (Vinayasūtra). Toh 4117, Degé Tengyur vol. 261 (’dul ba, wu) folios 1.a1–100.a7.

don rnam par nges pa chos kyi rnam grangs (Arthaviniścaya­dharma­paryāya). Toh 317, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 170.b–188.a. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2021.

gnas lam gyi gzhi (Śayanāsana­vastu). Toh 1-15, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 187.a–222.a.

bye brag tu rtogs par byed pa chen po (Mahāvyutpatti). Toh 4346, Degé Tengyur vol. 204 (sna tshogs, co), folios 1.b–131.a.

ma ga d+hA bzang mo’i rtogs pa brjod pa (Sumāgadhāvadāna). Toh 346, vol. 75 (mdo sde, aM), folios 291.b–298.a. English translation The Exemplary Tale of Sumāgadhā 2024.

dmar ser can gyi gzhi (Pāṇḍulohitaka­vastu). Toh 1-11, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 140.a–165.b.

rtsod pa’i gzhi (Adhikaraṇa­vastu). Toh 1-16, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 222.a–255.b.

mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo (Damamūkasūtra). Toh 341, vol. 74 (mdo sde, a), folios 129.a–298.a.

gzhang ’brum rab tu zhi bar byed pa’i mdo (Arśapraśamana­sūtra). Toh 621, Degé Kangyur vol. 91 (rgyud, ba), folios 61.a–61.b; Toh 1020, vol. 101 (gzungs, waM), folios 181.b–183.a.

yangs pa’i grong khyer du ’jug pa’i mdo chen po (Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra). Toh 312, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa) folios 157.b–161.b. English translation in the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team (2020).

yongs su mya ngan las ’das pa chen po’i mdo. Toh 119, Degé Kangyur vol. 52 (mdo sde, nya), folios 1.b–343.a; vol. 53 (mdo sde, ta), folios 1.b–339.a.

rab tu ’byung ba’ gzhi (Pravrjyāvastu). Toh 1, chap. 1. Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 1.a–131.a. English translation in Miller (2018).

rig sngags kyi rgyal mo rma bya chen mo (Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rājñi). Toh 559, Degé Kangyur, vol. 90 (rgyud ’bum, pha), folios 87.b–117.a. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2023.

las brgya pa (Karmaśataka). Toh 340, Degé Kangyur vol. 73 (mdo sde, ha), folios 1.b–309.a; vol. 74 (mdo sde, a), folios 1.b–128.b. English translation in Jamspal and Fischer 2020.

gsang sngags kyi rjes su ’brang ba chen mo’i sgrub thabs (Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī­sādhana). Toh 3254, Degé Tengyur vol. 76 (rgyud, bu), folio 15.b.

so sor thar pa’i mdo (Prātimokṣa­sūtra). Toh 2, Degé Kangyur vol. 5 (’dul ba, ca), folios 1.a–20.b.

Kalyāṇamitra. lung phran tshegs kyi rnam par bshad pa (Āgama­kṣudraka­vyākhyāna). Toh 4115, Degé Tengyur vol. 158 (’dul ba, dzu), folios 1.b–232.a.

Śamathadeva. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi ’grel bshad nye bar mkho ba (Abhidharma­kośa­ṭīkopāyikā). Toh 4094, Degé Tengyur vol. 146 (mngon pa, ja), folios 1.b–287.a; vol 147 (mngon pa, ngu), folios 1.b–95.a.

Vasubandhu. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi bshad pa (Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya). Toh 4090, Degé Tengyur vol. 140 (mngon pa, ku), folios 26.b–258.a; vol. 141 (mngon pa, khu), folios 1.b–95.a.

Vasubandhu. rnam par bshad pa’i rigs pa (Vyākhyāyukti). Toh 4061, Degé Tengyur vol. 136 (sems tsam, shi), folios 29.a–134.b.

Yaśomitra. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi ’grel bshad (Abhidharma­kośa­ṭīkā). Toh 4092, Degé Tengyur vol. 142 (mngon pa, gu), folios 1.b–330.a; vol. 143 (mngon pa, ngu), folios 1.b–333.a.

3. Works Referred to in the Introduction, Notes, etc.

Akanuma, Chizen 赤沼 智善. Indo bukkyō koyū meishi jiten 印度佛教固有名詞辭典 [“A dictionary of proper names of Indian Buddhism”]. Nagoya: Hajinkaku shobō, 1931. Reprint, Kyoto: Hōzōkan 法藏館, 1967.

Anālayo (2007). “Mindfulness of Breathing in the Saṃyukta-āgama.” Buddhist Studies Review 24, no.2: 137–50. Reprint, 2015: 333–45.

Anālayo (2008). “Rebirth and the Gandhabba.” Mahachulalongkornrajavidyalaya University Journal of Buddhist Studies 1: 91–105.

Anālayo (2010). The Genesis of the Bodhisattva Ideal. Hamburg: Hamburg University Press.

Anālayo (2011a). A Comparative Study of the Majjhima-nikāya. 2 vols., Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2011b). “The conversion of the Brahmin Sela in the Ekottarika-āgama.” Thai International Journal of Buddhist Studies 2: 37–56. Reprint, 2016b: 325–43.

Anālayo (2011c). “Vakkali’s Suicide in the Chinese Āgamas.” Buddhist Studies Review 28, no. 2: 155–70. Reprint, 2015: 235–56.

Anālayo (2012a). Madhyama-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2012b). “Protecting Oneself and Others Through Mindfulness: The Acrobat Simile in the Saṃyukta-āgama.” Sri Lanka International Journal of Buddhist Studies 2: 1–23. Reprint, 2015: 311–32.

Anālayo (2014a). “Karma and Female Birth.” Journal of Buddhist Ethics 21: 107–51. Reprint, 2016b: 381–411.

Anālayo (2014b). “Maitreya and the Wheel-turning King.” Asian Literature and Translation. Reprint, 2017: 349–91.

Anālayo (2015). Saṃyukta-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2016a). “The Vessantara-Jātaka and Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Narrative.” Journal of the Oxford Centre for Buddhist Studies 11: 11–37. Reprint, 2017: 113–41.

Anālayo (2016b). Ekottarika-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2016c). “The Gradual Path of Training in the Dīrgha-āgama, From Sense-restraint to Imperturbability.” The Indian International Journal of Buddhist Studies 17: 1–24.

Anālayo (2017). Vinaya Studies. Dharma Drum Institute of Liberal Arts Research Series 7. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Andersen, Dines, and Helmer Smith. Sutta-Nipāta. London, Boston, Melbourne and Henley: Pali Text Society, [1913] 1984.

Andō, Fusae 安藤 房枝. “Unkō sekkutsu dairokkutsu chūshinchū no butsuden setsuwa ukibori ni tsuite: fuse zuzō no sōshutsu no mondai wo chūshin ni 雲崗石窟第 6 窟中心柱の仏伝説話浮彫について:「布施」図像の創出の問題を中心に [A study of reliefs of Buddha’s life on a stūpa-pillar in Yungang Cave 6: Focusing on creation of ‘offering’ icon].” Studies in Aesthetics and Art History 美学美術史研究論集 23 (2008): 33–62.

Banerjee, Anukul Chandra. Two Buddhist Vinaya Texts in Sanskrit: Prātimokṣa Sūtra and Bhikṣukarmavākya. Calcutta: The World Press Private Limited, 1977.

Bareau, André. “La construction et le culte des stūpa d’après les Vinayapitaka.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 50, no. 2 (1962): 229–74.

Bechert, Heinz. Bruchstücke buddhistischer Verssammlungen aus zentralasiatischen Sanskrithandschriften 1: Die Anavataptagāthā und die Sthaviragāthā. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 6. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1961.

Bernhard, Franz. Udānavarga. 2 vols. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 10. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1965–68.

Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, trans. The Mahāsūtra “On Entering the City of Vaiśālī” (Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra, Toh 312). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai 梵文仏典研究会 (1994). “Bonbun shamonkakyō wayaku (1) 梵文『沙門果経』和訳 (1) [An annotated Japanese translation of the Śrāmaṇya­phala­sūtra (1)].” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University 佛教大学仏教学会紀要 2: 1–32.

Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai (1995). “Bonbun shamonkakyō wayaku (2) 梵文『沙門果経』和訳 (2) [An annotated Japanese translation of the Śrāmaṇya­phala­sūtra (2)].” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University 佛教大学仏教学会紀要 3: 17–57.

Brockington, Mary. “Daśaratha, Śyāma, a Brāhman Hunter, and Śrāvaṇa: The Tale of Four Tales (with Pictures).” In From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday. Vol. 1, 89–116. Bhairahawa, Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010.

Brown, W. Norman. “Duty as Truth in Ancient India.” Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 116, no. 3 (1972): 252–68.

Burnouf, Eugène. Introduction à l’histoire du buddhisme indien. 2nd ed. Paris: Maisonneuve, 1876. (1st ed. 1844).

Caillat, Colette. “Pāli ibbha, Vedic íbhya-*.” In Buddhist Studies in Honour of I.B. Horner: 41–49. Dordrecht-Holland: D. Reidel Publishing Company, 1974.

Champa Thupten Zongtse. Udānavarga. Band III. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 10, 3. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1990.

Chandra Das, Sarat, and Hari Mohan Vidyābhūshaṇa. Avadāna Kalpalatā. Calcutta: The Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1940.

Chavannes, Édouard. Cinq cents contes et apologues. 3 vols. Paris: Ernest Leroux, Éditeur, 1910–11.

Ch’en, Kenneth. “A Study of The Svāgata Story in The Divyāvadāna in Its Sanskrit, Pāli, Tibetan, and Chinese Versions.” Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 9, nos. 3/4 (1947): 207–314.

Choi, Jin kyoung. Three Sūtras from the Gilgit Dīrghāgama Manuscript: A Synoptic Critical Edition, Translation and Textual Analysis. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München, 2015.

Choong, Mun-keat. The Fundamental Teachings of Early Buddhism: A comparative study based on the Sūtrāṅga portion of the Pali Saṃyutta-Nikāya and the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2000.

Chung, Jin-il (1998). Die Pravāraṇā in den kanonischen Vinaya-Texten der Mūla­sarvāstivādin und der Sarvāstivādin. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 7. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Chung, Jin-il (2008). A Survey of the Sanskrit Fragments Corresponding to the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama 雜阿含經相當梵文斷片一覧. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin.

Chung, Jin-il, and Takamichi Fukita. A Survey of the Sanskrit Fragments Corresponding to the Chinese Madhyamāgama. Tokyo: The Sankibo Press, 2011.

Chung, Jin-il, and Klaus Wille. “Fragmente aus dem Bhaiṣajyavastu der Sarvāstivādins in der Sammlung Pelliot (Paris).” Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 4: 105–24. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 9. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 2002.

Clarke, Shayne (2009). “Monks Who Have Sex: Pārājika Penance in Indian Buddhist Monasticisms.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 37: 1–43.

Clarke, Shayne (2014). Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 1, Vinaya Texts. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University.

Clarke, Shayne (2015). “Vinayas.” In Brill’s Encyclopedia of Buddhism, edited by Jonathan Silk et al., vol. 1, Literature and Languages, 60–87. Leiden: Brill, 2015.

Clarke, Shayne (2018). “Lost in Tibet, Found in Bhutan: The Unique Nature of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Law Code for Nuns.” Buddhism, Law & Society 2: 199–292.

Cowell, Edward Byles, and Robert Alexander Neil. [1886]. The Divyāvadāna, a Collection of Early Buddhist Legends. Delhi: Indological Book House, 1987.

Csoma Körösi, Alexander. “Analysis of the Dulva.” Asiatic Researches 20, no. 1 (1836): 41–93. Reprint, Tibetan Studies: being a reprint of the articles contributed to the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal and Asiatic Researches. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadò, 1984.

Das, Chandra. Tibetan-English Dictionary. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat Book Depôt, 1902. Reprint, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1969.

Das Gupta, Kabita. Viśvantarāvadāna, eine buddhistische Legende. Edition eines Textes auf Sanskrit und Tibetisch eingeleitet und übersetzt. PhD diss., Freie Universität Berlin, 1978.

Dave, K. N. Birds in Sanskrit Literature with 107 Bird Illustrations. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 2005.

De Chiara, Matteo. The Khotanese Sudhanāvadāna. Beiträge zur Indologie 48. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2013.

Deeg, Max. “Has Xuanzang really been in Mathurā? Interpretatio Sinica or Interpretatio Occidentalia‍—How to Critically Read the Records of the Chinese Pilgrim.” In Essays on East Asian Religion and Culture: Festschrift in honour of Nishiwaki Tsuneki on the occasion of his 65th birthday, 35–73. Kyoto: Editorial committee for the Festschrift in honour of Nishiwaki Tsuneki, 2007.

Degener, Almuth (1990). Das Kaṭhināvadāna. Indica et Tibetica Band 16. Bonn: Indica et Tibetica Verlag.

Degener, Almuth (1991). “Die handschriftliche Überlieferung des Vinayavastu der Mūla­sarvāstivādin. By Klaus Wille.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 111, no. 3: 588–89.

Delhey, Martin. “Vakkali: A New Interpretation of His Suicide.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 13 (2009): 67–108.

Demoto, Mitsuyo, and Michael Hahn. “Ergänzungen zur Überlieferung des Śyāmajātaka.” In From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday. Vol. 1, 215–48. Bhairahawa, Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010.

Dhammadinnā (2014). “A Translation of a Discourse Quotation in the Tibetan Translation of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Parallel to Chinese Saṃyukta-āgama Discourse 36 and of the Discourse Quotations in Śamathadeva’s Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā Parallel to Chinese Saṃyukta-āgama Discourses 39, 42, 45, 46, 55, 56, 57 and 58.” Dharma Drum Journal of Buddhist Studies 14: 73–128.

Dhammadinnā (2015–16). “Women’s Aspirations and Soteriological Agency in Sarvāstivāda and Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Narratives.” Buddhism, Law & Society 1: 33–67.

Dhammadinnā (2018). “Karma Here and Now in a Mūlasarvāstivāda Avadāna: How the Bodhisattva Changed Sex and Was Born as a Female 500 Times*.” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 21: 63–94.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2013). The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, Toh 95). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2013.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2019). The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 317). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2019.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. trans. (2021). Distinctly Ascertaining the Meanings (Arthaviniścayadharmaparyāya, Toh 317). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2021.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2023). trans. The Queen of Incantations: The Great Peahen (Toh 559). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Dimitrov, Dragomir. “Some Remarks on the Rūpyāvatyavadāna of the Divyāvadāna(mālā).” In Bauddhasāhityastabakāvalī: Essays and Studies on Buddhist Sanskrit Literature dedicated to Claus Vogel by colleagues, students, and friends: 45–68. Indica et Tibetica Band 36. Marburg: Indica et Tibetica Verlag, 2008.

Durt, Hubert (1980). “Mahalla/Mahallaka et la crise de la communauté apprès le parinirvāṇa du Buddha.” In Indianisme et bouddhisme: Mélanges offerts à Mgr. Étienne Lamotte: 79–99. Louvain-la-Neuve: Université catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste.

Durt, Hubert (1999). “The Offering of the Children of Prince Viśvantara/Sudāna in the Chinese Tradition.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 2: 147–82.

Durt, Hubert (2000). “The Casting-off of Mādrī in the Northern Buddhist Literary Tradition.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 3: 133–58.

Durt, Hubert (2005). “Kajaṅgalā, who could have been the last mother of the Buddha.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 9: 65–90.

Dutt, Nalinaksha. Gilgit Manuscripts, vol. 3 in 4 parts. Srinagar: Research Department, 1942–50. Reprint, Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications. 1984.

Edgerton, Franklin. [1953]. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1998.

Einoo, Shingo 永ノ尾 信悟 (1984). “Kodai indo saishiki bunken ni kijutsu sareta kokumotsu ryōkri 古代インド祭式文献に記述された穀物料理 [Definition of ancient Indian food from grain based on Vedic ritual literature].” Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology 国立民族学博物館研究報告 9, no.3: 521–32.

Einoo, Shingo (1988). Die Cāturmāsya oder die altindischen Tertialopfer dargestellt nach den Vorschriften der Brāhmaṇas und der Śrautasūtras. Monumenta Serindica No. 18. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Enomoto, Fumio 榎本文雄 (1984a). “Setsuissaiubukei āgama no tenkai: ‘Chūagon’ to ‘Zōagon’ wo megutte, 説一切有部系アーガマの展開: 『中阿含』と『雑阿含』をめぐって [The development of the Sarvāstivādin scriptures, with a special focus on the Madhyamāgama and Saṃyuktāgama].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 32, no. 2: 1073–70.

Enomoto, Fumio (1984b). “Higashi torukisutan shutsudo bonbun agon no keifu 東トルキスタン出土梵文阿含の系譜 [The lineage of transmission of the Sanskrit āgamas unearthed from Eastern Turkestan].” Kachō tanki daigaku kenkyū kiyō 華頂短期大学研究紀要 [Bulletin of Kacho Junior College] 29: 11–26.

Enomoto, Fumio (1991–94). A Comprehensive Study of the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama: Indic Texts Corresponding to the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama as Found in the Sarvāstivāda-Mūlasarvāstivāda Literature Part 1: *Saṃgītanipāta. Kyoto.

Fausbøll, V. [1877–96]. The Jātaka together with its Commentary. 6 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1962–64.

Feer, Léon. [1884–98]. Saṃyutta-Nikāya. 5 vols. London/Oxford: Pali Text Society, 1975–2006.

Finnegan, Damchö Diana. “For the Sake of Women, Too”: Ethics and Gender in the Narratives of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya. PhD diss., University of Wisconsin-Madison, 2009

Fiordalis, David. “The Buddha’s Great Miracle at Śrāvastī: a Translation from the Tibetan Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Asian Literature and Translation 2, no. 3 (2014): 1–33.

Frauwallner, Erich. The Earliest Vinaya and the Beginnings of Buddhist Literature. Serie Orientale Roma 8. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1956.

Fukita, Takamichi 吹田 隆道. “Soreyue ima, Ānanda yo: ‘jikie hōkie’ no seppō saikō それゆえ今、アーナンダよ―「自帰依・法帰依」の説法再考― [Therefore now, Ānanda: A reconsideration of the preaching of Atta-saraṇa and Dhamma-saraṇa].” In Kagawa Takao hakushi koki kinen ronshū: bukkyōgaku jōdogaku kenkyū 香川孝雄博士古稀記念論集 佛教学浄土学研究 [Studies on Buddhism and Pure Land Buddhism: Felicitation volume in Honour of Dr. Takao Kagawa on the occasion of his 70th birthday]:157–66. Kyoto: Nagata bunshōdō 永田文昌堂, 2001.

Glass, Andrew. Four Gāndhārī Saṃyuktāgama Sūtras: Senior Kharoṣṭhī Fragment 5. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press, 2007.

Gnoli, Raniero (1977–78). The Gilgit Manuscript of the Saṅghabhedavastu: Being the 17th and Last Section of the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin. 2 vols. Serie Orientale Roma 49, nos. 1–2. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Gnoli, Raniero (1978). The Gilgit Manuscript of the Śayanāsanavastu and the Adhikaraṇavastu: Being the 15th and 16th Sections of the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin. Serie Orientale Roma 50. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Hahn, Michael. Poetical Visions of the Buddha’s Former Lives: Seventeen Legends from Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā. New Delhi: Aditya Prakashan, 2011.

Hara, Minoru. “Right in India and Left in China? On I-Ching’s Translation of the Sudhanakumārāvadāna.” In Amṛtadhārā: Professor R. N. Dandekar Felicitation Volume, 159–66. Delhi: Ajanta Publications, 1984.

Harrison, Paul, and Jens-Uwe Hartmann, eds. From Birch Bark to Digital Data: Recent Advances in Buddhist Manuscript Research. Papers Presented at the Conference Indic Buddhist Manuscripts: The State of the Field, Stanford, June 15–19 2009. Vienna: Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2014.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe (1991). “Endangered by Man-eating Witches: a Fragment of the Siṃhalāvadana from the Turfan Finds.” In Papers in Honour of Prof. Dr. Ji Xianlin on the Occasion of His 80th Birthday. Vol. 2, 563–75. Nanchang shi: Jiangxi renmin chubanshe 江西人民出版社.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe (2004). “Contents and Structure of the Dīrghāgama of the (Mūla-)Sarvāstivādins.” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 7: 119–37.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe, and Klaus Wille. “The Manuscript of the Dīrghāgama and the Private Collection in Virginia.” In Harrison and Hartmann, eds., 2014: 137–55.

Hashimoto, Sōko 橋本 草子. “Shuyāma honjō setsuwa no henyō シュヤーマ本生説話の変容: 仏典を中心とする [The Change of Śyāma Jātaka].” Kyōto Women’s University Journal of Humanities 京都女子大学人文論叢 50 (2002):109–30.

Hikata, Ryūshō 干潟 龍祥. Honjōkyōrui no shisōshi teki kenkyū 本生経類の思想史的研究 [“A historical study of the thoughts in jātakas and similar stories”]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林. Revised and enlarged edition, 1978.

Hinüber, Oskar von. “The Gilgit Manuscripts: An Ancient Buddhist Library in Modern Research.” In Harrison and Hartmann, eds., 2014: 79–135.

Hirakawa, Akira 平川 彰. Nihyakugojikkai no kenkyū 二百五十戒の研究 [“Studies on the two hundred and fifty rules”]. 4 vols. Hirakawa Akira chosakushū 平川彰著作集 [The collected works of Akira Hirakawa] vol. 14–17. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社,1993–95.

Hiraoka, Satoshi 平岡 聡 (1998). “The Relation between the Divyāvadāna and the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 26: 419–34.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2002a). “Shikishin toshite kinō suru budda no aikon: buttō wo meguru setsuissaiubu no ritsu to ron tono sogo 色身として機能するブッダのアイコン: 仏塔を巡る説一切有部の律と論との齟齬 [The icon of the Buddha functioning as his material body].” In Sakurabe hakushi kiju kinen ronshū 櫻部建博士喜寿記念論集 初期仏教からアビダルマへ [“Early Buddhism and Abhidharma thought: in honor of Doctor Hajime Sakurabe on his seventy-seventh birthday”], 185–98. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平楽寺書店.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2002b). Setsuwa no kōkogaku: Indo bukkyō setsuwa ni himerareta shisō 説話の考古学: ンド仏教説話に秘められた思想 [“The archaeology of narratives: thoughts hidden in Indian Buddhist narratives”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2007). Budda ga nazotoku sanze no monogatari: ‘Diviya-avadāna’ zen’yaku ブッダが謎解く三世の物語 『ディヴィヤ・アヴァダーナ』全訳 [“The stories of the past, present, and future revealed by the Buddha: a complete translation of the Divyāvadāna”]. 2 vols. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2009). “Text critical remarks on the Divyāvadāna (1).” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology 12: 29–72.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2011). “Review Article: The Divyāvadāna in English.” Indo-Iranian Journal 54: 231–70.

Hirata, Masahiro 平田 昌弘, Nozomi Itagaki 板垣 希美, Kenji Uchida 内田 健治, Masa’aki Hanada 花田 正明, and Masahito Kawai 河合 正人. “Ko-chūki indo-āria bunken ‘Veda bunken’ ‘Pāli seiten’ ni motozuita minami ajia no kodai nyūseihin no saigen to dōtei 古・中期インド・アーリア文献 「Veda 文献」 「Pāli 聖典」に基づいた南アジアの古代乳製品の再現と同定 [Reproduction and identification of ancient dairy products in South Asia based on the old and middle Indo-Aryan literatures, ‘Vedic ritual’ and the ‘Pāli canon’].” Nihon Chikusan Gakkaihō 日本畜産学会報 84, no. 2 (2013): 175–90.

Hofinger, Marcel (1954) [1982] Le congrès du Lac Anavatapta (Vies de saints bouddhiques): Extrait du Vinaya des Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu 1, Légendes des anciens (Sthavirāvadāna). Louvain: Publications Universitaires.

Hofinger, Marcel (1990). Le congrès du Lac Anavatapta (Vies de saints bouddhiques): Extrait du Vinaya des Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu 2, Légendes du Buddha (Buddhāvadāna). Louvain-la-Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste.

Honjō, Yoshifumi 本庄 良文 (1984). A Table of Āgama-Citations in the Abhidharmakośa and the Abhidharmakoṣopāyikā Part 1 倶舎論所依阿含全表. Kyoto: private edition.

Honjō, Yoshifumi (2014). Kusharonchū Upāikā no kenkyū: Yakuchūhen 倶舎論註ウパーイカーの研究 訳註篇 [“A study of the Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā: an annotated translation”]. 2 vols. Tokyo: Daizō Shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hosoda Noriaki 細田 典明 (1991). “Sanskrit Fragments from the Parivrājakasaṃyukta of the Saṃyuktāgama (3).” Journal of Indian philosophy and Buddhism 印度哲学仏教学 6: 172–91.

Hosoda Noriaki (2006). “ ‘Zōagon’ Dōhon to ‘Komponsetsuissaiubu binaya yakuji.’ 『雑阿含』道品と『根本説一切有部毘奈耶薬事』 [Saṃyuktāgama Mārga­varga and Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya Bhaiṣajya­vastu].” Journal of Buddhist Studies 佛教學 48: 1–20.

Hosoda Noriaki (2014). “ ‘Zōagon’ Dōhon Nenjo Sō’ō 『雑阿含』道品念處相応 [Smṛtyupastāna-saṃyukta of the Mārgavarga, Saṃyuktāgama].” Journal of Indian Philosophy and Buddhism インド哲学仏教学論集 2: 47–169.

Ingalls, Daniel Henry Holmes. “Source of a Mūla­sarvāstivādin Story of the Origin of the Ganges.” Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 14 (1951):185–88.

Ishikawa, Mie. A Critical Edition of the sGra sbyor bam po gnyis pa: An Old and Basic Commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti. Tokyo: Toyo Bunko, 1990.

Iwamoto, Yutaka 岩本 裕 (1967). Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū dai’ichi: Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū josetsu 佛教説話研究第一 佛教説話研究序説 [“A Study of Buddhist narrative literature vol. 1: An introduction to the study of Buddhist narrative literature”]. Kyoto: Hōzōkan 法藏館. Revised edition, 1978.

Iwamoto, Yutaka (1978). Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū josetsu: Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū vol. 1 仏教説話研究序説: 仏教説話研究 第一巻 [“An introduction to the study of Buddhist narrative literature: a study of Buddhist narrative literature vol. 1”]. Tokyo: Kaimei shoin 開明書院.

Iwamoto, Yutaka (1979). Sumāgadā avadāna kenkyū [“A study of the Sumāgadhāvadāna”]. Tokyo: Kaimei shoin 開明書院.

Jaini, Padmanabh S. “The Story of Sudhana and Manoharā: An Analysis of the Texts and the Borobudur Reliefs.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London 29, no. 3 (1966): 533–58.

Jäschke, H. A. 1881. Tibetan English Dictionary. London: The Secretary of State for India in Council. Compact edition, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1993.

Jamspal, Lozang, and Kaia Tara Fischer, trans. The Hundred Deeds (Karmaśataka, Toh 340). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Ji, Xianlin. 1943. “Parallelversionen zur tocharischen Rezension des Punyavanta-Jātaka.” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 97, no. 2: 284–324. The author’s name is given as Dschi Hiän-lin.

Jones, John James. 1949–56. The Mahāvastu. 3 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1973–78.

Kalsang Gyaltsen, Venerable Khenpo and Chodrungma Kunga Chodron, trans. The Exemplary Tale of Sumāgadhā (Sumāga­dhāvadāna, Toh 346). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024.

Kane, Pandurang Vaman. History of Dharmaśāstra (Ancient and Medieval Religious and Civil Law), vol. iii. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Risearch Institute, 1973.

Karashima, Seishi, and Margarita I. Vorobyova Desyatovskaya. “The Avadāna Anthology from Merv, Turkmenistan.” In Buddhist Manuscripts from Central Asia: The St. Petersburg Sanskrit Fragments (StPSF), vol. 1, edited by Seishi Karashima and Margarita I. Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya, 145–523. Tokyo: The Institute of Oriental Manuscripts of the Russian Academy of Sciences and the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University, 2015.

Khoroche, Peter. Once a Peacock, Once an Actress: Twenty-Four Lives of the Bodhisattva from Haribhaṭṭa’s “Jātakamālā”. Chicago & London: The University of Chicago Press, 2017.

Kieffer-Pülz, Petra. Review of Silk, Jonathan A., Managing Monks. Administrators and Administrative Roles in Indian Buddhist Monasticism. Indo-Iranian Journal 53 (2010): 71–88.

Kishino, Ryōji IV (2013). A Study of the Nidāna: An Underrated Canonical Text of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya. PhD diss., University of California, Los Angeles.

Kishino, Ryōji IV (2016). “A Further Study of the Muktaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya: A Table of Contents and Parallels.” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University. 21: 227–83.

Kritzer, Robert. Garbhāvakrāntisūtra: The Sūtra on Entry into the Womb. Tokyo: The International Institute for Buddhist Studies, 2014.

Kuan, Tse-fu. “Legends and Transcendence: Sectarian Affiliations of the Ekottarikāgama in Chinese Translation.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 133, no. 4 (2013): 607–34.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2004). The Karmavibhaṅga: Transliterations and Annotations of the Original Sanskrit Manuscripts from Nepal. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2015). “Newly Identified Manuscripts in the Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts: Avadānas and Dhāraṇīs.” Annual Report of The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 18: 253–62.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2017). Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 3, Avadānas and Miscellaneous Texts. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University.

Lamotte, Étienne (1944–1980). Le traité de la grande vertu de sagesse de Nāgārjuna (Mahāprajñāpāramitāśāstra). 5 vols. Volumes 1–2 were originally published by Bureaux du Muséon in Louvain in 1944 and 1949, respectively, and reprinted by Institute orientaliste of the Université de Louvain in Louvain-la-Neuve in 1981. Volumes 3–5 were published by the latter publisher in 1970, 1976, and 1980.

Lamotte, Étienne (1951). “Alexandre et le bouddhisme.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 44, no. 1: 147–62.

Lamotte, Étienne (1957). “Khuddakanikāya and Kṣudraka­piṭaka.” East and West 7, no. 4: 341–48.

Lamotte, Étienne (1958). Histoire du bouddhisme indien, des origines à l’ère Śaka. Bibliothèque du Muséon. Vol. 43. Louvain: Publications universitaires, Institut orientaliste.

Lamotte, Étienne (1966). “Vajrapāṇi en Inde.” Mélanges de sinologie offerts à Monsieur Paul Demièville II. Bibliothèque de l’Institut des hautes études chinoises. Vol. 20, 113–59. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.

Lamotte, Étienne (1988). History of Indian Buddhism. Louvain-la-Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institute orientaliste. Translated by Sara Webb-Boin.

Li, Rongxi. The Great Tang Dynasty Record of the Western Regions. Berkeley: Numata Center for Buddhist Translation and Research, 1996.

Li, Wei. Schwanfrau und Prinz: Die chinesische Frühform einer Divyāvadāna-Legende. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2012.

Lilley, Mary E. The Apadāna. 2 vols. Oxford: Pali Text Society, 2000.

Liu, Zhen 劉 震. Chanding yu kuxiu : guan yu fozhuan yuanchu fanben de faxian he yanjiu 禅定与苦修: 関于佛伝原初梵本的發現和研究 [Dhyānāni tapaś ca: meditation and ascetic practice: the finding of an original Sanskrit manuscript on the Buddha’s biography and its study]. Shanghai: Shanghai guji 上海古籍, 2010.

Malalasekera, G.P. Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names. 2 vols. London: Pali Text Society, 1937.

Mayeda, Egaku 前田 惠學. Genshi bukkyō seiten no seiritsushi kenkyū 原始佛教聖典の成立史研究 [“A history of the formation of original Buddhist scriptures”]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 1964.

Matsumoto, Junko 松本 純子. “Kachangarā monogatari: musuko eno omoi: “karumashataka” dai 33 wa and dai 42 wa カチャンガラー物語・息子への想い―『カルマシャタカ』第 33 話・第 42 話 和訳― [The story of Kacaṅgalā: love for her son. Japanese translations of the 33rd and 42nd story of the Karmaśataka].” Zentsūji kyōgaku shinkōkai kiyō 善通寺教学振興会紀要 15 (2010): 1–15.

Matsumura, Hisashi 松村 恒 (1980). Four Avadānas from the Gilgit Manuscripts. PhD diss., Australian National University.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1985). “Raitawarakyō no tenkai no ichidammen 頼吒和羅経の展開の一断面 [An aspect of the development of the Rāṣṭrapāla-sūtra].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 15: 39–62.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1988a). “Gleanings from the Gilgit Manuscripts‍—Serial No. 1: Vinayavastu‍—.” Aligarh Journal of Oriental Studies 5: 163–76.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1988b). The Mahāsudarśanāvadāna and The Mahāsudarśanasūtra. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1989a). “Āyuḥparyantasūtra: Das Sūtra von der Lebensdauer in den verschiedenen Welten Text in Sanskrit und Tibetisch.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen, Folge 1, 70–100. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 2. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1989b). “Preamble to the Anavataptagāthā.” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 18: 125–60.

Matsuyama, Shuntarō 松山 俊太郎 (1980–2002). “Kodai indo jin no yoso’oi 古代インド人のよそおい [Ancient Indian makeup].” Keshō bunka 化粧文化 3–42.

Melzer, Gudrun (2010a). Ein Abschnitt aus dem Dīrghāgama. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München.

Melzer, Gudrun (2010b). “Sanskrit sources corresponding to the Caitya­pradakṣiṇa­gāthā inscription in Alchi.” Berliner Indologische Studien 19: 54–70. Appendix B in Kurt Tropper, “The Caitya­pradakṣiṇa­gāthā Inscription in Alchi: A Valuable Witness for Kanjur Studies.” Berliner Indologische Studien 19: 15–70.

Miller, Robert. The Chapter on Going Forth (Pravryjyāvastu, Toh 1-1). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2018.

Mizuno, Kōgen 水野 弘元 (1981). Hokku kyō no kenkyū 法句経の研究 [“A study of the Dharmapada”]. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1992). “ ‘Suttanipāta’ no ge ya kyō no taiōhyō 『スッタニパータ』の偈や経の対応表 [A comparative study of the Suttanipāta].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 21: 2–56.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1993). “Chōrōe, chōrōnige no taishōhyō 長老偈, 長老尼偈の対応表 [A comparative study of the Theragāthā and the Therīgāthā].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 22: 3–83.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1995). “Shohokkukyō no ge no hikaku taishō 諸法句経の偈の比較対照 [A comparison of the verses of the Dhammapada texts].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 24: 5–76.

Monier-Williams, Monier. A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1899.

Morris, Richard, A.K. Warder, E. Hardy, and Mabel Hunt. [1885–1961]. The Anguttara-nikāya. 6 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1958–76.

Muldoon-Hules, Karen Maria. “Of Milk and Motherhood: The Kacaṅgalā Avadāna Read in a Brahmanical Light.” Religions of South Asia 3, no. 1 (2009): 111–24.

Murakami, Shinkan 村上 真完. Sai’iki no bukkyō: bezekuriku seiganga kō 西域の仏教: ベゼクリク誓願画考 [“The praṇidhi scenes of the cave temples at Bezeklik in Chinese Turkestan”]. Tokyo: Daisan bunmei sha 第三文明社, 1984.

Namikawa, Takayoshi 並川 孝儀. Indo bukkyō kyōdan shōryōbu no kenkyū インド仏教教団正量部の研究 [“A study of the Indian Buddhist Sāṃmitīya sect”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大藏出版, 2011.

Nattier, Jan. “The Realm of Akṣobhya: A Missing Piece in the History of Pure Land Buddhism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 23, no. 1 (2000): 71–102.

Negi, J. S. Tibetan-Sanskrit Dictionary. 16 vols. Sarnath/Varanasi: Central Institute of Higher Tibetan Studies, 1993–2005.

Nishimoto, Ryūzan 西本 龍山. Ritsubu 律部 [Vinaya section] 23. Kokuyaku issaikyō 國譯一切經 [“A translation of the complete Buddhist canon into classical Japanese in kakikudashi style”]. Tokyo: Daitō shuppansha 大東出版社, 1933.

Nishimura, Naoko. “Processing of Dairy Products in the Vedic Ritual, Compared with Pāli.” In Vedic Studies: Language, Text, Culture and Philosophy, Proceedings of the 15th World Sanskrit Conference: 211–42. New Delhi: D.K. Printworld, 2014.

Norman, K.R. [1906]. The Commentary on the Dhammapada. 4 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1970.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi 荻原 裕敏 (2010). “Tokarago A Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka no buhakizoku ni tsuite トカラ語 A 《 Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka 》の部派帰属について [On the school affiliation of the Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka in Tocharian A].” Tokyo University Linguistic Papers 東京大学言語学論集 30: 169–86.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2011). “Arannakyō ni hitei sareta SHT shoshū bongo danpen ni tsuite 「 阿蘭那經」に比定された SHT 所収梵語断片について [Sanskrit fragments identified as the Ālánnàjīng in SHT].” Tokyo University Linguistics Papers 東京大学言語学論集 31: 235–68.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2015a). “Tuhuoluoyu wenxian suojian foming xilie–yi chutu fodian yu kumutula kuqun 吐火羅語文献所見佛名系列–以出土佛典与庫木吐喇窟群区第 34 窟榜題爲例 [Lists of former buddhas in Tocharian texts: A comparative study of unearthed manuscripts and captions in Kumtura Cave no. 34].” Literature & History of ern Regions 西域文史 9: 33–49.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2015b). “The transmission of Buddhist Texts to Tokharian Buddhism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 38: 295–312.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2016a). “ ‘Komponsetsuissaiuburitsu yakuji’ ni kanren suru niten no tokarago B dampen ni tsuite 『根本説一切有部律薬事』に関連する二点のトカラ語 B 断片について [On two Tokharian fragments related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya].” In Shirukurōdo to kindai nihon no kaikō: sai’iki kodai shiryō to nihon kindai bukkyō シルクロードと近代日本の邂逅―西域古代資料と日本近代仏教 [The encounter of the Silk Road and modern Japan: ancient Central Asian materials and modern Japanese Buddhism], 258–76, Tokyo: Bensei shuppan 勉誠出版.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2016b). “Doitsu shozō tokarago B dampen B384 ni tsuite ドイツ所蔵トカラ語 B 断片 B384 について [Tocharian Fragment B384 of the Berlin Turfan Collection].” Tokyo University Linguistics Papers 東京大学言語学論集 37: e69–e79.

Okada, Mamiko 岡田 真美子. “Ryū honjō (2) kukishashintan to ryūnikushoku setsuwa 龍本生 (2) 救飢捨身譚と龍肉食説話‍—根本説一切有部薬事を中心に‍— [Former birth stories of the Buddha: Naga (2)].” Bulletin of Kobe Women’s University 神戸女子大学紀要 (文学部篇) 26, no. 1 (1993): 157–68.

Okano, Kiyoshi 岡野 潔 (2006). “Anavataptagāthā no shakuson no gō no zanshi wo toku innenwa no keisei, Anavataptagāthā の釈尊の業の残滓を説く因縁話の形成 [An essay on formations of the Buddhāvadāna of the Anavatapta­gāthā and its parallels].” Ronshū 論集, Indogaku shūkyō gakkai 印度学宗教学会 33: 73–93.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2007). “Kṣemendra no Daśa­karma­plutyavadāna‍—Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā dai 50 shō no kōtei to yaku, Kṣemendraの Daśakarmaplutyavadāna ‍— Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā 第 50 章の校訂と訳‍— [Kṣemendra’s Daśa­karma­plutyavadāna: a text-critical edition and translation of the 50th chapter of the Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 2: 201–301.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2008). “Avadānakalpalatā 55 章、 91–92 章と Karmaśataka 125–126 話‍—Sarvaṃdada, Śibi, Maitrakanyaka の校訂・和訳‍— [The Avadāna­kalpalatā chs. 55, 91, and 92 and the Karmaśataka 125, 126: texts and translations of Sarvaṃdada, Sibi, and Maitrakanyaka].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 3: 57–155.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2010). “Kalpalatā と Avadānamālā の研究 (1)―Vidura, Kaineyaka, Śreṣṭhipretībhūta の説話 [A study of the Kalpalatā and Avadānamālā 1: the stories of Vidura, Kaineyaka, and Śreṣṭhipretībhūta].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 5: 51–127.

Oldenberg, Hermann. [1879–83]. The Vinaya Piṭakaṃ. 5 vols. London and Oxford: The Pali Text Society, 1982–97.

Oldenberg, Hermann, and Richard Pischel. [1883]. The Thera- and Therī-gāthā. London: The Pali Text Society, 1966.

Olivelle, Patrick. A Sanskrit Dictionary of Law and Statecraft. Delhi: Primus Books, 2015.

Ono, Genmyo 小野 玄妙. Bukkyō no bijutsu oyobi rekishi 佛教之美術及歷史 [“Buddhist Art and History”]. Tokyo: Bussho kenkyū kai 佛書研究會, 1916.

Panglung, Jampa Losang (1980). “Preliminary Remarks on the Uddānas in the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin.” In Tibetan Studies in Honour of Hugh Richardson: Proceedings the International Seminar on Tibetan Studies, Oxford, 1979, 226–32. Warminster: Aris & Phillips.

Panglung, Jampa Losang (1981). Die Erzählstoffe des Mūlasarvāstivāda-Vinaya: Analysiert auf Grund der tibetischen Übersetzung. Studia Philologica Buddhica: Monograph Series 3. Tokyo: The Reiyukai Library.

Park, Chongdok, C.H. “The Buddha’s Eating of Horse-Fodder Barley in the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Vinaya.” In Buddhist Narrative in Asia and Beyond, 31–44. Bangkok: Institute of Thai Studies, Chulalongkorn University, 2012.

Pathak, Suniti K. “A Dharani-Mantra in the Vinaya-Vastu.” Bulletin of Tibetology 2 (1989): 31–39.

Pinaut, Georges-Jean. Chrestomathie tokharienne: textes et grammaire. Leuven-Paris: Peeters, 2008.

Pradhan, P. Abhidharm-koshabhāṣya of Vasubandhu. Patna: K. P. Jayaswal Research Institute, 1967.

Przyluski, Jean. “Le nord-ouest de l’Inde dans le Vinaya des Mūla-Sarvāstivādins et les textes apparentés.” Journal Asiatique 11ͤ série, tome 4 (1914): 493–568.

Ramers, Peter. Die “drei Kapitel über die Sittlichkeit” im Śrāmāṇyaphala-sūtra. PhD diss., Rheinischen Friedrich-Willhelms-Universität zu Bonn, 1996.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, J. Estlin Carpenter, and William Stede. The Sumaṅgala-vilāsinī Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya. 3 vols. London: Pali Text Society, 1968–71. Second edition.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, and J. Estlin Carpenter. 1890–1911. The Dīgha Nikāya. 3 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1966–76.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, and William Stede. The Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary. London: The Pali Text Society. 1921–25. Revised reprint, 2015.

Rosen, Valentina. Der Vinayavibhaṅga zum Bhikṣuprātimokṣa der Sarvāstivādins. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 2. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1959.

Rotman, Andy. Divine Stories: Divyāvadāna. 2 vols. Boston: Wisdom Publications, 2008–17.

Sadakata, Akira 定方 晟. “Kinnara キンナラ.” Proceedings of the Faculty of Letters of Tokai University 東海大学紀要 文学部 32 (1979): 31–43.

Sakaki, Ryōzaburō 榊 亮三郎 (1912–15). “Diviāvadāna no kenkyū narabini hon’yaku 「 デイヸアーヷダーナ」の研究並に翻譯 [A study and translation of the Divyāvadāna].” Rokujō gakuhō 六條學報 134–38, 140–50, 152, 153, 155–59, 161, 162, 169.

Sakaki, Ryōzaburō [1916] (1998). Bonzōkanwa shiyaku taikō hon’yaku myōgi taishū 梵藏漢和四譯對校 飜譯名義大集 [“A quadrilingual Sanskrit-Tibetan-Chinese-Japanese edition of the Mahāvyutpatti”]. Kyoto: Rinsen Shoten 臨川書店.

Salomon, Richard (2008). Two Gāndhārī Manuscripts of the Songs of Lake Anavatapta (Anavataptagāthā): British Library Kharoṣṭhī Fragment 1 and Senior Scroll 14. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press.

Salomon, Richard (2018). The Buddhist Literature of Ancient Gandhāra. Somerville: Wisdom Publications.

Sarma, Sreeramula Rajeswara. “Some Medieval Arithmetical Tables.” Indian Journal of History of Science, 32(3), 1997.

Sasaki, Shizuka 佐々木 閑 (1999). Shukke toha nanika 出家とはなにか [“What is ‘going forth?’”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大藏出版.

Sasaki, Shizuka (2000). “Basharon to ritsu 婆沙論と律 [Vinayas quoted in the Vibhāṣā].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 49(1): 421–413.

Schiefner, Anton [1882]. Tibetan Tales Derived from Indian Sources. Translated into English by W. R. S. Ralston. Reprint, The Bible of Tibet: Tibetan Tales from Indian Sources. London: Kegan Paul, 2003.

Schlingloff, Dieter (1977). “König Prabhāsa und der Elefant.” Indologica Taurinensia 5: 139–52.

Schlingloff, Dieter (1985). “Das śyāma-Jātaka: Schultradition und Bildüberlieferung einer buddhistischen Legende.” In Zur Schulzugehörigkeit von Werken der Hīnayāna-Literatur, Teil 1, 203–18. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Schlingloff, Dieter (2000). Erzählende Wandmalereien Vol I Interpretation. Ajanta: Handbuch der Malereien 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Schlingloff, Dieter (2013). Narrative Wall-paintings Vol. I Interpretation. Ajanta: Handbook of the Paintings 1. New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts. English version of Schlingloff 2000.

Schmithausen, Lambert. “Beiträge zur Schulzugehörigkeit und Textgeschichte kanonischer und postkanonischer buddhistischer Materialien.” In Zur Schulzugehörigkeit von Werken der Hīnayāna-Literatur, Teil 2, 304–435. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1987.

Schopen, Gregory (1985). “Two Problems in the History of Indian Buddhism: The Layman/Monk Distinction and the Doctrines of the Transference of Merit.” Studien zur Indologie und Iranistik 10: 9–47. Reprint, 1997: 23–55.

Schopen, Gregory (1987). “Burial Ad Sanctos and the Physical Presence of the Buddha in Early Indian Buddhism: A Study in the Archaeology of Religions.” Religion 17: 193–225. Reprint, 1997: 114–47.

Schopen, Gregory (1995). “Monastic Law Meets the Real World: A Monk’s Continuing Right to Inherit Family Property in Classical India.” History of Religions 35, no. 2: 101–23. Reprint, 2004a: 170–92.

Schopen, Gregory (1996). “The Lay Ownership of Monasteries and the Role of the Monk in Mūla­sarvāstivādin Monasticism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 19, no. 1: 81–126. Reprint, 2004a: 219–59.

Schopen, Gregory (1997). Bones, Stones, and Buddhist Monks: Collected Papers on the Archaeology, Epigraphy, and Texts of Monastic Buddhism in India. Honolulu: University of Hawai’ i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (1999). “The Bones of a Buddha and the Business of a Monk: Conservative Monastic Values in an Early Mahāyāna Polemical Tract.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 27: 279–324. Reprint, 2005a: 63–107.

Schopen, Gregory (2000). “Hierarchy and Housing in a Buddhist Monastic Code: A Translation of the Sanskrit Text of the Śayanāsana­vastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Buddhist Literature 2: 92–196.

Schopen, Gregory (2004a). Buddhist Monks and Business Matters: Still More Papers on Monastic Buddhism in India. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2004b). “On Buddhist Monks and Dreadful Deities: Some Monastic Devices for Updating the Dharma.” In Gedenkschrift J. W. de Jong, 161–84. Studia Philologica Buddhica: Monograph Series 17. Tokyo: International Institute for Buddhist Studies of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies. Reprint, 2014: 333–57.

Schopen, Gregory (2005a). Figments and Fragments of Mahāyāna Buddhism in India: More Collected Papers. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2005b). “Taking the Bodhisattva into Town: More Texts on the Image of ‘the Bodhisattva’ and Image Processions in the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” East and West 55: 299–311. Reprint, 2014: 390–403.

Schopen, Gregory (2007). “The Learned Monk as a Comic Figure: On Reading a Buddhist Vinaya as Indian Literature.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 35: 201–26. Reprint, 2014: 404–31.

Schopen, Gregory (2008). “On Emptying Chamber Pots without Looking and the Urban Location of Buddhist Nunneries in Early India Again.” Journal Asiatique 296.2: 229–56. Reprint, 2014: 23–46.

Schopen, Gregory (2012). “A New Hat for Hārītī: On ‘Giving’ Children for Their Protection to Buddhist Monks and Nuns in Early India.” Little Buddhas: Children and Childhoods in Buddhist Texts and Traditions, 17–42. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Reprint, 2014: 131–56.

Schopen, Gregory (2014). Buddhist Nuns, Monks, and Other Worldly Matters: Recent Papers on Monastic Buddhism in India, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2018). “On Monks and Emergencies: The Brahmanical Principle of Āpad in a Buddhist Monastic Code.” In Reading Slowly: A Festschrift for Jens E. Braarvig, 375–91. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Senart, Émile. Le Mahāvastu, texte sanscrit publié pour la première fois et accompagné d’introductions et d’un commentaire. 3 vols. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1882–97.

Shackleton Bailey, D. R. (1950). “Notes on the Divyāvadāna Part 1.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland: 166–84.

Shackleton Bailey, D. R. (1951). “Notes on the Divyāvadāna Part 2.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland: 82–102.

Shimoda, Masahiro 下田 正弘. Nehangyō no kenkyū: Daijō kyōten no kenkyū hōhō shiron 涅槃経の研究―大乗経典の研究方法試論 [“A study of the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra with a focus on the methodology of the study of the Mahāyāna sūtras”]. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社, 1997.

Shōno, Masanori. “Local Buddhist Monastic Agreements among the (Mūla)sarvāstivādins.” Buddhist Studies Review 34, no. 1 (2017): 53–66.

Silk, Jonathan A. Managing Monks: Administrators and Administrative Roles in Indian Buddhist Monasticism. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008.

Skilling, Peter (1994–97). Mahāsūtras. 2 vols. Oxford: The Pali Text Society.

Skilling, Peter (1999). “ ‘Arise, go forth, devote yourselves…’: A verse summary of the teaching of the Buddhas.” In Socially Engaged Buddhism for the New Millennium: Essays in Honor of the Ven. Phra Dhammapitaka (Bhikkhu P.A. Payutto) on His 60th Birthday Anniversary, 440–44. Bangkok: Sathirakoses-Nagapradipa Foundation & Foundation For Children.

Skilling, Peter (2000). “Vasubandhu and the Vyākhyāyukti Literature.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 23, no. 2: 297–350.

Skilling, Peter (2003). “On the Agnihotra­mukhā Yajñāḥ Verses.” In Jainism and Early Buddhism: Essays in Honor of Padmanabh S. Jaini, 637–667. Fremont California: Asian Humanities Press.

Skilling, Peter (2007). “Zombies and Half-Zombies: Mahāsūtras and Other Protective Measures.” The Journal of Pali Text Society 29: 313–30.

Skilling, Peter, and Paul Harrison. “What’s in a Name? Sarvāstivādin Interpretations of the Epithets ‘Buddha’ and ‘Bhagavat.’ ” In Buddhism and Jainism: Essays in Honour of Dr. Hōjun Nagasaki on His Seventieth Birthday, 131–56. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten, 2005.

Steinthal, Paul. Udāna. London: Pali Text Society, 1982.

Straube, Martin (2006). Prinz Sudhana und die Kinnarī: Eine buddhistische Liebesgeschichte von Kṣemendra Texte, Übersetzung, Studie. Indica et Tibetica Band 46. Marburg: Indica et Tibetica Verlag.

Straube, Martin (2009). Studien zur Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā: Texte und Quellen der Parallelen zu Haribhaṭṭas Jātakamālā. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Strong, John (1983). “Filial Piety and Buddhism: The Indian Antecedents to a ‘Chinese’ problem.” In Traditions in Contact and Change: Selected Proceedings of the XIVth Congress of the International Association for the History of Religions, 171–86, 699–701. Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfrid Laurier University Press.

Strong, John (1992). The Legend and Cult of Upagupta: Sanskrit Buddhism in North India and Southeast Asia. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Sugimoto, Takushū 杉本 卓洲 (1978). “Kashō butsu no tō 迦葉仏の塔 [The stupa of the Buddha Kāśyapa].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 27, no. 1: 202–06.

Sugimoto, Takushū (1981). “Mu’uai (shi heno shōdō) to jisatsu: genshi bukkyō ni okeru jisatsukan 無有愛(死への衝動)と自殺―原始仏教における自殺観― [Impulse toward death and suicide: the early Buddhist view of suicide].” Journal of “bukkyō fukushi” 佛教福祉 7: 4–33.

Sugimoto, Takushū (1993). Bosatsu: Jātaka karano tankyū 菩薩–-ジャータカからの探求–- [“Bodhisattva: Explorations of the Jātakas”]. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平樂寺書店.

Takakusu, Junjirō 高楠順次郎, and Watanabe Kaikyoku 渡辺海旭, ed. Taishō shinshū daizōkyō 大正新脩大藏經. 100 vols. Tokyo: Taishō Issaikyō Kankōkai 大正一切經刊行會, 1924–34.

Takubo, Shūyo 田久保 周誉. Bombun Kujakumyō’ōkyō 梵文孔雀明王經 [Ārya Mahā-Māyūrī Vidyā-Rājñī]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 1972.

Tamai, Tatsushi. “The Tocharian Mūgapakkha-Jūtaka.” Annual Report of The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 20 (2017): 251–75.

Tanabe, Kazuko. 田辺 和子 (1981). “Paññāsa-jātaka chū no Sudhana-jātaka (I), Paññāsa-jātaka 中の Sudhana-jātaka (I) [The Sudhana-jātaka in the Paññāsa-jātaka (I).” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 10: 99–126.

Tanabe, Kazuko (1983). “Paññāsa-jātaka chū no Sudhana-jātaka (II), Paññāsa-jātaka 中の Sudhana-jātaka (II) [The Sudhana-jātaka in the Paññāsa-jātaka (II)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 13: 105–21.

Tatelman, Joel (2000). The Glorious Deeds of Pūrṇa: A Translation and Study of the Pūrṇāvadāna. Surrey: Curzon Press.

Tatelman, Joel (2005). The Heavenly Exploits: Buddhist Biographies from the Divyāvadāna Volume One. New York: New York University Press.

Teiser, Stephen F. Reinventing the Wheel: Paintings of Rebirth in Medieval Buddhist Temples. Seattle & London: University of Washington Press, 2006.

Tournier, Vincent. La formation du Mahāvastu et la mise en place des conceptions relatives à la carrière du bodhisattva. Paris: École française d’Extrême-Orient, 2017.

Trenckner, V., Robert Chalmers, and C.A.F. Rhys Davids. [1888–1925]. Majjhima-nikāya. 4 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1974–79.

Trenckner, V. et al. A Critical Pali Dictionary. 3 vols. Copenhagen: The Royal Danish Academy of Sciences and Letters, 1924–92.

Tsai, Yao-ming 蔡 耀明. “Ji’erjite (Gilgit) fanwen fodian xieben de chutu yu fojiao yanjiu 吉爾吉特 (Gilgit) 梵文佛典寫本的出土與佛教研究 [The emergence of the Gilgit Sanskrit Buddhist manuscripts and Buddhist studies].” Zhengguan 正觀 13 (2000): 2–126.

Tsuchida, Ryūtaro. “Two Categories of Brahmins in the Early Buddhist Period.” The Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 49 (1991): 51–95.

Tucci, Giuseppe. “Preliminary report on an archaeological survey in Swat.” East and West 9, no. 4 (1958): 279–328.

Vira, Raghu, and Lokesh Chandra (1959–74). Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts. 10 vols. Śata-piṭaka Series 10. New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture.

Vira, Raghu, and Lokesh Chandra (1995). Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts. 3 vols. Bibliotheca Indo-Buddhica Series 150–52. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Vogel, J.Ph. Indian Serpent-Lore or the Nāgas in Hindu Legend and Art. Varanasi: Indological Book House, 1972.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1984). “Some Hitherto Unidentified Fragments of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit.” Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften in Göttingen, Philologisch-Historische Klasse 1984, no. 7: 299–337.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1992). “Some More Fragments of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neu-entdeckungen und Neu-editionen. Folge 2: 65–109. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Beiheft 4. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1996).“The Final Leaves of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit. Part 1: Saṃgharakṣitāvadāna.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 3, 241–96. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Beiheft 6. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (2002). “The Final Leaves of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit. Part 2: Nāgakumārāvadāna and Lévi Text.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 4, 11–76. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 9. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (2014). “The Pravrajyāvastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen. Last visited on November 2, 2020.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1948). “Wunderkräfte des Buddha: Eine Episode im Sanskrittext des Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.” Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen 1948: 48–91. Reprint, Von Ceylon bis Turfan: Schriften zur Geschichte, Literatur, Religion und Kunst des indischen Kulturraumes, 120–63. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1967.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1950–51). Das Mahāparinirvāṇasūtra: Text in Sanskrit und Tibetisch, verglichen mit dem Pāli nebst einer Übersetzung der chinesischen Entsprechung im Vinaya der Mūla­sarvāstivādins. 3 vols. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1950–51. Reprint, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1986.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1980). “The Rāṣṭrapālasūtra in Sanskrit Remnants from Central Asia.” Indianisme et bouddhisme: Mélanges offerts à Mgr. Étienne Lamotte, 359–74, Louvain: Université catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste Louvain-la-Neuve. Reprint, 1989.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1989). Ausgewählte kleine Schriften. Edited by Heinz Bechert und Petra Kieffer-Pülz. Stuttgart: Steiner Verlag.

Waldschmidt, Ernst et al. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1973–2018.

Walleser, Max, and Hermann Kopp. Manoratha-pūraṇī: Commentary on the Aṅguttara Nikāya. 5 vols. 1924–56. Second ed. and reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1966–79.

Wille, Klaus (1990). Die handschriftliche Überlieferung des Vinayavastu der Mūla­sarvāstivādin. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag.

Wille, Klaus (2014a). “Survey of the Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Turfan Collection (Berlin).” In Harrison and Hartmann ed. 2014: 187–211.

Wille, Klaus (2014b). “Survey of the Identified Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Hoernle, Stein, and Skrine Collections of the British Library (London).” In Harrison and Hartmann ed. 2014: 223–46.

Wogihara, Unrai. Sphuṭārthā Abhidharmakośa­vyākhyā. Tokyo: Sankibō Busshorin, 1936.

Wu, Juan (2016). “The Rootless Faith of Ajātaśatru and Its Explanations in the *Abhidharma-mahā­vibhāṣā.” Indo-Iranian Journal 59: 101–138.

Wu, Juan (2017). “Parallel Stories in the Āvaśyakacūrṇi and the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya: A Preliminary Investigation.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 137, no. 2: 315–47.

Yajima, Michihiko 矢島 道彦. “Suttanipāta taiōku sakuin, Suttanipāta 対応句索引 [An index to parallel verses and padas of the Suttanipāta collected from Buddhist, Jain, and Brahmanical texts].” Bulletin of the Institute of Buddhist Culture Tsurumi University 2 (1997): A1–A97.

Yamabe, Nobuyoshi. “The Paths of Śrāvakas and Bodhisattvas in Meditative Practices.” Acta Asiatica 96 (2009): 47–75.

Yamada, Ryūjō 山田 龍城. Bongo butten no shobunken: Daijō bukkyō seiritsuron josetsu shiryōhen 梵語佛典の諸文献: 大乗佛教成立論序説 資料篇 [“Materials of Sanskrit Buddhist literature: prolegomenon to the establishment of Mahayana Buddhism”]. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平樂寺書店, 1959.

Yamagiwa, Nobuyuki 山極 伸之. “Shoki bukkyō kyōdan ni okeru shoku no juyō 初期仏教教団における食の受容–-浄地をめぐる諸問題–- [The acceptance of food in the early Buddhist monastic community: problems about kappiyabhūmi/kalpikaśālā].” In Ishigami Zennō kyōju koki kinen ronbunshū: bukkyō bunka no kichō to tenkai 石上善應教授古稀記念論文集 仏教文化の基調と展開 [“Festschrift for Professor Zennō Ishigami on the occasion of his seventieth birthday: the basis and development of Buddhist culture”], 307–22, Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 2001.

Yamanaka, Yukio 山中 行雄, Tsutomu Yamashita 山下 勤, Ritsu Akahane 赤羽 律, and Yasutaka Muroya 室屋 安孝 (2011). “Bukkyō bunken ‘Ryōjibyō kyō’ to sono kanren bunken ni tsuite 仏教文献『療痔病経』とその関連文献について [A study of ‘The Sūtra of the Tranquilization of Hemorrhoids’ and other relevant material].” Nihon ishigaku zasshi 日本医史学雑誌 57, no. 3: 293–304.

Yamanaka, Yukio (2012). “Bukkyō bunken ‘Ryōjibyō kyō’ no haikei ni tsuite 仏教文献『療痔病経』の背景について [A study of the Arśapraśamaṇisūtra: Analysis].” Nihon ishigaku zasshi 日本医史学雑誌 58, no. 1: 39–51.

Yao, Fumi 八尾 史 (2007). “Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu ni okeru kyōten inyō no mondai: Mahādevasūtra no jirei, 根本説一切有部律における経典引用の問題―Mahādevasūtraの事例 [On the Mahādevasūtra quoted in the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 35: 195–215.

Yao, Fumi (2010). “ ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō: ‘Nehangyō’ taiō bubun wo chūshin ni 『根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相―「涅槃経」対応部分を中心に, [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya: with a focus on the parallel part to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 38: 251–79.

Yao, Fumi (2011). ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō 2, 『 根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相(二) [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya (2)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 39: 179–99.

Yao, Fumi (2012a). “ ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō 3, 『根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相(三) [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya (3)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 40: 291–318.

Yao, Fumi (2012b). “Problems in the sTog Palace Manuscript of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 60, no. 3: 1189–93.

Yao, Fumi (2013a). Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu yakuji 根本説一切有部律薬事 [“The Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya” (annotated Japanese translation)]. Tokyo: Rengō shuppan 連合出版.

Yao, Fumi (2013b). “A Brief Note on the Newly Found Sanskrit Fragments of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 61, no. 3: 72–77.

Yao, Fumi (2015). “A Preliminary Report on the Newly Found Sanskrit Manuscript Fragments of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Indian Logic 8, 289–303.

Yao, Fumi (2017). “Dharmadinnā Becomes a Nun: A Story of Ordination by Messenger from the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, Translated from the Tibetan version.” Asian Literature and Translation 4, no. 1: 105–48.

Yao, Fumi (2018). “Two Sanskrit Manuscripts of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu from Gilgit.” WIAS Research Bulletin 10: 91–102.

Yao, Fumi (Forthcoming a.) “Traces of Incorporation: Some Examples of the Saṃyuktāgama Sūtras in the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” In Research on the Saṃyukta-āgama. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation

Yao, Fumi (Forthcoming b.) “The Formation of the Buddha’s Former Life Stories in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 42.

Zin, Monika, (2004). “The Mūkapaṅgu Story in the Madras Government Museum: The Problem of the Textual Affiliations of the Narrative Reliefs in Amaravati and Nagarjunakonda.” Annali, Università degli studi di Napoli “L’Orientale” 64: 157–80.

Zin, Monika, (2006a). Mitleid und Wunderkraft: Schwierige Bekehrungen und ihre Ikonographie im indischen Buddhismus. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Zin, Monika, (2006b). “About Two Rocks in the Buddha’s Life Story.” East and West 56, no. 4: 329–58.

Zin, Monika, (2012). “Māndhātar, the Universal Monarch, and the Meaning of Representations of the Cakravartin in the Amaravati School, and of the Kings on the Kanaganahalli Stūpa.” In Buddhist Narrative in Asia and Beyond: In Honour of HRH Princess Maha Chakri Sirindhorn on Her Fifty-Fifth Birth Anniversary:149–64. Bangkok: Institute of Thai Studies, Chulalongkorn University.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

a person who makes things allowable

Wylie:
  • rung ba byed pa
Tibetan:
  • རུང་བ་བྱེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpikāra

A layperson who makes things legally permissible in the context of Buddhist monastic law, doing tasks that are not allowed for monks.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­104
g.­2

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

The sixth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­3

Abṛha

Wylie:
  • mi che ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • abṛha

The first of the “pure abodes;” also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­4

Ācāma River

Wylie:
  • ’bras khu’i chu
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་ཁུའི་ཆུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ācāmanadī

A river that flows down from the lake Anavatapta.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­318
g.­5

Acceptance of the Hair

Wylie:
  • dbu skra blangs pa
Tibetan:
  • དབུ་སྐྲ་བླངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • keśa­prati­grahaṇa

A shrine built to commemorate the Buddha’s going forth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­89
g.­6

Acceptance of the Saffron Robes

Wylie:
  • ngur smrig blangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ངུར་སྨྲིག་བླངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāṣāya­prati­grahaṇa

A shrine built to commemorate the Buddha’s going forth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­88
g.­7

Ādarśamukha

Wylie:
  • me long gdong
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ལོང་གདོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ādarśamukha

A king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­465-466
  • 9.­470-472
  • 9.­475
  • 9.­479
  • 9.­481
  • 9.­484
  • 9.­486
  • 9.­488-489
  • 9.­491
  • 9.­497
  • 9.­524
  • n.­697
  • n.­700
  • n.­705
g.­8

Adharma

Wylie:
  • chos min
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • adharma

A bird who shares one body with another bird, Dharma.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­985-986
  • 9.­988
g.­9

Ādirājya

Wylie:
  • dang po’i rgyal srid
Tibetan:
  • དང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་སྲིད།
Sanskrit:
  • ādirājya

A place in Śūrasena.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­269-270
  • 8.­2
g.­10

Ādumā

Wylie:
  • yul a du ma
  • a du ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ཨ་དུ་མ།
  • ཨ་དུ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • ādumā

A village.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­11
  • 11.­44
g.­11

agaru

Wylie:
  • a gar
  • a ga ru
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་གར།
  • ཨ་ག་རུ།
Sanskrit:
  • agaru

A kind of fragrant aloe wood.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­23
  • 7.­226
  • 9.­1429
  • 9.­1848
g.­12

aggregate

Wylie:
  • phung po
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • skandha

The basic components out of which the world and the personal self are formed, usually listed as a set of five.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­344
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­265
  • 5.­2
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­403
  • 9.­961-962
  • 11.­157
  • n.­263
  • n.­502
  • g.­649
g.­13

Agnidatta

Wylie:
  • me sbyin
Tibetan:
  • མེ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • agnidatta

(1) A brahmin. (2) A brahmin king.

Located in 37 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­393
  • 2.­395
  • 2.­397
  • 2.­399
  • 2.­405-408
  • 2.­410
  • 2.­420
  • 8.­120
  • 8.­127-129
  • 8.­189-190
  • 8.­193
  • 8.­199-202
  • 8.­204
  • 8.­210
  • 8.­212
  • 8.­215-216
  • 8.­219
  • 8.­222
  • n.­115
  • n.­515
  • n.­738
  • g.­34
  • g.­192
  • g.­224
  • g.­340
  • g.­411
g.­14

Ahicchattra

Wylie:
  • sbrul gdugs
Tibetan:
  • སྦྲུལ་གདུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­33
g.­15

Airāvaṇa

Wylie:
  • sa srung bu
Tibetan:
  • ས་སྲུང་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • airāvaṇa

Indra’s elephant.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­157
  • 9.­723
  • 9.­850
  • 9.­1210
  • 9.­1855
g.­16

Airāvataka

Wylie:
  • sa srung bu’i dbyibs
Tibetan:
  • ས་སྲུང་བུའི་དབྱིབས།
Sanskrit:
  • airāvataka

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
g.­17

Ajātaśatru

Wylie:
  • ma skyes dgra
Tibetan:
  • མ་སྐྱེས་དགྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • ajātaśatru

The son of King Śreṇya Bimbisāra, who later becomes the king of Magadha.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 3.­3
  • 3.­6-7
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­13-15
  • 3.­19-22
  • 3.­26-27
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­48-50
  • 3.­52-53
  • 3.­107-108
  • 3.­134-136
  • n.­124
  • n.­128
  • g.­697
g.­18

Ajiravatī

Wylie:
  • gnas ldan
Tibetan:
  • གནས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • ajiravatī

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­227
g.­19

Ajita Keśakambala

Wylie:
  • mi pham skra’i la ba can
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཕམ་སྐྲའི་ལ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ajita keśa­kambala

One of the six teachers at the time of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­59
g.­20

Akaniṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha

The fifth and highest of the “pure abodes;” also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­21

Ālikāvendāmaghā

Wylie:
  • bslang rnyed ma dang mchu
Tibetan:
  • བསླང་རྙེད་མ་དང་མཆུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ālikāvendāmaghā

A yakṣiṇī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­76
g.­22

Ambāṣṭha

Wylie:
  • ma sdug
Tibetan:
  • མ་སྡུག
Sanskrit:
  • ambāṣṭha

A young brahmin and disciple of Pauṣkarasāri.

Located in 66 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­10
  • 6.­12-14
  • 6.­17-19
  • 6.­22-23
  • 6.­25-28
  • 6.­35-41
  • 6.­76-96
  • 6.­100-104
  • 6.­114-119
  • 6.­150
  • 6.­154-157
  • 6.­160
  • 6.­168
  • 6.­170
  • n.­255
  • n.­261
  • n.­263
  • n.­267
  • n.­295
  • n.­311
g.­23

Āmrapālī

Wylie:
  • a mra skyong ma
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་མྲ་སྐྱོང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • āmrapālī

A courtesan.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­218
  • 3.­222-223
  • 3.­231-232
  • 3.­236-239
  • 3.­247
  • 3.­258-259
  • 3.­263
  • n.­166
  • n.­170
  • n.­184
  • n.­1183
  • g.­513
g.­24

Anabhraka

Wylie:
  • sprin med
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anabhraka

The tenth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­25

Ānanda

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A disciple of a former Buddha. (3) A disciple of a future Buddha. (4) A king in the past.

Located in 233 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3-5
  • 1.­7-9
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­76-79
  • 2.­82
  • 2.­86-88
  • 2.­269-272
  • 2.­276
  • 2.­280-281
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­54
  • 3.­76
  • 3.­81
  • 3.­98-99
  • 3.­135-136
  • 3.­139
  • 3.­203
  • 3.­206
  • 3.­229
  • 3.­272
  • 3.­298
  • 3.­324
  • 4.­2-4
  • 4.­7-9
  • 4.­11-16
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­28-32
  • 4.­34-36
  • 4.­46-47
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­58-59
  • 4.­63-72
  • 4.­82
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­87-91
  • 4.­112-113
  • 5.­3-5
  • 5.­10-13
  • 6.­162-163
  • 6.­183-184
  • 6.­221
  • 6.­227-228
  • 6.­246-247
  • 6.­257-258
  • 6.­278-280
  • 7.­4-6
  • 7.­8
  • 7.­11
  • 7.­15
  • 7.­17
  • 7.­41
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­47
  • 7.­149-150
  • 7.­207
  • 7.­239
  • 7.­269-271
  • 8.­2-4
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­69-70
  • 8.­95-96
  • 8.­112-113
  • 8.­128
  • 8.­130
  • 8.­132-134
  • 8.­136-137
  • 8.­139-140
  • 8.­143-144
  • 8.­146
  • 8.­148
  • 8.­173-178
  • 8.­180
  • 8.­182-183
  • 8.­185-186
  • 8.­188
  • 8.­192-194
  • 8.­199-205
  • 8.­207
  • 8.­240
  • 9.­2-3
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­8-9
  • 9.­17
  • 9.­41
  • 9.­43-44
  • 9.­108-109
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­132-133
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­465-466
  • 9.­1386-1388
  • 9.­1392
  • 9.­1403
  • 9.­1405
  • 9.­1427
  • 9.­1435
  • 9.­1440
  • 9.­2532-2533
  • 9.­2544-2545
  • 9.­2551-2552
  • 9.­2558-2559
  • 9.­2569-2570
  • 10.­65-66
  • 11.­29
  • 11.­198
  • 11.­202
  • 11.­204-205
  • 11.­224
  • 11.­227
  • n.­57
  • n.­130
  • n.­365
  • n.­429
  • n.­447
  • n.­454
  • n.­502
  • n.­508-509
  • n.­511
  • n.­563-564
  • n.­622
  • n.­697
  • n.­940
  • n.­960
  • n.­1180
  • g.­532
g.­26

Anaṅgana

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs med
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anaṅgana

The head of a guild who was Jyotiṣka in a former life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1842
g.­27

Anāthapiṇḍada

Wylie:
  • mgon med zas sbyin
Tibetan:
  • མགོན་མེད་ཟས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • anāthapiṇḍada

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A wealthy merchant in the town of Śrāvastī, famous for his generosity to the poor, who became a patron of the Buddha Śākyamuni. He bought Prince Jeta’s Grove (Skt. Jetavana), to be the Buddha’s first monastery, a place where the monks could stay during the monsoon.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­91
  • 2.­207-213
  • 6.­239
  • 8.­191
  • 8.­193
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­71-74
  • 9.­76-77
  • n.­668
  • g.­625
g.­28

Anavatapta

Wylie:
  • ma dros pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་དྲོས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anavatapta

A lake that is considered the source of four great rivers, including the Ganges, in Buddhist cosmology.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 8.­318
  • 9.­1222
  • 9.­1229
  • 9.­1524
  • 9.­1526-1527
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1532
  • 9.­1538
  • 9.­1595
  • 9.­1608
  • 9.­1628
  • 9.­1647
  • 9.­1664
  • 9.­1677
  • 9.­1687
  • 9.­1701
  • 9.­1724
  • 9.­1737
  • 9.­1765
  • 9.­1787
  • 9.­1799
  • 9.­1812
  • 9.­1822
  • 9.­1839
  • 9.­1873
  • 9.­1902
  • 9.­1930
  • 9.­1944
  • 9.­1956
  • 9.­1987
  • 9.­2007
  • 9.­2023
  • 9.­2035
  • 9.­2051
  • 9.­2084
  • 9.­2110
  • 9.­2133
  • 9.­2149
  • 9.­2173
  • 9.­2207
  • 9.­2225
  • 9.­2268
  • 9.­2290
  • 9.­2324
  • 9.­2467
  • 9.­2502
  • 9.­2505-2507
  • n.­559
  • g.­4
g.­29

Aṅga

Wylie:
  • ang ga
Tibetan:
  • ཨང་ག
Sanskrit:
  • aṅga

A country.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­4
  • 3.­243
  • 9.­1351
  • n.­123
  • n.­173
g.­30

Aṅgadikā

Wylie:
  • dpung rgyan ldan
Tibetan:
  • དཔུང་རྒྱན་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgadikā

A village or town.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­4
g.­31

Aṅgaratha

Wylie:
  • shing rta’i yan lag
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་རྟའི་ཡན་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgaratha

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1448
  • 9.­1506
g.­32

Aṅgiras

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i rigs
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgiras

A ṛṣi in the past.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­244
  • 6.­141
  • n.­1160
g.­33

Aniruddha

Wylie:
  • ma ’gags
Tibetan:
  • མ་འགགས།
Sanskrit:
  • aniruddha

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A buddha in the past.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1435
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1738
  • 9.­1989-1990
  • 9.­2007-2009
  • n.­117
  • n.­1012
g.­34

Apalāla

Wylie:
  • sog ma med
Tibetan:
  • སོག་མ་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • apalāla

Lit. “Without a Straw.” A nāga king, who was the brahmin Agnidatta in a former life.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­422
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­51-52
  • 7.­212-213
  • 7.­225-228
  • 7.­234-235
  • 7.­237
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­270-271
  • n.­114
  • n.­128
  • n.­343
  • n.­401
  • n.­423
  • n.­429
  • g.­411
g.­35

Āpannaka

Wylie:
  • nyams pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āpannaka

A yakṣa in the country of Bhraṣṭolā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­240
g.­36

Aparājita

Wylie:
  • gzhan gyis mi thul ba
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་གྱིས་མི་ཐུལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • aparājita

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1410
  • 9.­1506
g.­37

Apramāṇābha

Wylie:
  • tshad med ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇābha

The fifth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­38

Apramāṇaśubha

Wylie:
  • tshad med dge
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་དགེ
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇaśubha

The eighth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­39

Apriya

Wylie:
  • mi dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • apriya

A yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­243
g.­40

apūpa

Wylie:
  • snum khur
Tibetan:
  • སྣུམ་ཁུར།
Sanskrit:
  • apūpa

A pastry made of flour. Also rendered in this translation as “pastry.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • g.­475
g.­41

Araṇemi

Wylie:
  • rtsibs kyi mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • རྩིབས་ཀྱི་མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • araṇemi

A teacher who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1257-1258
  • 9.­1260-1261
  • 9.­1263
  • 9.­1276-1277
  • n.­883
  • n.­886
g.­42

arhantī

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom ma
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhantī

A female arhat, one who has achieved the fourth and final level of attainment on the śrāvaka path and attained liberation with the cessation of all afflictive emotions.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­106
  • 8.­108
  • 8.­110
  • n.­491
g.­43

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat

One who has achieved the fourth and final level of attainment on the śrāvaka path and attained liberation with the cessation of all afflictive emotions.

Located in 115 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­24
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­256
  • 2.­292
  • 2.­315
  • 2.­343
  • 2.­346-347
  • 2.­349-350
  • 2.­352
  • 2.­365
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­75
  • 3.­127
  • 3.­174
  • 3.­197
  • 3.­200-201
  • 3.­250-255
  • 3.­267
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­296
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­322
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­34-35
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­102
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­57
  • 7.­66
  • 7.­113
  • 7.­117
  • 7.­122
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­130-131
  • 7.­150
  • 8.­6
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­118
  • 8.­232
  • 8.­248
  • 8.­262
  • 8.­268
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­36
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­323-325
  • 9.­329
  • 9.­1527
  • 9.­1532
  • 9.­1587
  • 9.­1606
  • 9.­1619
  • 9.­1637-1638
  • 9.­1655
  • 9.­1661
  • 9.­1675
  • 9.­1683
  • 9.­1697
  • 9.­1735
  • 9.­1830
  • 9.­1871
  • 9.­1900
  • 9.­1941
  • 9.­2006
  • 9.­2016
  • 9.­2023
  • 9.­2049
  • 9.­2074
  • 9.­2107
  • 9.­2132
  • 9.­2145
  • 9.­2164-2165
  • 9.­2267
  • 9.­2317
  • 9.­2321
  • 9.­2355
  • 9.­2361
  • 9.­2506-2507
  • 9.­2534
  • 10.­67
  • 11.­35
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­57-58
  • 11.­93
  • 11.­159
  • n.­40
  • n.­491
  • g.­42
  • g.­640
  • g.­668
g.­44

Ariṣṭa

Wylie:
  • yid ’ong
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་འོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ariṣṭa

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­45

Arthadarśin

Wylie:
  • don gzigs pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གཟིགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arthadarśin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1475
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­931
g.­46

Arthavargīya Sūtras

Wylie:
  • don gyi tshoms kyi mdo dag
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གྱི་ཚོམས་ཀྱི་མདོ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • arthavargīya sūtras

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­47

Ascetic Practitioner

Wylie:
  • dka’ thub mdzad
Tibetan:
  • དཀའ་ཐུབ་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1425
  • 9.­1506
g.­48

ash

Wylie:
  • thal ba
Tibetan:
  • ཐལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣāra

Five kinds of ash made from five kinds of plants, which are used as medicines.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­16
  • 11.­223
g.­49

Āśīviṣā

Wylie:
  • sbrul can
Tibetan:
  • སྦྲུལ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • āśīviṣā

A river.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-638
  • 9.­640
  • 9.­685-686
  • 9.­688
g.­50

Aśmaka

Wylie:
  • rdo mangs
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་མངས།
Sanskrit:
  • aśmaka

A country.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1351
g.­51

Aśoka

Wylie:
  • mya ngan med
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • aśoka

An uncle of King Mahāpraṇāda.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­161
  • 3.­167
  • 9.­671
g.­52

assign the rewards of the offerings to the name

Wylie:
  • ming nas brjod de yon bsngo ba
  • ming nas smos te yon bsngo ba
Tibetan:
  • མིང་ནས་བརྗོད་དེ་ཡོན་བསྔོ་བ།
  • མིང་ནས་སྨོས་ཏེ་ཡོན་བསྔོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāmnā dakṣiṇām ādiśati

An act of recitation of particular verses performed by a monastic when he or she receives offerings from others. This act is considered to transfer the merit produced by the donor to deities, causing those deities to protect and confer benefits on the person whose name is pronounced in the recitation.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­52
  • 6.­167
  • 6.­177
  • 9.­100-104
  • 9.­106
  • 9.­108
  • 9.­574
  • 9.­1140
  • 9.­2511-2512
  • 9.­2517-2518
  • 11.­54
  • 11.­214
g.­53

Aṣṭaka

Wylie:
  • brgyad pa
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭaka

A ṛṣi in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­141
g.­54

astringent

Wylie:
  • bska ba
Tibetan:
  • བསྐ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaṣāya

Five kinds of astringent material produced from five kinds of plants and used as medicines.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­38
  • 1.­40-49
  • 1.­51
  • 9.­575
  • 9.­1141
  • n.­26
g.­55

asura

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A type of nonhuman being whose precise status is subject to different views, but is included as one of the six classes of beings in the sixfold classification of realms of rebirth. In the Buddhist context, asuras are powerful beings said to be dominated by envy, ambition, and hostility. They are also known in the pre-Buddhist and pre-Vedic mythologies of India and Iran, and feature prominently in Vedic and post-Vedic Brahmanical mythology, as well as in the Buddhist tradition. In these traditions, asuras are often described as being engaged in interminable conflict with the devas (gods).

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 3.­7
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 7.­164
  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­47
  • 9.­238-242
  • 9.­244
  • 9.­725
  • 9.­825
  • 9.­852
  • 9.­1376
  • g.­720
g.­56

Aśvaka

Wylie:
  • ’gro mgyogs
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་མགྱོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvaka

A nāga. See also n.­441.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­251-253
  • 7.­255
  • g.­215
g.­57

Aśvakarṇa

Wylie:
  • rta rna
Tibetan:
  • རྟ་རྣ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvakarṇa

One of the seven golden mountains.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-196
  • n.­632
g.­58

Atapa

Wylie:
  • mi gdung ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གདུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • atapa

The second of the “pure abodes;” also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­59

Aṭaṭa

Wylie:
  • so thams thams
Tibetan:
  • སོ་ཐམས་ཐམས།
Sanskrit:
  • aṭaṭa

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­60

Ātreya

Wylie:
  • rgyun shes kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་ཤེས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • ātreya

(1) The physician of King Prasenajit. (2) The name of Prince Kuśa disguised as a physician.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-47
  • 2.­50-54
  • 2.­67-69
  • 2.­71
  • 9.­375
  • g.­551
g.­61

Aṭṭeśvara

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • aṭṭeśvara

A garuḍa.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­32
  • 11.­36
g.­62

Atyuccagāmin

Wylie:
  • mthor ’phags pa
Tibetan:
  • མཐོར་འཕགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • atyuccagāmin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1444
  • 9.­1506
g.­63

Auspicious

Wylie:
  • bkra shis ldan
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

An elephant.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­846-847
  • 9.­855
g.­64

Avanti

Wylie:
  • srung byed
Tibetan:
  • སྲུང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • avanti

A country.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1351
g.­65

Avevāṇa

Wylie:
  • mi g.yo ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གཡོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • avevāṇa

A mountain. See also n.­746.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
  • n.­746
g.­66

Awakened Power

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas stobs
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa in Heaped Up. See also n.­410.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­216-218
  • 7.­220
g.­67

Ayodhyā

Wylie:
  • tshugs dka’
  • tshugs par dka’
Tibetan:
  • ཚུགས་དཀའ།
  • ཚུགས་པར་དཀའ།
Sanskrit:
  • ayodhyā

The city of Southern Pañcāla.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­240-241
g.­68

Bahuputra shrine

Wylie:
  • bu mangs mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • བུ་མངས་མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • bahu­putra­caitya

A shrine near Vaiśālī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1588
g.­69

Bakkula

Wylie:
  • bak+ku la
Tibetan:
  • བཀྐུ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • bakkula

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1789-1790
  • 9.­1799-1801
  • n.­1000
g.­70

Bālāha

Wylie:
  • sprin gyi shugs can
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་གྱི་ཤུགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • bālāha

A horse king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­952
  • 9.­955-960
  • 9.­962
  • 9.­964-965
g.­71

Bamboo Grove

Wylie:
  • ’od ma’i tshal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མའི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇuvana

A grove near Rājagṛha in Magadha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­40-41
  • 2.­412
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­25
  • 9.­2071
  • n.­935
g.­72

Bandhumat

Wylie:
  • bshes ldan
Tibetan:
  • བཤེས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • bandhumat

A king of Bandhumatī in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1844-1845
g.­73

Bandhumatī

Wylie:
  • gnyen ldan
Tibetan:
  • གཉེན་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • bandhumatī

(1) A city. (2) A river.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­232-234
  • 9.­270-271
  • 9.­1667
  • 9.­1704
  • 9.­1790
  • 9.­1842
  • 9.­2176
  • 9.­2385
  • 9.­2443
  • g.­72
g.­74

Bath

Wylie:
  • khrus
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲུས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­13
g.­75

Beautiful

Wylie:
  • mdzes ldan
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A woman in Sunrise, sister of Sunny. See also n.­319.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­188-190
  • g.­638
g.­76

Being Crushed

Wylie:
  • bsdus gzhom
Tibetan:
  • བསྡུས་གཞོམ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃghāta

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1731
  • 9.­1938
g.­77

Beluva

Wylie:
  • yangs pa’i ’od ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པའི་འོད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • beluva

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2004
g.­78

Best Army

Wylie:
  • sde mchog
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • —

A king.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­399
  • 2.­405
  • 7.­242
g.­79

Bhaddālin

Wylie:
  • legs ldan
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhaddālin

A monk.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­142
  • 3.­144
  • 3.­167
g.­80

Bhadrā

Wylie:
  • bzang mo
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrā

(1) The wife of an elephant king that was the Buddha in a former life. (2) A courtesan.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1032-1033
  • 9.­2368
  • 9.­2371
  • 9.­2374-2379
g.­81

Bhadra

Wylie:
  • bzang po
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadra

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­82

Bhadrakanyā

Wylie:
  • bu mo bzang mo
Tibetan:
  • བུ་མོ་བཟང་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrakanyā

A woman who was Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s mother in her previous life and was reborn in Marīcika World. See also n.­106.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­330
  • 2.­332
  • 2.­337
  • n.­106
g.­83

Bhadraṃkara

Wylie:
  • bzang byed
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadraṃkara

A city.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­58
  • 10.­65-68
  • 10.­73-74
  • 10.­78-80
  • 10.­84
  • 10.­92
g.­84

Bhadrāśva

Wylie:
  • rta bzangs
Tibetan:
  • རྟ་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrāśva

A city or village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­3
g.­85

Bhadrika

Wylie:
  • bzang ldan
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrika

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2112-2113
  • 9.­2133-2135
g.­86

Bhāgīratha

Wylie:
  • skal ldan shing rta
Tibetan:
  • སྐལ་ལྡན་ཤིང་རྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhāgīratha

Another name for Mahābhāgīratha, a buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1506
g.­87

Bhāgīrathī

Wylie:
  • skal ldan shing rta
Tibetan:
  • སྐལ་ལྡན་ཤིང་རྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhāgīrathī

“Fortunate Chariot,” an epithet of the Ganges.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­28-29
  • 8.­288-289
  • n.­251-252
g.­88

Bharadvāja

Wylie:
  • bha ra dwa dza
Tibetan:
  • བྷ་ར་དྭ་ཛ།
Sanskrit:
  • bharadvāja

(1) A ṛṣi in the past. (2) A disciple of the Buddha Vipaśyin.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­141
  • 9.­2354-2358
  • 9.­2361
  • g.­716
g.­89

Bhāradvāja

Wylie:
  • bha ra dwa dza
Tibetan:
  • བྷ་ར་དྭ་ཛ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhāradvāja

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1474
  • 9.­1506
g.­90

Bhārgava

Wylie:
  • ngan spong
Tibetan:
  • ངན་སྤོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhārgava

A ṛṣi.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­87
  • n.­213
g.­91

Bhaṭa

Wylie:
  • dpa’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དཔའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhaṭa

One of the two brothers in Mathurā who are predicted by the Buddha to build a monastery in the future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­5
g.­92

Bhava

Wylie:
  • ’byor pa
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhava

A householder and the father of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92-93
  • 2.­95-96
  • 2.­100-103
  • 2.­105
  • 2.­114-116
  • 2.­118
  • n.­66
  • g.­94
  • g.­95
  • g.­96
g.­93

Bhavadeva

Wylie:
  • srid pa’i lha
Tibetan:
  • སྲིད་པའི་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavadeva

The king of Nandivardhana.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­250
g.­94

Bhavanandin

Wylie:
  • ’byor dga’
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavanandin

A son of Bhava and half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­94
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­128
  • g.­676
g.­95

Bhavatrāta

Wylie:
  • ’byor skyob
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་སྐྱོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavatrāta

A son of Bhava and half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­94
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­128
  • g.­610
g.­96

Bhavila

Wylie:
  • ’byor len
Tibetan:
  • འབྱོར་ལེན།
Sanskrit:
  • bhavila

A son of Bhava and half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­93
  • 2.­105
  • 2.­107
  • 2.­109
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­124
  • 2.­126
  • 2.­128
  • 2.­130
  • 2.­133
  • 2.­138-139
  • 2.­141-143
  • 2.­148
  • 2.­151
  • 2.­154-155
  • 2.­204-205
  • g.­145
g.­97

Bhraṣṭolā

Wylie:
  • yul gnyid ’grogs
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་གཉིད་འགྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhraṣṭolā

A country.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­240
  • g.­35
g.­98

Bhṛgu

Wylie:
  • ngan spong
Tibetan:
  • ངན་སྤོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhṛgu

A ṛṣi in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­141
g.­99

bhūta

Wylie:
  • ’byung po
Tibetan:
  • འབྱུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term in its broadest sense can refer to any being, whether human, animal, or nonhuman. However, it is often used to refer to a specific class of nonhuman beings, especially when bhūtas are mentioned alongside rākṣasas, piśācas, or pretas. In common with these other kinds of nonhumans, bhūtas are usually depicted with unattractive and misshapen bodies. Like several other classes of nonhuman beings, bhūtas take spontaneous birth. As their leader is traditionally regarded to be Rudra-Śiva (also known by the name Bhūta), with whom they haunt dangerous and wild places, bhūtas are especially prominent in Śaivism, where large sections of certain tantras concentrate on them.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­279
  • 3.­291
  • 3.­297
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 3.­305
  • 3.­317
  • 3.­323
  • 4.­104
  • n.­180
g.­100

bisakṣīla

Wylie:
  • pad ma’i rtsa ba’i ’o ma
Tibetan:
  • པད་མའི་རྩ་བའི་འོ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • bisakṣīla

The juice of lotus roots.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­48
g.­101

Black Cord

Wylie:
  • thig nag
Tibetan:
  • ཐིག་ནག
Sanskrit:
  • kālasūtra

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1624
  • 9.­1693
  • 9.­2032
  • 9.­2484
  • 9.­2489
  • 9.­2492
g.­102

Blisters

Wylie:
  • chu bur can
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བུར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • arbuda

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 2.­75
  • 4.­18
g.­103

Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahman

(1) A buddha in the past. (2) A god.

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­247
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­183
  • 3.­185-187
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­49
  • 6.­51
  • 6.­120-123
  • 6.­230-231
  • 6.­236
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­266-267
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­1135
  • 9.­1302-1303
  • 9.­1308-1309
  • 9.­1311-1313
  • 9.­1316-1324
  • 9.­1329
  • 9.­1332
  • 9.­1390
  • 9.­1450
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1751
  • 9.­2190
  • 9.­2199
  • 9.­2253
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­87
  • n.­716
  • n.­894
  • g.­104
g.­104

Brahmā World

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i ’jig rten
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་འཇིག་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmaloka

The heaven of Brahmā, a god who rules the Sahā World.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1237-1238
  • 9.­1240
  • g.­354
g.­105

Brahmadatta

Wylie:
  • tshangs sbyin
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmadatta

(1) A king of Kāśi in the past. (2) A buddha in the past. (3) One of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda.

Located in 55 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­154
  • 9.­414-415
  • 9.­418
  • 9.­916-917
  • 9.­1000
  • 9.­1004-1005
  • 9.­1007-1008
  • 9.­1016
  • 9.­1033
  • 9.­1035
  • 9.­1106-1108
  • 9.­1112
  • 9.­1122
  • 9.­1125
  • 9.­1134-1135
  • 9.­1143
  • 9.­1145
  • 9.­1149
  • 9.­1151-1152
  • 9.­1155-1158
  • 9.­1160-1161
  • 9.­1163-1164
  • 9.­1170
  • 9.­1173
  • 9.­1192
  • 9.­1208
  • 9.­1224
  • 9.­1350
  • 9.­1440
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1562
  • 9.­1564
  • 9.­2228
  • 9.­2240
  • 9.­2242
  • 9.­2244
  • 9.­2247
  • 9.­2368
  • 10.­117
  • 10.­119
  • 10.­131
  • g.­109
g.­106

Brāhmaṇa­kapphiṇa

Wylie:
  • bram ze ka pi na
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ་ཀ་པི་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa­kapphiṇa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­57-59
  • 11.­64-65
  • g.­434
g.­107

Brahma­purohita

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i mdun na ’don
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་མདུན་ན་འདོན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahma­purohita

A class of gods who inhabit the second heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­108

Brahmasabhā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa ’du ba
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་འདུ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmasabhā

A pond.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­583
  • 9.­585
  • 9.­658
g.­109

Brahmāvatī

Wylie:
  • tshangs ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmāvatī

(1) The wife of Brahmāyus. (2) The wife of King Brahmadatta.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­169
  • 9.­1134
  • 9.­1137
  • 9.­1142-1145
g.­110

Brahmāvatī

Wylie:
  • tshangs ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmāvatī

A pond.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1134
  • 9.­1144-1145
  • 9.­1224
  • 9.­1226-1228
g.­111

Brahmāyus

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i tshe
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་ཚེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmāyus

(1) The chief priest of King Śaṅkha. (2) A buddha in the past.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­169
  • 3.­171-172
  • 9.­1451
  • 9.­1506
  • g.­109
g.­112

brahmin (caste)

Wylie:
  • bram ze’i rigs
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེའི་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa

One of the four castes, that of the highly respected priestly caste of classical Indian society.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199
  • 6.­201-204
  • 6.­208
  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­2280
  • 11.­50
  • g.­131
g.­113

Brahmin Mahāgovinda

Wylie:
  • bram ze chen po gnag lhas skyes
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ་ཆེན་པོ་གནག་ལྷས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa mahāgovinda

A brahmin who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1302-1304
  • 9.­1308-1309
  • 9.­1315
  • 9.­1318
  • 9.­1322-1324
  • 9.­1327
  • 9.­1329
  • 9.­1331
  • 9.­1333
  • 9.­1338
  • 9.­1340
  • 9.­1344-1345
  • 9.­1348
  • n.­647
  • g.­270
g.­114

Brahmin Village

Wylie:
  • bram ze’i grong
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེའི་གྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village in Kosala.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­169-170
g.­115

breakfast

Wylie:
  • g.yar tshus
  • zhal tshus
Tibetan:
  • གཡར་ཚུས།
  • ཞལ་ཚུས།
Sanskrit:
  • purobhaktikā

Simple food to be eaten before the main meal. See also n.­1088.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­160
  • 8.­166
  • 10.­30
  • 10.­32
g.­116

Bṛhaddyuti

Wylie:
  • yangs pa’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhaddyuti

A potter who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1385-1389
  • 9.­1392
g.­117

Bṛhatphala

Wylie:
  • ’bras bu che
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་བུ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhatphala

A class of gods who inhabit one of the levels in the highest heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­118

Bṛhāvatī

Wylie:
  • yangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhāvatī

A city.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1385-1386
g.­119

buddha without the marks

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi mtshan med pa
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་མཚན་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • alakṣaṇako buddhaḥ

A buddha who does not possess the thirty-two marks and eighty minor marks.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­6
g.­120

Burst Blisters

Wylie:
  • chu bur rdol ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བུར་རྡོལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirarbuda

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 2.­75
  • 4.­18
g.­121

butter oil

Wylie:
  • mar dkar
  • zhun mar
Tibetan:
  • མར་དཀར།
  • ཞུན་མར།
Sanskrit:
  • sarpis

A kind of dairy product made from fermented milk.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 9.­580
  • 9.­1147
g.­122

Campā

Wylie:
  • tsam pa
Tibetan:
  • ཙམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • campā

A country.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­32
  • 2.­71
  • 9.­1351
  • 9.­1671
  • g.­536
g.­123

Cāmpeya

Wylie:
  • tsam pa skyes
Tibetan:
  • ཙམ་པ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • cāmpeya

A nāga who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1217
  • 9.­1219
g.­124

Cañcā

Wylie:
  • rtswa mi
Tibetan:
  • རྩྭ་མི།
Sanskrit:
  • cañcā

A female mendicant who falsely accuses the Buddha.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1511
  • 9.­1513-1514
  • 9.­1517-1518
  • 9.­1521
  • 9.­1523
  • 9.­2362
  • 9.­2367
  • 9.­2382
  • 9.­2482
  • n.­848
  • n.­937
g.­125

caṇḍāla

Wylie:
  • gdol pa
Tibetan:
  • གདོལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍāla

One of the lower social classes that are outside, and beneath, the four castes.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­48
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­836
  • 9.­910
g.­126

Caṇḍālī

Wylie:
  • gtum byed
Tibetan:
  • གཏུམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • caṇḍālī

A yakṣiṇī. See also n.­438.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­250
g.­127

Candana

Wylie:
  • tsan dan
  • tsan dan ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན།
  • ཙན་དན་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • candana

A buddha in the past.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1439
  • 9.­1452
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­930
g.­128

Candra

Wylie:
  • zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • candra

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1453
  • n.­930
g.­129

cāṇūra

Wylie:
  • stobs mchog
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • cāṇūra

A kind of person who possesses superhuman strength.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­102-103
g.­130

Cāru

Wylie:
  • mdzes pa
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • cāru

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­131

caste

Wylie:
  • rigs
Tibetan:
  • རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • varṇa

The four social classes of traditional Hindu society: brahmin, kṣatriya, vaiśya, and śūdra.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199
  • 6.­201-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­213
  • 6.­236
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­203
  • 9.­2280
  • n.­327
  • g.­112
  • g.­125
  • g.­320
  • g.­391
  • g.­506
  • g.­629
  • g.­702
g.­132

Chandaka

Wylie:
  • ’dun pa
Tibetan:
  • འདུན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • chandaka

The Bodhisattva’s charioteer.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­90-91
g.­133

Citrā

Wylie:
  • sna tshogs
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་ཚོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • citrā

A river.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-639
  • 9.­685-687
g.­134

city of Pāṭaliputra

Wylie:
  • dmar bu can gyi grong khyer
Tibetan:
  • དམར་བུ་ཅན་གྱི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṭaliputraṃ nagaraṃ

A city on the Ganges that became the capital of Magadha after Rājagṛha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­99
g.­135

Clear Light

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A heaven.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­79
  • 9.­1239
  • 9.­2254-2255
g.­136

collyrium

Wylie:
  • mig sman
Tibetan:
  • མིག་སྨན།
Sanskrit:
  • añjana

A kind of medicine applied around the eyes.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 1.­55-59
  • 6.­89
  • 7.­88
  • 7.­90
  • n.­24
  • n.­28
  • n.­30
  • n.­372
g.­137

“Come, monk” formula

Wylie:
  • dge slong tshur shog ces bya ba
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་ཚུར་ཤོག་ཅེས་བྱ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ehibhikṣukā

A formula for ordination that consists of the words, “Come, monk.” This is one of the ways of ordaining a man as monk and is said to have been used by the Buddha until he established the rules of the standard ordination ceremony.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­304
  • 2.­310
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­116
  • 9.­33
  • 9.­2530
g.­138

Conqueror

Wylie:
  • ’joms byed
Tibetan:
  • འཇོམས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A brahmin who is the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1279
  • n.­894
g.­139

Conqueror of Defilements

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs ’joms
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་འཇོམས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A self-awakened one.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2347
g.­140

continent of Jambu

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i gling
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་གླིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambudvīpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name of the southern continent in Buddhist cosmology, which can signify either the known human world, or more specifically the Indian subcontinent, literally “the jambu island/continent.” Jambu is the name used for a range of plum-like fruits from trees belonging to the genus Szygium, particularly Szygium jambos and Szygium cumini, and it has commonly been rendered “rose apple,” although “black plum” may be a less misleading term. Among various explanations given for the continent being so named, one (in the Abhidharmakośa) is that a jambu tree grows in its northern mountains beside Lake Anavatapta, mythically considered the source of the four great rivers of India, and that the continent is therefore named from the tree or the fruit. Jambudvīpa has the Vajrāsana at its center and is the only continent upon which buddhas attain awakening.

Located in 41 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­71
  • 2.­244
  • 2.­291
  • 2.­326
  • 2.­400
  • 3.­162-163
  • 3.­268
  • 4.­35
  • 9.­171
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­176
  • 9.­179
  • 9.­182
  • 9.­193
  • 9.­246-247
  • 9.­258
  • 9.­260
  • 9.­941-942
  • 9.­946-948
  • 9.­950-960
  • 9.­1257
  • 9.­1639-1641
  • 9.­1996
  • g.­396
g.­141

Cūḍapanthaka

Wylie:
  • lam phran bstan
Tibetan:
  • ལམ་ཕྲན་བསྟན།
Sanskrit:
  • cūḍapanthaka

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1947-1948
  • 9.­1956-1958
g.­142

Cūḍeśvara

Wylie:
  • gtsug gi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་གི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • cūḍeśvara

A garuḍa.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­32
  • 11.­36
g.­143

Daṇḍin

Wylie:
  • dbyug gu can
Tibetan:
  • དབྱུག་གུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍin

A brahmin.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­473-474
  • 9.­476
  • 9.­480
  • 9.­482-483
  • 9.­485
  • 9.­487
  • 9.­490
  • 9.­497
  • 9.­499-505
  • 9.­507-512
  • 9.­518
  • n.­696
  • n.­700
  • n.­705
g.­144

Dantapura

Wylie:
  • mche ba’i khyim
Tibetan:
  • མཆེ་བའི་ཁྱིམ།
Sanskrit:
  • dantapura

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1351
g.­145

Dārukarṇin

Wylie:
  • shing gi rna rgyan can
  • shing gi rna cha can
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་གི་རྣ་རྒྱན་ཅན།
  • ཤིང་གི་རྣ་ཆ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • dārukarṇin

Another name of Bhavila, a half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­109
  • 2.­237-242
  • 2.­248-249
  • 2.­260
  • 2.­283
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­317
g.­146

Deer Park

Wylie:
  • ri dags kyi nags
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་ཀྱི་ནགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgadāva

A park near Vārāṇasī where the Buddha gave the first sermon.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 3.­267
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2350
  • 9.­2408
g.­147

Delight

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1432
g.­148

Dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel par ’byung ba
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་པར་འབྱུང་བ།
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratītya­samutpāda

The relative nature of phenomena, which arises in dependence on causes and conditions. Together with the four truths of the noble ones, this was the first teaching given by the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­352
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­276
  • n.­164
g.­149

Devadatta

Wylie:
  • lha sbyin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • devadatta

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­3
  • 9.­988
  • 9.­2485
  • n.­232
  • n.­1039
  • n.­1068
g.­150

Devadṛśa

Wylie:
  • lhas bltas
Tibetan:
  • ལྷས་བལྟས།
Sanskrit:
  • devadṛśa

A city ruled by King Suprabuddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­3
  • n.­232
g.­151

Dhana

Wylie:
  • nor can
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhana

Another name of King North Pañcāla.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­534
  • 9.­538
  • 9.­551
  • 9.­567
  • 9.­580
  • 9.­617
  • 9.­711
  • n.­498
g.­152

Dhanapālaka

Wylie:
  • nor skyong
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhanapālaka

An elephant who was sent to kill the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­3
  • 10.­54-55
  • n.­1095-1096
g.­153

Dhanasaṃmata

Wylie:
  • nor ldan
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhanasaṃmata

A king at the time of the Buddha Ratnaśikhin.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­177
  • 3.­179-182
  • 3.­184
  • 3.­186
  • 3.­188
  • 3.­190
  • 3.­196-200
g.­154

Dhanika

Wylie:
  • nor can
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhanika

A householder.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2539-2540
  • 9.­2542
  • 9.­2544
  • 9.­2548-2551
  • 9.­2555-2558
  • 9.­2562-2564
  • 9.­2566-2567
  • 9.­2569
  • 9.­2573-2574
  • 9.­2580-2583
  • 9.­2595
g.­155

Dhānyapura

Wylie:
  • ’bras kyi grong khyer
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་ཀྱི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར།
Sanskrit:
  • dhānyapura

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­242
g.­156

Dharma

Wylie:
  • chos can
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma

One half of a two-headed bird, the half that was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­985-986
  • 9.­988
g.­157

Dharma Power

Wylie:
  • chos stobs
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa in Retuka.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­222
g.­158

Dharmākara

Wylie:
  • d+harmA ka ra
Tibetan:
  • དྷརྨཱ་ཀ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmākara

One of the translators of the Tibetan Vinayavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­6
g.­159

Dhṛtarāṣṭra

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhṛtarāṣṭra

(1) The name common to two of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda. (2) A buddha in the past. (3) One of the Four Great Kings. (4) A haṃsa.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 9.­1222
  • 9.­1350
  • 9.­1394
  • 9.­1420-1421
  • 9.­1506
  • 11.­12
  • 11.­16-17
  • 11.­24
  • 11.­36
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­160

dhyāna

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna

A kind of meditation, often enumerated in terms of increasingly more subtle states of concentration.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­278
  • 2.­286
  • 2.­413
  • 5.­11
  • 6.­106
  • 6.­108
  • 6.­110
  • 6.­112
  • 6.­114-115
  • 8.­277
  • 9.­152-153
  • 9.­876
  • 9.­1109
  • 9.­1239
  • 9.­1303-1308
  • 9.­1329
  • 9.­1496
  • 9.­1576
  • 9.­1590
  • 9.­2377
  • n.­290
  • n.­670
  • n.­955
g.­161

Dīpaṃkara

Wylie:
  • mar me mdzad
Tibetan:
  • མར་མེ་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • dīpaṃkara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1396
  • 9.­1424
  • 9.­1458
  • 9.­1506
g.­162

Diśāṃpati

Wylie:
  • phyogs bdag
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱོགས་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • diśāṃpati

A king in the past.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1281-1284
  • 9.­1287
  • 9.­1291
  • n.­896
g.­163

Diśikā

Wylie:
  • sdo phod ma
Tibetan:
  • སྡོ་ཕོད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • diśikā

A female slave of King Ikṣuvāku.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­33
g.­164

Divaukasa

Wylie:
  • lha gnas
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • divaukasa

A yakṣa, attendant of King Māndhātṛ.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­16
  • 9.­149
  • 9.­175
  • 9.­178
  • 9.­181
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­192
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­221
  • n.­634
g.­165

Dravya Mallaputra

Wylie:
  • gyad bu nor
Tibetan:
  • གྱད་བུ་ནོར།
Sanskrit:
  • dravya mallaputra

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2053-2054
  • 9.­2084-2086
  • g.­178
  • g.­377
g.­166

droṇa

Wylie:
  • bre
Tibetan:
  • བྲེ།
Sanskrit:
  • droṇa

A measure of volume.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­131
g.­167

Druma

Wylie:
  • ljon pa
Tibetan:
  • ལྗོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • druma

A kinnara king.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­583
  • 9.­694-695
  • 9.­702-705
  • 9.­707-708
  • 9.­710
  • n.­766
g.­168

Durāgata

Wylie:
  • nyes ’ongs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉེས་འོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • durāgata

The name of Svāgata, a disciple of the Buddha, before he meets the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1715
g.­169

Durmukha

Wylie:
  • bzhin ngan
Tibetan:
  • བཞིན་ངན།
Sanskrit:
  • durmukha

A ṛṣi.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­152
  • 9.­198
  • n.­626
g.­170

Earth

Wylie:
  • sa
Tibetan:
  • ས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

One of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1350
g.­171

Earth-Protector

Wylie:
  • sa ’tsho
Tibetan:
  • ས་འཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa. See also n.­439.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­250
g.­172

eightfold abstinence

Wylie:
  • yan lag brgyad dang ldan pa’i bsnyen gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་དང་ལྡན་པའི་བསྙེན་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Abstinence from killing, stealing, sexual intercourse, lying, drinking, adorning oneself with garlands and perfume and lying in a large bed, enjoying dance and music, and eating after noon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­33
  • 2.­38-39
g.­173

eightfold path of the noble ones

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i lam yan lag brgyad pa
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་ལམ་ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āryāṣṭāṅgo mārgaḥ

Part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­8
  • 4.­67
  • n.­188
  • n.­204
g.­174

Ekadhāraka

Wylie:
  • rgyud gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུད་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ekadhāraka

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
g.­175

element

Wylie:
  • khams
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhātu

One way of describing experience and the world in terms of eighteen elements (eye and form, ear and sound, nose and smell, tongue and taste, body and physical objects, and mind and mental phenomena, to which the six consciousnesses are added). Also refers here to the four elements of earth, water, fire, and wind.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­344
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­214
  • 3.­265
  • 6.­115
  • 7.­228
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­137
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­403
  • 9.­961
  • 9.­1723
  • 9.­2588
  • 10.­47
g.­176

Elephant Power

Wylie:
  • glang chen stobs
Tibetan:
  • གླང་ཆེན་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa. See also n.­395.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­200-202
  • 7.­204
g.­177

fat

Wylie:
  • tshil
Tibetan:
  • ཚིལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vasā

Fat of five kinds of animals, which is used as a medicine.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­24
  • 1.­26-34
  • 1.­36
  • 9.­619-620
g.­178

Fisherman

Wylie:
  • nya pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A merchant who was Dravya Mallaputra in a former life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2054
g.­179

five faculties

Wylie:
  • dbang po lnga
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcendriyāṇi

Part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening. In other contexts the term may refer to the five sense “faculties” corresponding to the five physical senses.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­8
  • 8.­84-85
  • 11.­155
g.­180

five powers

Wylie:
  • stobs lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañca balāni

Part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­8
g.­181

form realm

Wylie:
  • gzugs kyi khams
Tibetan:
  • གཟུགས་ཀྱི་ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • rūpadhātu

The second of the three realms where living beings transmigrate.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­59
  • 11.­63-64
  • g.­235
g.­182

formless realm

Wylie:
  • gzugs med pa’i khams
Tibetan:
  • གཟུགས་མེད་པའི་ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • ārūpyadhātu

The third and highest of the three realms where living beings transmigrate.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­59
  • 11.­63-64
g.­183

four applications of mindfulness

Wylie:
  • dran pa nye bar gzhag pa bzhi pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ་ཉེ་བར་གཞག་པ་བཞི་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāri smṛtyupasthānāni

The meditative application of awareness to the body, perception, mind, and dharmas; part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­8
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­17
  • 7.­47
  • 8.­87-88
  • n.­188
g.­184

four bases of magical power

Wylie:
  • rdzu ’phrul gyi rkang pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྫུ་འཕྲུལ་གྱི་རྐང་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāra ṛddhi­pādāḥ

Part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­8
g.­185

Four Great Kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāro mahārājāḥ

Divine guardians of the four directions, namely, Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Virūḍhaka, Virūpākṣa, and Vaiśravaṇa. Also referred to as the Four Protectors of the World.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­170
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­215
  • 9.­222
  • 9.­224
  • 9.­1238
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­30
  • n.­153
  • n.­329
  • n.­645
  • n.­1134
  • g.­159
  • g.­187
  • g.­206
  • g.­666
  • g.­667
  • g.­701
  • g.­731
  • g.­732
g.­186

four kinds of human success

Wylie:
  • mi’i ’byor pa rnam bzhi
  • mi rnams kyi ’byor pa rnam pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • མིའི་འབྱོར་པ་རྣམ་བཞི།
  • མི་རྣམས་ཀྱི་འབྱོར་པ་རྣམ་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catasro mānuṣika ṛddhayaḥ

Long life, beauty, health, and being loved.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­249
  • 9.­275
  • 9.­277
  • 9.­305
  • n.­674
g.­187

Four Protectors of the World

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten skyong ba bzhi
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་སྐྱོང་བ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāraḥ loka­pālāḥ

Four deities guarding the four quarters, namely, Dhṛtarāṣṭra in the east, Virūḍhaka in the south, Virūpākṣa in the west, and Vaiśravaṇa in the north. Also referred to as the Four Great Kings.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­276
  • 3.­302
  • 8.­266-267
  • 11.­4-5
  • 11.­34-36
  • g.­185
g.­188

four pure abodes

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i gnas pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་གནས་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāro brahma­vihārāḥ

Immeasurable love, compassion, joy, and equanimity.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­1750
  • 9.­2237
  • 9.­2253
  • 11.­151
  • n.­199
  • n.­887
g.­189

four right relinquishments

Wylie:
  • yang dag par spong ba bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་སྤོང་བ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāri samyak­prahāṇāni

Part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­8
g.­190

four truths of the noble ones

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i bden pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་བདེན་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturāryasatya

The Buddha’s first teaching, which explains suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the path to the cessation of suffering.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­293
  • 2.­296
  • 2.­332
  • 3.­77-78
  • 3.­227
  • 6.­174
  • 6.­253
  • 6.­272
  • 7.­182
  • 8.­101
  • 8.­264
  • 8.­282
  • 9.­24
  • 9.­31
  • 9.­2581
  • 10.­85
  • 10.­91
  • 11.­37
  • g.­148
g.­191

four types of self-confidence

Wylie:
  • mi ’jigs pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཇིགས་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catvāri vaiśāradyāni

The Buddha’s four kinds of self-confidence in preaching the Dharma.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­22
g.­192

Free from the Cycle

Wylie:
  • ’khor bral
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The wife of the brahmin Agnidatta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
g.­193

fruit of stream-entry

Wylie:
  • rgyun du zhugs pa’i ’bras bu
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་དུ་ཞུགས་པའི་འབྲས་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • srotāpatti­phala

The first of the four spiritual achievements, which is considered to be entering “the stream” of the noble ones that flows inexorably toward awakening.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­293
  • 2.­296
  • 2.­315
  • 2.­332
  • 3.­227
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­111
  • 6.­253
  • 6.­272
  • 6.­294
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­182
  • 8.­101
  • 8.­264
  • 8.­282
  • 9.­24
  • 9.­31
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­316
  • 9.­318
  • 9.­329
  • 9.­2581
  • 10.­91
  • 10.­98
  • 11.­57-58
  • n.­543
g.­194

Gāndhāra

Wylie:
  • sa ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ས་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • gāndhāra

A country.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­170
g.­195

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 9.­570
  • 9.­1136
  • 11.­12
  • 11.­17
  • 11.­81
  • n.­718
g.­196

Gaṅgāpāla

Wylie:
  • gang gA skyong
Tibetan:
  • གང་གཱ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgāpāla

A rich man who was Upālin in a former life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2238
g.­197

Ganges

Wylie:
  • chu bo gang gA
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་བོ་གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­53
  • 3.­105-106
  • 3.­134-135
  • 3.­139
  • 3.­166
  • 3.­181-183
  • 7.­81
  • 8.­227
  • 8.­241
  • 8.­243
  • 8.­264
  • 8.­280
  • 8.­287-288
  • 8.­290-291
  • 8.­300-301
  • 9.­35
  • 9.­1529
  • n.­114
  • n.­145
  • n.­251
  • g.­28
  • g.­87
  • g.­134
g.­198

Gardabha

Wylie:
  • bong bu
Tibetan:
  • བོང་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • gardabha

A yakṣa. See also 8.­67 and n.­474.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­66-73
  • 8.­76
g.­199

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­375
  • 2.­377
  • 3.­22
  • 9.­565
  • 9.­593
  • 11.­32-36
  • g.­61
  • g.­142
g.­200

Gautama

Wylie:
  • gau ta ma
Tibetan:
  • གཽ་ཏ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gautama

(1) Family name of the Buddha Śākyamuni. (2) A nāga king.

Located in 159 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­201
  • 2.­277
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320
  • 2.­322
  • 3.­35-36
  • 3.­60-61
  • 3.­74
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­100
  • 3.­105
  • 4.­74
  • 4.­81
  • 6.­3
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­18-19
  • 6.­21
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­27
  • 6.­32
  • 6.­37-38
  • 6.­41-48
  • 6.­53
  • 6.­56
  • 6.­136
  • 6.­140-145
  • 6.­147-148
  • 6.­151
  • 6.­155
  • 6.­157-161
  • 6.­167-171
  • 6.­180
  • 6.­182
  • 6.­186
  • 6.­190-192
  • 6.­196-199
  • 6.­201
  • 6.­203
  • 6.­205-206
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­213
  • 6.­215-216
  • 6.­219-220
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­229-231
  • 6.­233
  • 6.­236
  • 6.­271
  • 6.­282-284
  • 6.­286-289
  • 6.­292
  • 7.­162-163
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­170
  • 7.­172
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­176
  • 7.­178
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­33
  • 8.­62-64
  • 8.­83-84
  • 8.­86-92
  • 8.­113-114
  • 8.­120-121
  • 8.­123
  • 8.­134
  • 8.­192
  • 9.­21
  • 9.­42
  • 9.­1508
  • 9.­1510
  • 9.­1512-1516
  • 9.­1721-1722
  • 9.­1763
  • 9.­1820
  • 9.­2522-2524
  • 9.­2526-2528
  • 10.­68
  • 10.­71
  • 10.­82-83
  • 10.­89
  • 10.­95
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­92
  • 11.­128
  • 11.­163
  • 11.­166
  • n.­295
  • n.­481
g.­201

Gayā-Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ga yA ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ག་ཡཱ་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gayā-kāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1822-1824
  • n.­987
g.­202

Gayāśīrṣa

Wylie:
  • ga yA mgo
Tibetan:
  • ག་ཡཱ་མགོ
Sanskrit:
  • gayāśīrṣa

A mountain.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1820
g.­203

Giri

Wylie:
  • ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • giri

A nāga king.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­356-357
  • 2.­360
  • 2.­364
  • 2.­375
  • 2.­379
  • n.­128
g.­204

Godānīya

Wylie:
  • ba lang spyod
Tibetan:
  • བ་ལང་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • godānīya

A continent in the west.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­178-180
  • 9.­182
  • 9.­193
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­258
  • n.­629
g.­205

(gods) attendant on Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs ris
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika

A class of gods who inhabit the first heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 3.­22
  • 4.­19
  • 9.­1311
g.­206

(gods) attendant on the Four Great Kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal chen bzhi’i ris
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་ཆེན་བཞིའི་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • cātur­mahā­rājika

A class of gods who inhabit the lowest among the six heavens of the desire realm, the dwelling place of the Four Great Kings.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 3.­110
  • 3.­224-225
  • 4.­19
  • 8.­80
  • 8.­249
  • 8.­263
  • 8.­267
  • 8.­278
  • 8.­281-282
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­214
  • 9.­216
  • 10.­78-79
g.­207

Gopālaka

Wylie:
  • ba lang skyong
Tibetan:
  • བ་ལང་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gopālaka

A nāga.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­249
g.­208

Gośālaka

Wylie:
  • gnag lhas can
Tibetan:
  • གནག་ལྷས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • gośālaka

A country.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­91
g.­209

gośīrṣacandana

Wylie:
  • tsan dan sa mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན་ས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • gośīrṣacandana

A kind of sandalwood.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­153-154
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­158
  • 2.­160-161
  • 2.­163
  • 2.­242-244
  • 2.­256
  • 2.­258-261
  • 3.­12
  • 7.­164
  • 7.­167
  • 9.­1450
g.­210

Govinda

Wylie:
  • gnag lhas skyes
Tibetan:
  • གནག་ལྷས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • govinda

A brahmin.

Located in 43 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1281-1293
  • 9.­1295-1300
  • 9.­1302-1303
  • 9.­1308
  • 9.­1311-1313
  • 9.­1325-1326
  • 9.­1330
  • 9.­1348-1349
  • 9.­1352-1353
  • 9.­1495
  • n.­882
  • n.­887
  • n.­894
  • n.­898
  • g.­105
  • g.­159
  • g.­170
  • g.­526
  • g.­582
  • g.­737
g.­211

Gṛdhrakūṭa

Wylie:
  • bya rgod kyi phung po
Tibetan:
  • བྱ་རྒོད་ཀྱི་ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gṛdhrakūṭa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gṛdhra­kūṭa, literally Vulture Peak, was a hill located in the kingdom of Magadha, in the vicinity of the ancient city of Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir, in the state of Bihar, India), where the Buddha bestowed many sūtras, especially the Great Vehicle teachings, such as the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras. It continues to be a sacred pilgrimage site for Buddhists to this day.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1531-1532
  • 9.­1538
g.­212

Great Cup

Wylie:
  • phor chen
Tibetan:
  • ཕོར་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­223
g.­213

Great Lotus

Wylie:
  • pad ma ltar gas pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ལྟར་གས་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpadma

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­214

Great Scream

Wylie:
  • ngu ’bod chen po
Tibetan:
  • ངུ་འབོད་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāraurava

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­215

Group of Six monks

Wylie:
  • drug sde’i dge slong dag
Tibetan:
  • དྲུག་སྡེའི་དགེ་སློང་དག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣadvargikā bhikṣavaḥ

Six ill-behaved monks whose conduct often causes the Buddha’s establishment of new rules: Nanda, Upananda, Punarvasu, Chanda, Aśvaka, and Udāyin.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­27
  • 2.­29
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­89
g.­216

Grown Rice

Wylie:
  • ’bras ’phel dag
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་འཕེལ་དག
Sanskrit:
  • —

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1431
g.­217

guḍa

Wylie:
  • bu ram
Tibetan:
  • བུ་རམ།
Sanskrit:
  • guḍa

Thickened sugarcane juice, which is the same as phāṇita.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83-85
  • 1.­91
  • 2.­134
  • 9.­1439
  • 9.­2010-2011
  • 9.­2014
  • 9.­2018-2022
  • 9.­2524-2528
  • 9.­2531
  • 10.­101
  • 10.­107
  • 10.­110
  • 10.­112
  • 10.­114
  • n.­35
  • n.­1074
  • n.­1103
g.­218

guḍakhādanika

Wylie:
  • bca’ ba bu ram
Tibetan:
  • བཅའ་བ་བུ་རམ།
Sanskrit:
  • guḍakhādanika

A type of solid sugar.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­86-89
  • n.­36-37
g.­219

guḍakhādanīya

Wylie:
  • bca’ ba bu ram
Tibetan:
  • བཅའ་བ་བུ་རམ།
Sanskrit:
  • guḍakhādanīya

A type of solid sugar.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­92-95
  • n.­37
g.­220

Guṃjika

Wylie:
  • sgra sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṃjika

(1) A yakṣa in Kashmir; see also n.­396. (2) A ṛṣi.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­202
g.­221

Guṃjika

Wylie:
  • sgra sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṃjikāvasatha

Refers to rṣi Guṃjika’s abode, a place near Nādikā, a village in the country of Vṛji.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­28
g.­222

Gupta

Wylie:
  • sbas pa
Tibetan:
  • སྦས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • gupta

A perfumer, the father of Upagupta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­6
  • n.­769
g.­223

Hahava

Wylie:
  • kyi hud zer ba
Tibetan:
  • ཀྱི་ཧུད་ཟེར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • hahava

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­224

Hail

Wylie:
  • ser ba
Tibetan:
  • སེར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The daughter of the brahmin Agnidatta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
g.­225

haṃsa

Wylie:
  • ngang pa
Tibetan:
  • ངང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • haṃsa

A kind of bird, which is identified with the swan or goose.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 3.­126-127
  • 8.­280
  • 8.­283-286
  • 8.­303
  • 9.­35
  • 9.­535
  • 9.­544
  • 9.­581
  • 9.­723
  • 9.­1120
  • 9.­1222-1223
  • 9.­1225-1232
  • 9.­1234
  • 10.­124
  • n.­582
  • n.­710
  • g.­159
  • g.­511
  • g.­513
g.­226

Hari

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • hari

An epithet of Viṣṇu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­247
g.­227

Hasanī

Wylie:
  • dgod pa
Tibetan:
  • དགོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • hasanī

A river.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-639
  • 9.­685-687
g.­228

hasta

Wylie:
  • khru
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • hasta

A measure of length from the elbow to the tip of the middle finger.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­636
  • 9.­684
  • 9.­1414
g.­229

Hastināpura

Wylie:
  • glang po’i khyim gyi grong khyer
  • glang po che’i grong rdal
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོའི་ཁྱིམ་གྱི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར།
  • གླང་པོ་ཆེའི་གྲོང་རྡལ།
Sanskrit:
  • hastināpura

A city.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­147
  • 9.­534
  • 9.­549
  • 9.­596
  • 9.­642
  • 9.­711-712
g.­230

Hastiniyaṃsa

Wylie:
  • glang po che’i thal gong
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ་ཆེའི་ཐལ་གོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • hastiniyaṃsa

A son of King Ikṣuvāku.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­28
g.­231

Hastipāla

Wylie:
  • glang po skyong
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • hastipāla

A teacher.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1279
  • n.­894
g.­232

Having a Shaved Head and Water Jar

Wylie:
  • mgo reg dang ril ba spyi blugs can
Tibetan:
  • མགོ་རེག་དང་རིལ་བ་སྤྱི་བླུགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A ṛṣi. See also n.­417

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­224
g.­233

Heaped Up

Wylie:
  • spungs pa can
Tibetan:
  • སྤུངས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A city or village.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­216
  • 7.­220-221
  • g.­66
g.­234

Heat

Wylie:
  • tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • ཚ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • tāpana

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1731
  • 9.­1938
g.­235

Heaven of Pure Abode

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa

The name given to the five highest levels of existence within the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1213
g.­236

hemorrhoids

Wylie:
  • gzhang ’brum
Tibetan:
  • གཞང་འབྲུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­49
  • 2.­67
  • n.­50
g.­237

Hetu

Wylie:
  • rgyu can
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • hetu

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2175-2176
  • 9.­2207-2209
  • 9.­2504
g.­238

Himalaya

Wylie:
  • gangs can
  • gangs kyi ri bo
Tibetan:
  • གངས་ཅན།
  • གངས་ཀྱི་རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • himavat

The Himalayas.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­243
  • 6.­28-29
  • 9.­252
  • 9.­631
  • 9.­677
  • 9.­679
  • 11.­230
  • n.­745
g.­239

Hiteṣin

Wylie:
  • phan par bzhed mdzad pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕན་པར་བཞེད་མཛད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • hiteṣin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1416
  • 9.­1506
g.­240

Huhuva

Wylie:
  • a chu zer ba
  • a cu zer ba
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་ཆུ་ཟེར་བ།
  • ཨ་ཅུ་ཟེར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • huhuva

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­241

Huluḍa

Wylie:
  • hu lu du
Tibetan:
  • ཧུ་ལུ་དུ།
Sanskrit:
  • huluḍa

A nāga.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­239
  • n.­429
g.­242

hungry ghost

Wylie:
  • yi dags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 3.­227
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­111
  • 8.­282
  • 8.­287
  • 8.­289-290
  • 8.­292-294
  • 8.­297-298
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­2511
  • 9.­2516
  • 9.­2519
  • n.­545
  • n.­549
g.­243

Icchānaṅgalā

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa mthun pa
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པ་མཐུན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • icchānaṅgalā

A village.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­162-163
  • n.­243
  • n.­314
  • n.­357
  • g.­244
g.­244

Icchānaṅgalā Forest

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa mthun pa’i nags khrod
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པ་མཐུན་པའི་ནགས་ཁྲོད།
Sanskrit:
  • icchānaṅgalaṃ vanaṣaṇḍam

A forest near the village Icchānaṅgalā.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­11-12
  • n.­243
g.­245

Ikṣuvāku

Wylie:
  • bu ram shing skyes
Tibetan:
  • བུ་རམ་ཤིང་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • ikṣuvāku

A king who was an ancestor of the Śākyans.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­28
  • 6.­30-31
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­39
  • n.­250
  • n.­252
  • g.­163
  • g.­230
  • g.­293
  • g.­452
  • g.­680
g.­246

Incessant

Wylie:
  • mnar med pa
Tibetan:
  • མནར་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • avīci

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 2.­71
  • 4.­18
g.­247

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

(1) A god, also known as “Śakra.” (2) A brahmin. (3) A buddha in the past.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­247
  • 2.­306
  • 3.­262
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­276
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­302
  • 7.­161-162
  • 7.­164-165
  • 7.­167-168
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­592
  • 9.­827
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­40
  • n.­625
  • n.­787
  • n.­930
  • g.­15
  • g.­390
  • g.­432
  • g.­542
  • g.­552
  • g.­688
g.­248

Indradamana

Wylie:
  • dbang po ’dul ba
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་འདུལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • indradamana

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1454
  • 9.­1506
g.­249

Indradhvaja

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • indradhvaja

A buddha in the past.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1396
  • 9.­1457-1458
  • 9.­1499
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­907
g.­250

Indus

Wylie:
  • sin du
Tibetan:
  • སིན་དུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sindhu

A river.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­17
  • 7.­223
  • 9.­1529
g.­251

Intense Heat

Wylie:
  • rab tsha ba
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཚ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratāpana

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1693
  • 9.­1731
  • 9.­2032
  • 9.­2484
  • 9.­2489
g.­252

Īṣādhāra

Wylie:
  • gshol mda’ ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • གཤོལ་མདའ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • īṣādhāra

One of the seven golden mountains.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-196
  • n.­632
g.­253

Īśāna

Wylie:
  • dbang bdag
Tibetan:
  • དབང་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • īśāna

An epithet of Śiva.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­276
  • 3.­302
g.­254

Jājvalin

Wylie:
  • rab ’ba’
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འབའ།
Sanskrit:
  • jājvalin

A brahmin who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1496
g.­255

Jālinī

Wylie:
  • dra ba can
Tibetan:
  • དྲ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • jālinī

The daughter of Prince Viśvantara.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­748
  • 9.­830
  • 9.­845
  • 9.­876
  • 9.­888
  • 9.­898
  • 9.­907
  • n.­785
g.­256

Jalūkā

Wylie:
  • srin bu pad pa
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་བུ་པད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • jalūkā

A forest.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­198
g.­257

Jamadagni

Wylie:
  • me ’bar
Tibetan:
  • མེ་འབར།
Sanskrit:
  • jamadagni

A ṛṣi in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­141
g.­258

Jambū River

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i chu bo
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་ཆུ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jambū

A river.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­51
  • 9.­53
  • 9.­55
  • 9.­57
  • 9.­59
  • 9.­61
  • 9.­63
  • n.­595
g.­259

Jaṅghā

Wylie:
  • byin pa can
Tibetan:
  • བྱིན་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • jaṅghā

A short form of Jaṅghākāśyapa, a disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1944
g.­260

Jaṅghākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung byin pa can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་བྱིན་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • jaṅghākāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1932-1933
  • 9.­1945
  • 9.­1947
  • n.­977
  • g.­259
g.­261

Janmacitra

Wylie:
  • skye ba sna tshogs pa
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་བ་སྣ་ཚོགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • janmacitra

A nāga.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­535
  • 9.­544
  • 9.­546-551
  • 9.­553-554
  • 9.­563-566
g.­262

jātaka

Wylie:
  • skyes rabs
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེས་རབས།
Sanskrit:
  • jātaka

A story of one of the Buddha’ s former lives.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1494
  • 11.­148
  • n.­875
  • n.­877
  • n.­879
  • n.­881
  • n.­1096
g.­263

Jetavana

Wylie:
  • rgyal bu rgyal byed kyi tshal
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བུ་རྒྱལ་བྱེད་ཀྱི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jetavana

See “Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­53
  • 2.­91
  • 2.­267
  • 2.­269
  • 2.­293
  • 2.­298-299
  • 2.­339
  • 9.­74
  • 9.­1516-1517
  • 10.­54
g.­264

Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park

Wylie:
  • rgyal bu rgyal byed kyi tshal mgon med zas sbyin gyi kun dga’ ra ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བུ་རྒྱལ་བྱེད་ཀྱི་ཚལ་མགོན་མེད་ཟས་སྦྱིན་གྱི་ཀུན་དགའ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jetavanam anāthapiṇḍadasyārāmaḥ AO

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the first Buddhist monasteries, located in a park outside Śrāvastī, the capital of the ancient kingdom of Kośala in northern India. This park was originally owned by Prince Jeta, hence the name Jetavana, meaning Jeta’s grove. The wealthy merchant Anāthapiṇḍada, wishing to offer it to the Buddha, sought to buy it from him, but the prince, not wishing to sell, said he would only do so if Anāthapiṇḍada covered the entire property with gold coins. Anāthapiṇḍada agreed, and managed to cover all of the park except the entrance, hence the name Anāthapiṇḍadasyārāmaḥ, meaning Anāthapiṇḍada’s park. The place is usually referred to in the sūtras as “Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s park,” and according to the Saṃghabhedavastu the Buddha used Prince Jeta’s name in first place because that was Prince Jeta’s own unspoken wish while Anāthapiṇḍada was offering the park. Inspired by the occasion and the Buddha’s use of his name, Prince Jeta then offered the rest of the property and had an entrance gate built. The Buddha specifically instructed those who recite the sūtras to use Prince Jeta’s name in first place to commemorate the mutual effort of both benefactors.

Anāthapiṇḍada built residences for the monks, to house them during the monsoon season, thus creating the first Buddhist monastery. It was one of the Buddha’s main residences, where he spent around nineteen rainy season retreats, and it was therefore the setting for many of the Buddha’s discourses and events. According to the travel accounts of Chinese monks, it was still in use as a Buddhist monastery in the early fifth century ᴄᴇ, but by the sixth century it had been reduced to ruins.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­45-46
  • 2.­202
  • 3.­6
  • 6.­238
  • 7.­65
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­1508
  • 10.­53
  • g.­263
g.­265

Jitāri

Wylie:
  • dgra thul
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་ཐུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jitāri

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1470
  • 9.­1506
g.­266

Jīvaka

Wylie:
  • ’tsho byed
Tibetan:
  • འཚོ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • jīvaka

The physician of King Bimbisāra.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­41-44
  • 9.­2020
g.­267

Jujjuka

Wylie:
  • ngan to re
Tibetan:
  • ངན་ཏོ་རེ།
Sanskrit:
  • jujjuka

A brahmin. See also n.­809.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­877-878
  • 9.­880
  • 9.­884-885
  • 9.­888
  • n.­809
g.­268

Jyotis

Wylie:
  • skar ’od
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotis
  • jyotiṣprabha

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1472
  • 9.­1506
g.­269

Jyotiṣka

Wylie:
  • me skyes
Tibetan:
  • མེ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotiṣka

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1841-1842
  • 9.­1873-1875
  • g.­26
g.­270

Jyotiṣpāla

Wylie:
  • me gso
Tibetan:
  • མེ་གསོ།
Sanskrit:
  • jyotiṣpāla

A brahmin youth who was the Buddha in a former life and later named Mahāgovinda.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1281
  • 9.­1286-1288
g.­271

Kacaṅgalā

Wylie:
  • ka tsang ga la
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཙང་ག་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kacaṅgalā

A woman who was the Buddha’s mother in a former life.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­95-97
  • 8.­101
  • 8.­105
  • 8.­107-109
  • n.­486
  • n.­489
  • n.­492
g.­272

Kaḍaṅgara

Wylie:
  • lhag par brtson
Tibetan:
  • ལྷག་པར་བརྩོན།
Sanskrit:
  • kaḍaṅgara

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­273

Kaineya

Wylie:
  • ke na’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཀེ་ནའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaineya

A ṛṣi.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­3-6
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­37
  • 11.­39
  • 11.­43-46
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­52
  • 11.­54-55
  • 11.­66-68
  • 11.­71
  • 11.­112-113
  • 11.­188
  • n.­302
  • n.­305
  • n.­1123
  • n.­1150
  • g.­548
g.­274

Kakutsunda

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba ’jig pa
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ་འཇིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kakutsunda

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1483
g.­275

Kāla

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāla

Another name of Kāla Mṛgāraputra, a disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2009
g.­276

Kāla

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāla

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­199
g.­277

Kāla Mṛgāraputra

Wylie:
  • ri dags ’dzin gyi bu nag po
  • ri dags ’dzin bu nag po
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་གྱི་བུ་ནག་པོ།
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་བུ་ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāla mṛgāraputra

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2009-2010
  • 9.­2019
  • 9.­2024-2025
  • g.­275
  • g.­414
g.­278

Kalandaka­nivāpa

Wylie:
  • ka lan da ka gnas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ལན་ད་ཀ་གནས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalandaka­nivāpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A place where the Buddha often resided, within the Bamboo Park (Veṇuvana) outside Rajagṛha that had been donated to him. The name is said to have arisen when, one day, King Bimbisāra fell asleep after a romantic liaison in the Bamboo Park. While the king rested, his consort wandered off. A snake (the reincarnation of the park’s previous owner, who still resented the king’s acquisition of the park) approached with malign intentions. Through the king’s tremendous merit, a gathering of kalandaka‍—crows or other birds according to Tibetan renderings, but some Sanskrit and Pali sources suggest flying squirrels‍—miraculously appeared and began squawking. Their clamor alerted the king’s consort to the danger, who rushed back and hacked the snake to pieces, thereby saving the king’s life. King Bimbisāra then named the spot Kalandakanivāpa (“Kalandakas’ Feeding Ground”), sometimes (though not in the Vinayavastu) given as Kalandakanivāsa (“Kalandakas’ Abode”) in their honor. The story is told in the Saṃghabhedavastu (Toh 1, ch.17, Degé Kangyur vol.4, folio 77.b et seq.). For more details and other origin stories, see the 84000 Knowledge Base article Veṇuvana and Kalandakanivāpa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­40-41
  • 3.­2
  • n.­44
  • n.­935
g.­279

Kaliṅga

Wylie:
  • ka ling ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ལིང་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kaliṅga

A country.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­170
  • 6.­78
  • 8.­172
  • 9.­290
  • 9.­313
  • 9.­413
  • 9.­416
  • 9.­1351
g.­280

Kalmāṣadamya

Wylie:
  • khra bo ’dul
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲ་བོ་འདུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalmāṣadamya

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­2
g.­281

Kāmarūpin

Wylie:
  • ’dod dgur sgyur ba’i gzugs can
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་དགུར་སྒྱུར་བའི་གཟུགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kāmarūpin

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
g.­282

Kāmeśvara

Wylie:
  • ’dod pa’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • འདོད་པའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • kāmeśvara

An epithet of a Hindu god, Kubera.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­273
  • 3.­299
g.­283

Kanakamuni

Wylie:
  • gser thub
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་ཐུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakamuni

A buddha in the past.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­10
  • 5.­12-13
  • 9.­1484
  • 9.­1506
g.­284

Kaniṣka

Wylie:
  • ka nis ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ནིས་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kaniṣka

A king of the Kushan empire in the second century ᴄᴇ.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­267
  • n.­446-447
g.­285

Kaṇṭakasthala Forest

Wylie:
  • gnas tsher ma can gyi nags
Tibetan:
  • གནས་ཚེར་མ་ཅན་གྱི་ནགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kaṇṭakasthala­mṛga­dāva

A forest in Sunrise in Kosala. See also n.­318

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­179-180
g.­286

Kanthā

Wylie:
  • yul gan tha
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་གན་ཐ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanthā

A country in the northern region.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­241
g.­287

Kanthaka

Wylie:
  • bsngags ldan
Tibetan:
  • བསྔགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • kanthaka

A horse of the Bodhisattva.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­90
  • n.­213
g.­288

Kanthaka’s Return

Wylie:
  • bsngags ldan slar btang ba
Tibetan:
  • བསྔགས་ལྡན་སླར་བཏང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A shrine built to commemorate the Buddha’s going forth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­90
g.­289

Kāṇvāyana

Wylie:
  • mig mi ’dzums kyi bu
  • mig ’dzums kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་འཛུམས་ཀྱི་བུ།
  • མིག་འཛུམས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kāṇvāyana

The descendants of the ṛṣi Kaṇva.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­23
  • 6.­34-35
  • 6.­37
g.­290

kaparda

Wylie:
  • ’gron bu
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོན་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaparda

A shell used as a coin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1682
g.­291

Kapila

Wylie:
  • ser skya
Tibetan:
  • སེར་སྐྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kapila

A ṛṣi.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­28
  • n.­252
g.­292

Kapilavastu

Wylie:
  • ser skye’i gnas
  • ser skya’i gnas
  • ser skya’i gzhi
Tibetan:
  • སེར་སྐྱེའི་གནས།
  • སེར་སྐྱའི་གནས།
  • སེར་སྐྱའི་གཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • kapilavastu

The city of the Śākyans.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­5
  • 6.­19-20
  • 6.­276
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1968
  • 9.­2219
  • 9.­2257
  • 10.­84
g.­293

Karakarṇī

Wylie:
  • lag rna
Tibetan:
  • ལག་རྣ།
Sanskrit:
  • karakarṇī

A son of King Ikṣuvāku.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­28
g.­294

Karkaṭaka

Wylie:
  • brtan pa
Tibetan:
  • བརྟན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • karkaṭaka

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­295

Kārṣaka

Wylie:
  • zhing pa
Tibetan:
  • ཞིང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kārṣaka

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­11
g.­296

kārṣāpaṇa

Wylie:
  • kAr ShA pa Na
Tibetan:
  • ཀཱར་ཥཱ་པ་ཎ།
Sanskrit:
  • kārṣāpaṇa

A coin.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­101
  • 2.­149
  • 2.­153-154
  • 2.­157-158
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­260
  • 9.­171-172
  • 9.­250
  • 9.­2368-2369
  • 10.­83
  • 10.­86
  • 10.­89-91
  • 10.­93
  • 10.­103-104
  • 10.­106
  • 11.­198
  • 11.­202
  • n.­657
g.­297

Kāśi

Wylie:
  • ka shi
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཤི།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśi

A country or a city named the same.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­76
  • 2.­130-132
  • 4.­88
  • 9.­313
  • 9.­1004
  • 9.­1033
  • 9.­1352
  • 9.­1639
  • 9.­1876
  • 9.­2044
  • 9.­2408
  • 11.­189
  • n.­1124
  • g.­105
  • g.­712
g.­298

Kaśmīra

Wylie:
  • kha che
Tibetan:
  • ཁ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • kaśmīra

A country.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­202
  • 7.­239
  • n.­429
g.­299

Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’drob skyong gi bu
  • ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • འདྲོབ་སྐྱོང་གི་བུ།
  • འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśyapa

(1) A ṛṣi in the past (’drob skyong gi bu). (2) A ṛṣi (’od srung). (3) A buddha in the past (’od srung). (4) Another name of Mahākāśyapa (’od srung).

Located in 87 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­346
  • 2.­349
  • 3.­173
  • 3.­267-270
  • 6.­141
  • 8.­82
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­276-278
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296-298
  • 9.­38-40
  • 9.­43-48
  • 9.­86-87
  • 9.­260
  • 9.­1398
  • 9.­1485
  • 9.­1487
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1580
  • 9.­1589
  • 9.­1595-1596
  • 9.­1768
  • 9.­1815
  • 9.­1877
  • 9.­1944
  • 9.­1959
  • 9.­2045
  • 9.­2141
  • 9.­2210-2211
  • 9.­2224
  • 9.­2391
  • 9.­2393
  • 9.­2395-2397
  • 9.­2400
  • 9.­2402-2413
  • 9.­2416
  • 9.­2418-2419
  • 9.­2422
  • 9.­2424-2425
  • 9.­2428
  • 9.­2431-2433
  • 11.­24
  • 11.­32-36
  • n.­584
  • n.­908
  • n.­958
  • n.­1000
  • g.­675
g.­300

Kātyarṣabha

Wylie:
  • brtson pa’i khyu mchog
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་པའི་ཁྱུ་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • kātyarṣabha

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­301

Kauṇḍinya

Wylie:
  • kauN+Di n+ya
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽཎྜི་ནྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kauṇḍinya

(1) A buddha in the past. (2) A disciple of the Buddha. (3) The name of a brahmin family.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1409
  • 9.­1417
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2209-2210
  • 9.­2219
  • 9.­2225-2227
  • 9.­2504
g.­302

Kauravya

Wylie:
  • kau rab bya
  • byed ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་རབ་བྱ།
  • བྱེད་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • kauravya

(1) The king of the country of Kuru. (2) A king in the past.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­93-98
  • 7.­100
  • 7.­110
  • 7.­146
  • 9.­1257
  • 9.­1881
g.­303

Kauśika

Wylie:
  • kau shi ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་ཤི་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kauśika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

“One who belongs to the Kuśika lineage.” An epithet of the god Śakra, also known as Indra, the king of the gods in the Trāyastriṃśa heaven. In the Ṛgveda, Indra is addressed by the epithet Kauśika, with the implication that he is associated with the descendants of the Kuśika lineage (gotra) as their aiding deity. In later epic and Purāṇic texts, we find the story that Indra took birth as Gādhi Kauśika, the son of Kuśika and one of the Vedic poet-seers, after the Puru king Kuśika had performed austerities for one thousand years to obtain a son equal to Indra who could not be killed by others. In the Pāli Kusajātaka (Jāt V 141–45), the Buddha, in one of his former bodhisattva lives as a Trāyastriṃśa god, takes birth as the future king Kusa upon the request of Indra, who wishes to help the childless king of the Mallas, Okkaka, and his chief queen Sīlavatī. This story is also referred to by Nāgasena in the Milindapañha.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­147
  • 3.­151-152
  • 3.­159
  • 4.­50-51
  • 4.­54
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­239
  • 9.­338
  • 9.­445-446
  • 9.­449
  • 9.­906
g.­304

Ketu

Wylie:
  • tog
Tibetan:
  • ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • ketu

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1473
  • 9.­1506
g.­305

Khadiraka

Wylie:
  • seng ldeng can
Tibetan:
  • སེང་ལྡེང་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • khadiraka

One of the seven golden mountains.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-196
  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
  • n.­632
g.­306

khaṇḍa

Wylie:
  • hwags
Tibetan:
  • ཧྭགས།
Sanskrit:
  • khaṇḍa

A kind of sugar.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­101
  • n.­1103
g.­307

Kharjūrikā

Wylie:
  • ’bra go can
Tibetan:
  • འབྲ་གོ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kharjūrikā

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­266
g.­308

Kimpila

Wylie:
  • kim pi la
Tibetan:
  • ཀིམ་པི་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kimpila

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­3-4
g.­309

Kimpilā

Wylie:
  • kim pi la
Tibetan:
  • ཀིམ་པི་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kimpilā

(1) A village. (2) A forest near the village of Kimpilā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­2
g.­310

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi ma yin pa
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མི་མ་ཡིན་པ།
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “is that human?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status. Kinnaras are mythological beings found in both Buddhist and Brahmanical literature, where they are portrayed as creatures half human, half animal. They are often depicted as highly skilled celestial musicians.

In this text:

See also n.­728.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­583
  • 9.­619-620
  • 9.­641
  • 9.­689
  • 9.­694-695
  • 9.­702-704
  • 9.­707-708
  • 9.­710-711
  • n.­728
  • n.­739
  • n.­767
  • g.­167
  • g.­311
g.­311

kinnarī

Wylie:
  • mi’am ci mo
Tibetan:
  • མིའམ་ཅི་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnarī

A class of semidivine beings, whose male counterpart is the kinnara. They resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “Is that a man?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­583-585
  • 9.­592
  • 9.­621
  • 9.­627
  • 9.­629
  • 9.­638
  • 9.­686
  • 9.­694
  • 9.­697-698
  • 9.­702
  • 9.­704
  • 9.­706-707
  • 9.­1494
  • 11.­117
  • g.­383
g.­312

Kolita

Wylie:
  • pang nas skyes
Tibetan:
  • པང་ནས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • kolita

Another name of Mahā­maudgalyāyana.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1628-1630
  • g.­358
g.­313

Koṇaka

Wylie:
  • mtshams can
Tibetan:
  • མཚམས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • koṇaka

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­10
g.­314

Kosala

Wylie:
  • ko sa la
Tibetan:
  • ཀོ་ས་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kosala

A country that the Buddha frequently visited.

Located in 70 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-49
  • 2.­273
  • 6.­9-12
  • 6.­146-147
  • 6.­179-183
  • 6.­186-189
  • 6.­193-196
  • 6.­220-225
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­229
  • 6.­232-233
  • 6.­235-239
  • 7.­170
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­97-98
  • 9.­100
  • 9.­106
  • 9.­108-110
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­125-126
  • 9.­128-129
  • 9.­137
  • 9.­139
  • 9.­1402
  • 9.­1524
  • 9.­2509
  • n.­314
  • n.­960
  • g.­114
  • g.­285
  • g.­347
  • g.­426
  • g.­499
  • g.­604
  • g.­639
g.­315

Koṭīviṃśa

Wylie:
  • bye ba nyi shu pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱེ་བ་ཉི་ཤུ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • koṭīviṃśa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1666
  • 9.­1677-1679
g.­316

Krakucchanda

Wylie:
  • log par dad sel
Tibetan:
  • ལོག་པར་དད་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • krakucchanda

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2136
g.­317

Krauñcāna

Wylie:
  • krung krung sgra can
Tibetan:
  • ཀྲུང་ཀྲུང་སྒྲ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • krauñcāna

A village or town. See also n.­564.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­3
  • n.­563-564
g.­318

Kṛkin

Wylie:
  • kr-i kI
Tibetan:
  • ཀྲྀ་ཀཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛkin

A king who is the father of the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1768-1769
  • 9.­1876
  • 9.­2044
  • 9.­2392
  • 9.­2408-2413
  • 9.­2428
  • 9.­2431-2434
  • n.­983
g.­319

Kṛṣṇa

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛṣṇa

(1) A nāga king. (2) The son of Prince Viśvantara.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320
  • 2.­322
  • 9.­748
  • 9.­787
  • 9.­830
  • 9.­845
  • 9.­876
  • 9.­888
  • 9.­898
  • 9.­907
  • n.­785
g.­320

kṣatriya

Wylie:
  • rgyal rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣatriya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ruling caste in the traditional four-caste hierarchy of India, associated with warriors, the aristocracy, and kings.

Located in 69 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­44
  • 2.­361
  • 3.­86
  • 3.­91
  • 3.­156
  • 6.­21
  • 6.­41-46
  • 6.­48-52
  • 6.­199-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­210
  • 6.­241
  • 6.­243
  • 6.­251
  • 6.­258
  • 8.­149
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­580
  • 9.­719
  • 9.­724
  • 9.­743
  • 9.­749
  • 9.­751
  • 9.­757
  • 9.­836
  • 9.­851
  • 9.­868
  • 9.­872
  • 9.­889
  • 9.­894
  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­1281
  • 9.­1289-1290
  • 9.­1292-1293
  • 9.­1298-1300
  • 9.­1305
  • 9.­1333
  • 9.­1338
  • 9.­1344
  • 9.­1996
  • 9.­2280
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­142
  • 11.­233
  • n.­256-257
  • n.­324
  • n.­327
  • n.­497
  • g.­131
g.­321

Kṣemaṃkara

Wylie:
  • bde mdzad
  • bzod pa mdzad
  • legs mdzad
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་མཛད།
  • བཟོད་པ་མཛད།
  • ལེགས་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣemaṃkara

A buddha in the past. Note that there appear to be three distinct buddhas with the name Kṣemaṃkara as is listed at 9.­1506. See also n.­908.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1398
  • 9.­1413
  • 9.­1428
  • 9.­1461
  • 9.­1487
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­908
g.­322

Kubera

Wylie:
  • lus ngan
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་ངན།
Sanskrit:
  • kubera

A god.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 9.­569
  • 9.­978
  • 9.­1135
  • n.­716
  • g.­282
g.­323

Kūjaka Jalapatha

Wylie:
  • lam chu sgra can
Tibetan:
  • ལམ་ཆུ་སྒྲ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kūjaka jalapatha

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
g.­324

Kukkuṭapādaka

Wylie:
  • ri bya gag rkang
Tibetan:
  • རི་བྱ་གག་རྐང་།
Sanskrit:
  • kukkuṭapādaka

A mountain.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­173
g.­325

kulmāṣa

Wylie:
  • zan dron
Tibetan:
  • ཟན་དྲོན།
Sanskrit:
  • kulmāṣa

Sour gruel.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • 7.­72-73
  • 7.­75
  • 9.­2416-2419
g.­326

Kumāravardhana

Wylie:
  • yul gzhon nu bskyed pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་གཞོན་ནུ་བསྐྱེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāravardhana

A country. See also n.­563.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2
  • n.­563
g.­327

kumbhāṇḍa

Wylie:
  • grul bum
Tibetan:
  • གྲུལ་བུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbhāṇḍa

A kind of demon. The name uses a play on the word āṇḍa, which means egg but is a euphemism for testicle. Thus, they are often depicted as having testicles as big as pots (from kumba, or “pot”).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 11.­13
  • 11.­19
  • n.­1139
g.­328

Kuṇḍopadāna

Wylie:
  • yul chu mig can
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ཆུ་མིག་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṇḍopadāna

A country.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­272
  • 2.­279
g.­329

Kuntī

Wylie:
  • mdung can
Tibetan:
  • མདུང་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuntī

A yakṣiṇī.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­257
  • 7.­259-261
  • 7.­265
g.­330

Kuntī

Wylie:
  • mdung can
Tibetan:
  • མདུང་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuntī

A city.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­257-259
  • 7.­263
g.­331

Kuru

Wylie:
  • sgra ngan
  • sgra mi snyan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ངན།
  • སྒྲ་མི་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuru

(1) A country (sgra ngan). (2) A continent in the north (sgra mi snyan).

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 7.­48-49
  • 7.­127-128
  • 9.­181-182
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­186
  • 9.­188
  • 9.­190-191
  • 9.­193
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­258
  • 9.­1582-1583
  • 9.­1585
  • 9.­2417
  • n.­629
  • n.­1058
  • g.­302
  • g.­616
  • g.­617
g.­332

Kuśa

Wylie:
  • ku sha
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśa

A prince who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­168
  • 9.­340
  • 9.­342
  • 9.­344
  • 9.­346-347
  • 9.­350-353
  • 9.­357-358
  • 9.­361
  • 9.­364
  • 9.­368-369
  • 9.­376
  • 9.­379-381
  • 9.­384-385
  • 9.­388
  • 9.­394-396
  • 9.­400
  • 9.­402-403
  • 9.­410
  • g.­60
  • g.­612
  • g.­743
g.­333

Kuśāvatī

Wylie:
  • rtswa can
Tibetan:
  • རྩྭ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśāvatī

A city.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­267
  • 9.­289-290
  • 9.­396
  • n.­660
g.­334

Kuśinagarī

Wylie:
  • ku sha’i grong khyer
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ཤའི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśinagarī

The city where the Buddha entered parinirvāṇa.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 4.­112-113
  • 9.­2068
g.­335

Kūṭāgāraśālā

Wylie:
  • khang pa brtsegs pa’i gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཁང་པ་བརྩེགས་པའི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • kūṭāgāraśālā

A hall near Vaiśālī where the Buddha frequently stayed.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2538-2540
  • 10.­23
g.­336

Kuṭi

Wylie:
  • spyil bu can
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱིལ་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuṭi

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­203-204
g.­337

Lavaṇabhadrika

Wylie:
  • mdzes bzang
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • lavaṇabhadrika

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2135-2136
  • 9.­2149-2150
  • 9.­2152
g.­338

lesser defilements

Wylie:
  • nye ba’i nyon mongs pa
  • nye bar nyon mongs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བའི་ཉོན་མོངས་པ།
  • ཉེ་བར་ཉོན་མོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • upakleśa

Minor defilements of mind that arise in the wake of the six primary defilements.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­106
  • 6.­120-130
  • 6.­132-133
  • 9.­1345
g.­339

Licchavi

Wylie:
  • lits+tsha bI
Tibetan:
  • ལིཙྪ་བཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • licchavi

A tribe or clan based in Vaiśālī.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­31
  • 3.­53
  • 3.­108
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­219
  • 3.­239-241
  • 3.­246
  • 3.­248-249
  • 3.­264-265
  • 3.­270
  • n.­177
  • n.­1183
  • g.­700
g.­340

Lightning

Wylie:
  • glog
Tibetan:
  • གློག
Sanskrit:
  • —

The wife of the son of the brahmin Agnidatta.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
g.­341

Like a Noose

Wylie:
  • zhags pa lta bu
Tibetan:
  • ཞགས་པ་ལྟ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A snake.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­978-979
  • n.­831
g.­342

Likhita

Wylie:
  • bris pa
Tibetan:
  • བྲིས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • likhita

A ṛṣi.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1561
  • 9.­1564-1565
  • 9.­1567
  • 9.­1569-1570
g.­343

lineage of Kuṣāṇa

Wylie:
  • ku sha na’i rigs
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ཤ་ནའི་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The royal family of the Kushan dynasty.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­267
g.­344

Lion Village

Wylie:
  • seng ge can gyi grong
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་ཅན་གྱི་གྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village. See also n.­338.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­262
  • n.­338
g.­345

Lokāyata

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten rgyang ’phen
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་རྒྱང་འཕེན།
Sanskrit:
  • lokāyata

Followers of a materialistic school of philosophy.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­81
g.­346

Lotus

Wylie:
  • pad ma ltar gas pa
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ལྟར་གས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • padma

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­347

Lucky

Wylie:
  • bkra shis ldan
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A Brahmin in Kosala, father of Saṃjaya.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­193-195
  • 6.­232-234
  • n.­322
  • g.­564
g.­348

Lumbinī

Wylie:
  • lum bi ni
Tibetan:
  • ལུམ་བི་ནི།
Sanskrit:
  • lumbinī

The garden where the Buddha was born.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­4
g.­349

Madhuvāsiṣṭha

Wylie:
  • gnas ’jog sbrang rtsi can
Tibetan:
  • གནས་འཇོག་སྦྲང་རྩི་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • madhuvāsiṣṭha

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2152-2153
  • 9.­2165
  • 9.­2173-2175
  • 9.­2504
g.­350

Madhyandina

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i gung
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་གུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • madhyandina

A monk who is predicted by the Buddha to appear in the future.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­239
  • 8.­6
  • n.­429
g.­351

Mādrī

Wylie:
  • rgyags sbyin ma
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱགས་སྦྱིན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mādrī

The wife of Prince Viśvantara.

Located in 43 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­732
  • 9.­735
  • 9.­744-745
  • 9.­748-749
  • 9.­760
  • 9.­781
  • 9.­784
  • 9.­789
  • 9.­798
  • 9.­808-809
  • 9.­811
  • 9.­813
  • 9.­815-816
  • 9.­818-820
  • 9.­822
  • 9.­824
  • 9.­826-828
  • 9.­845
  • 9.­861-862
  • 9.­872
  • 9.­876
  • 9.­885
  • 9.­895
  • 9.­898
  • 9.­901-906
  • n.­773
  • n.­781
  • n.­785
  • n.­813
g.­352

Magadha

Wylie:
  • ma ga dhA
Tibetan:
  • མ་ག་དྷཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • magadha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ancient Indian kingdom that lay to the south of the Ganges River in what today is the state of Bihar. Magadha was the largest of the sixteen “great states” (mahājanapada) that flourished between the sixth and third centuries ʙᴄᴇ in northern India. During the life of the Buddha Śākyamuni, it was ruled by King Bimbisāra and later by Bimbisāra's son, Ajātaśatru. Its capital was initially Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir) but was later moved to Pāṭaliputra (modern-day Patna). Over the centuries, with the expansion of the Magadha’s might, it became the capital of the vast Mauryan empire and seat of the great King Aśoka.

This region is home to many of the most important Buddhist sites, including Bodh Gayā, where the Buddha attained awakening; Vulture Peak (Gṛdhra­kūṭa), where the Buddha bestowed many well-known Mahāyāna sūtras; and the Buddhist university of Nālandā that flourished between the fifth and twelfth centuries ᴄᴇ, among many others.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­40-44
  • 2.­386-387
  • 2.­390
  • 2.­422
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­13-15
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­19-22
  • 3.­26-27
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­48-50
  • 3.­52-53
  • 3.­55
  • 3.­82-83
  • 3.­96-100
  • 3.­104-106
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­243
  • 7.­231-232
  • 9.­2071
  • 9.­2185
  • 11.­46-47
  • n.­114
  • n.­123
  • n.­173
  • n.­546
  • g.­17
  • g.­71
  • g.­134
  • g.­211
  • g.­430
  • g.­477
  • g.­516
  • g.­605
  • g.­713
g.­353

Mahābhāgīratha

Wylie:
  • shing rta skal ldan chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་རྟ་སྐལ་ལྡན་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābhāgīratha

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1449
  • g.­86
g.­354

Mahābrahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs chen
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahmā

The deity who rules the Brahmā World.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­94
g.­355

Mahābrahman

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahman

A class of gods who inhabit the third heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­356

Mahādeva

Wylie:
  • lha chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahādeva

A wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life. It is also the name of his eldest son and the other eighty-four thousand eldest sons in his line of succession.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­33
  • 4.­36-40
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­45-47
  • 4.­63-64
  • 9.­426-430
  • 9.­433
  • 9.­436-438
  • 9.­440
  • n.­194
  • n.­197-198
  • n.­200
  • n.­203-204
  • n.­503
  • n.­671
  • n.­687
  • n.­690
  • n.­692
  • n.­697
  • g.­447
g.­357

Mahākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­74-75
  • 9.­78-83
  • 9.­88
  • 9.­90
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­95-97
  • 9.­137
  • 9.­1578
  • 11.­29
  • n.­117
  • n.­154
  • n.­454
  • n.­600
  • n.­602
  • g.­299
g.­358

Mahā­maudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu chen po
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­maudgalyāyana

A disciple of the Buddha. He is also referred to as “Maudgalyāyana” and “Kolita.”

Located in 56 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­97-100
  • 2.­318-320
  • 2.­324-327
  • 2.­329-331
  • 2.­336-337
  • 2.­341
  • 7.­18-20
  • 7.­22
  • 7.­25-27
  • 7.­29
  • 7.­32
  • 8.­141-142
  • 8.­292-293
  • 9.­1531-1538
  • 9.­1540-1541
  • 9.­1543
  • 9.­1610-1611
  • 10.­47
  • 10.­49
  • 10.­51
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­56
  • 11.­57-58
  • n.­101
  • n.­496
  • n.­964
  • g.­82
  • g.­312
  • g.­386
g.­359

Mahāmāyā

Wylie:
  • sgyu ’phrul chen mo
Tibetan:
  • སྒྱུ་འཕྲུལ་ཆེན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāmāyā

(1) The Buddha’s mother. (2) The mother of a future Buddha whose name is also Śākyamuni.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­110
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • n.­232
g.­360

Mahāprajāpatī

Wylie:
  • skye dgu’i bdag mo chen mo
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུའི་བདག་མོ་ཆེན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāprajāpatī

The Buddha’s aunt and stepmother, who became the first nun.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­106
  • n.­603
g.­361

Mahāpraṇāda

Wylie:
  • sgra chen
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpraṇāda

A king in the past.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­139
  • 3.­154-155
  • 3.­157
  • 3.­160-162
  • 3.­166-167
  • n.­145
  • g.­51
  • g.­498
g.­362

Mahāśakuni

Wylie:
  • la nye can chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལ་ཉེ་ཅན་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāśakuni

Another name of Śakuna.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­343
  • 9.­350
  • 9.­352
  • 9.­357
  • 9.­380
  • 9.­382
  • n.­674
  • g.­553
g.­363

Mahāsammata

Wylie:
  • mang pos bkur ba
Tibetan:
  • མང་པོས་བཀུར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsammata

The first king of the world.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­67
  • 8.­2-3
  • n.­250
  • n.­452
  • n.­896
g.­364

Mahāsena

Wylie:
  • sde chen
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsena

(1) A householder and lay follower of the Buddha. (2) A householder in a former life of a person with the same name.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3-9
  • 2.­11-12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18-22
  • 2.­24
  • g.­365
g.­365

Mahāsenā

Wylie:
  • sde chen ma
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་ཆེན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsenā

(1) The wife of the householder Mahāsena and lay follower of the Buddha. (2) The wife of a householder in a former life of a person with the same name.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­18
g.­366

Mahāsudarśana

Wylie:
  • legs mthong chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་མཐོང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsudarśana

A wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­116
  • 3.­118-119
  • 3.­127
  • 3.­131
  • 9.­267
  • 9.­275-281
  • 9.­283-288
  • 9.­300-302
  • 9.­305
  • n.­144
  • n.­370
  • n.­662-663
  • n.­667
  • n.­671
g.­367

Mahāśvāsa

Wylie:
  • dbugs cher ’byin
Tibetan:
  • དབུགས་ཆེར་འབྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāśvāsa

A nāga.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­32-36
g.­368

Mahauṣadha

Wylie:
  • sman chen
Tibetan:
  • སྨན་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahauṣadha

A minister who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1495
  • n.­925
g.­369

Mahendra

Wylie:
  • dbang chen
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahendra

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1506
  • n.­911
g.­370

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug chen po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara

A yakṣa.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­243-244
  • 2.­253-254
  • 2.­256
g.­371

Mahī

Wylie:
  • chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahī

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­227
g.­372

Mahiṣmatī

Wylie:
  • ma he ldan
Tibetan:
  • མ་ཧེ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahiṣmatī

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1351
g.­373

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya

(1) A buddha in the future. (2) A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­169
  • 3.­171-173
  • 3.­201
  • 9.­1486
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­152
  • n.­154
  • n.­157
g.­374

makara

Wylie:
  • chu srin
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྲིན།
Sanskrit:
  • makara

An aquatic monster.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­593
  • 9.­942
  • 9.­948
  • 9.­950
  • 9.­1012
g.­375

mālādhāra

Wylie:
  • phreng thogs
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲེང་ཐོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mālādhāra

“Garland-Holder,” a class of divine beings who live on Mount Sumeru.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­205
  • 9.­210-211
  • n.­638
  • n.­645
g.­376

Malla

Wylie:
  • gyad
Tibetan:
  • གྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • malla

A country.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­92
  • 4.­95-96
  • 4.­99
  • 11.­198
g.­377

Mallaputra

Wylie:
  • gyad kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • གྱད་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • mallaputra

Another name for Dravya Mallaputra, a disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2068
g.­378

Mallas

Wylie:
  • gyad
Tibetan:
  • གྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • malla

A tribe or clan.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2068
  • 11.­198-202
  • 11.­204-207
  • 11.­212-214
  • n.­221
  • n.­1179
g.­379

Mandākinī

Wylie:
  • dal gyis ’bab
Tibetan:
  • དལ་གྱིས་འབབ།
Sanskrit:
  • mandākinī

A lotus pond where the nāga king Supratiṣṭhita lives.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­49
g.­380

Mandākinī Lotus Pond

Wylie:
  • rdzing bu dal gyis ’bab
Tibetan:
  • རྫིང་བུ་དལ་གྱིས་འབབ།
Sanskrit:
  • mandākinī puṣkariṇī

A lotus pond where the nāga king Supratiṣṭhita lives.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­51
  • 10.­53
  • 11.­3-6
  • 11.­11
  • 11.­35
  • 11.­44
g.­381

Māndhātṛ

Wylie:
  • nga las nu
Tibetan:
  • ང་ལས་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • māndhātṛ

A wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 79 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­10-11
  • 9.­13
  • 9.­16
  • 9.­143-145
  • 9.­147
  • 9.­149
  • 9.­157
  • 9.­160-161
  • 9.­163-164
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­169-170
  • 9.­172
  • 9.­174-185
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­189
  • 9.­191-192
  • 9.­194-195
  • 9.­199-200
  • 9.­204
  • 9.­206
  • 9.­208-210
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­219
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­223
  • 9.­233-237
  • 9.­240-243
  • 9.­245-249
  • 9.­255
  • 9.­257-258
  • 9.­260-262
  • 9.­269
  • 9.­273
  • n.­562
  • n.­568
  • n.­574
  • n.­620
  • n.­656-657
  • g.­164
  • g.­419
  • g.­551
  • g.­689
g.­382

Maṇivatī

Wylie:
  • nor bu can
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇivatī

A village or town.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­5
g.­383

Manoharā

Wylie:
  • yid ’phrog ma
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་འཕྲོག་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • manoharā

A kinnarī.

Located in 55 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­583-585
  • 9.­592
  • 9.­596
  • 9.­604
  • 9.­606
  • 9.­608
  • 9.­621
  • 9.­623
  • 9.­625-627
  • 9.­629-631
  • 9.­641
  • 9.­644
  • 9.­646
  • 9.­649
  • 9.­651-652
  • 9.­654-655
  • 9.­657
  • 9.­659
  • 9.­662-663
  • 9.­665
  • 9.­667-668
  • 9.­670-671
  • 9.­673
  • 9.­691
  • 9.­694-695
  • 9.­697-698
  • 9.­700-701
  • 9.­703-713
  • n.­729
  • n.­761
  • n.­763
g.­384

Māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­288
  • 3.­314
  • 4.­104
  • 6.­11
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­195
  • 9.­1453
  • 9.­1473
  • 9.­1866
  • 9.­2191
  • 9.­2318-2319
  • 11.­77
  • 11.­142
  • 11.­150
  • 11.­156
  • n.­208
  • n.­1042
  • g.­385
g.­385

Māra the Evil One

Wylie:
  • bdud sdig can
Tibetan:
  • བདུད་སྡིག་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • māra pāpīyas

A demon. See also “Māra.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­74-76
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­81
  • 8.­192
g.­386

Marīcika World

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gyi khams ’od zer can
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གྱི་ཁམས་འོད་ཟེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • marīcikaḥ lokadhātuḥ

A world where Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s mother was reborn.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­327
  • 2.­329
  • g.­82
g.­387

Marīcin

Wylie:
  • ’od zer can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • marīcin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1441
  • 9.­1506
g.­388

Markaṭa Pond

Wylie:
  • spre’u rdzing
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲེའུ་རྫིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • markaṭahrada

A pond.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2538-2540
  • 10.­23
g.­389

Maskarī Gośālīputra

Wylie:
  • kun du rgyu gnag lhas kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དུ་རྒྱུ་གནག་ལྷས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • maskarī gośālīputra

One of the six teachers at the time of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­59
g.­390

Mātali

Wylie:
  • ma la gdus
Tibetan:
  • མ་ལ་གདུས།
Sanskrit:
  • mātali

The charioteer of Indra (Śakra).

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­53-57
  • 9.­448-452
  • n.­201
g.­391

mātaṅga

Wylie:
  • gdol pa
Tibetan:
  • གདོལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātaṅga

One of the lower social classes that are outside, and beneath, the four castes.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­33
  • 9.­413
  • 9.­415-419
  • 9.­422-423
g.­392

Mathurā

Wylie:
  • ma thu la
  • bcom brlag
Tibetan:
  • མ་ཐུ་ལ།
  • བཅོམ་བརླག
Sanskrit:
  • mathurā

A town.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­34
  • 8.­4-6
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­21
  • 8.­62
  • 8.­64-66
  • 8.­68
  • 8.­71
  • 8.­75
  • 8.­77
  • n.­128
  • n.­361
  • n.­450
  • n.­460
  • n.­473
  • g.­91
  • g.­441
  • g.­442
g.­393

Maudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • maudgalyāyana

(1) A disciple of the Buddha Śākyamuni. (2) A disciple of a buddha in the past. (3) A disciple of a buddha in the future.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­100
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­324
  • 2.­328
  • 2.­337
  • 2.­340-341
  • 7.­18
  • 8.­196-197
  • 8.­230
  • 8.­238
  • 8.­292
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1386
  • 9.­1531
  • 9.­1550
  • 9.­1559
  • 9.­1565
  • 9.­1570
  • 9.­1576-1577
  • 9.­2383
  • 9.­2387
  • 11.­59
  • 11.­64-65
  • 11.­180
  • n.­117
  • n.­547
  • g.­358
g.­394

meditation

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

In this text:

Also rendered in this translation as “samādhi.”

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­204
  • 4.­5-6
  • 4.­9-10
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­96
  • 4.­100
  • 4.­104-107
  • 6.­108-109
  • 8.­24
  • 8.­225
  • 9.­1742-1743
  • 9.­1747
  • 9.­1998-1999
  • 10.­49
  • 11.­11
  • 11.­104
  • 11.­144
  • 11.­184
  • n.­221-222
  • n.­225
  • n.­462
  • n.­955
  • n.­1009
  • g.­160
  • g.­560
g.­395

Middle Village

Wylie:
  • dbus kyi grong
Tibetan:
  • དབུས་ཀྱི་གྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­16
g.­396

midland region

Wylie:
  • yul dbus
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་དབུས།
Sanskrit:
  • madhyadeśa

The central part of the continent of Jambu.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­176
  • 3.­180-182
  • 9.­1545
  • 9.­1547
  • 9.­1572
  • 10.­68
  • n.­408
g.­397

Miṇḍhaka

Wylie:
  • lug
Tibetan:
  • ལུག
Sanskrit:
  • miṇḍhaka

A householder.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­58-65
  • 10.­86-87
  • 10.­91
  • 10.­93
  • 10.­99
  • 10.­101-103
  • 10.­107
  • 10.­115
  • 10.­140
  • n.­386
  • n.­575
  • n.­814
  • n.­1097-1098
  • n.­1105
  • n.­1118-1119
g.­398

Mithilā

Wylie:
  • mi thi la
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཐི་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • mithilā

A city in Videha.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­170
  • 4.­31
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­45-47
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­62-64
  • 9.­426
  • 9.­436
  • 9.­443
  • 9.­446
  • 9.­458-459
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­1352
  • 9.­2026
  • n.­697
g.­399

monk in charge of construction

Wylie:
  • dge slong lag gi blas
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་ལག་གི་བླས།
Sanskrit:
  • nava­karmika­bhikṣu

One of the monastic administrative titles.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­111
g.­400

monk responsible for monastic property

Wylie:
  • dge skos
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སྐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • upadhivārika

One of the monastic administrative titles. See also n.­103

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­318-319
  • 2.­347-348
  • 9.­74
  • 10.­111
  • n.­103
g.­401

Mount Cakravāḍa

Wylie:
  • khor yug
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ཡུག
Sanskrit:
  • cakravāḍa

In Buddhist cosmology, this is commonly described as the outer ring of mountains at the edge of the flat disk that is the world, with Mount Sumeru in the center.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1267
  • 9.­2320
g.­402

Mount Gandhamādana

Wylie:
  • ri spos kyi ngad ldang
Tibetan:
  • རི་སྤོས་ཀྱི་ངད་ལྡང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhamādana parvata

A mountain.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­339
  • 11.­86
  • n.­973
g.­403

Mount Kailāsa

Wylie:
  • gangs ri
Tibetan:
  • གངས་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • kailāsa

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­876
  • 9.­1359
  • n.­786
g.­404

Mount Meru

Wylie:
  • lhun po
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • meru

See Mount Sumeru.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­26
g.­405

Mount Musalaka

Wylie:
  • gtun ri
Tibetan:
  • གཏུན་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • musalakaḥ parvataḥ

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­307-308
g.­406

Mount Sumeru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumeru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­253
  • 2.­329
  • 2.­357
  • 7.­164
  • 9.­156
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­195
  • 9.­197
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­704
  • 9.­1538
  • 9.­1540
  • 9.­2320
  • 11.­32
  • n.­637-639
  • g.­140
  • g.­375
  • g.­401
  • g.­404
  • g.­543
g.­407

Mount Triśaṅku

Wylie:
  • ri bo rtse gsum
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ་རྩེ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • triśaṅkuḥ parvataḥ

A mountain.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­142
  • 8.­196-197
g.­408

Mount Uśīra

Wylie:
  • u shi ra’i ri
Tibetan:
  • ཨུ་ཤི་རའི་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • uśīragiri

A mountain in the northern region.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­215
  • g.­659
g.­409

Mount Utkīlaka

Wylie:
  • phur pa’i rtse
  • phur pa’i dbyibs
Tibetan:
  • ཕུར་པའི་རྩེ།
  • ཕུར་པའི་དབྱིབས།
Sanskrit:
  • utkīlaka

(1) A mountain. (2) Another mountain mentioned in the story of Prince Sudhana, which is listed along with the mountain of the same name (differentiated in Tib. as phur pa’i dbyibs).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
  • n.­745
g.­410

Mount Vindhya

Wylie:
  • ’bigs byed
Tibetan:
  • འབིགས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vindhya

A range of mountains located to the north of the Narmada River.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­102-103
g.­411

Mountain

Wylie:
  • ri bo can
  • ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ་ཅན།
  • རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

(1) The son of the brahmin Agnidatta (ri bo can). (2) The son of the nāga Apalāla (ri bo).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­407
  • 2.­420
  • 7.­233-234
g.­412

Mṛgāra

Wylie:
  • ri dags
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgāra

A lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­273
  • n.­93
g.­413

Mṛgāramātā

Wylie:
  • ri dags ’dzin gyi ma
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་གྱི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgāramātā

Another name for Viśākhā Mṛgāramātā, a lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2506
  • n.­93
g.­414

Mṛgāraputra

Wylie:
  • ri dags bu
  • ri dags ’dzin bu
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་བུ།
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgāraputra

Another name of Kāla Mṛgāraputra, a disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2020
  • 9.­2023
g.­415

Mṛṇāla

Wylie:
  • pad ma’i rtsa lag
Tibetan:
  • པད་མའི་རྩ་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • mṛṇāla

A rogue who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2368
  • 9.­2370
  • 9.­2372
  • 9.­2375-2377
  • 9.­2381-2382
  • 9.­2470
g.­416

Mūkapaṅgu

Wylie:
  • lkugs ’phye
Tibetan:
  • ལྐུགས་འཕྱེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mūkapaṅgu

(1) Another name of Prince Water Born. (2) A non-Buddhist ascetic teacher.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1151
  • 9.­1155-1165
  • 9.­1168
  • 9.­1173
  • 9.­1180
  • 9.­1182
  • 9.­1184
  • 9.­1192
  • 9.­1195-1197
  • 9.­1243
  • 9.­1245-1246
  • 9.­1248-1249
  • 9.­1251-1254
  • n.­866
  • n.­884
g.­417

muni

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni

An ancient title given to ascetics, monks, hermits, and saints, namely, those who have attained the realization of truth through their own contemplation and not by divine revelation. Here also used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 78 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­65
  • 2.­335
  • 3.­289
  • 3.­315
  • 4.­26
  • 6.­151
  • 8.­27-28
  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­39
  • 8.­42-43
  • 8.­46
  • 8.­49
  • 8.­51
  • 8.­57
  • 8.­60
  • 9.­399
  • 9.­530
  • 9.­1044
  • 9.­1396
  • 9.­1403
  • 9.­1405
  • 9.­1435
  • 9.­1438
  • 9.­1441
  • 9.­1448
  • 9.­1458
  • 9.­1464
  • 9.­1468
  • 9.­1481
  • 9.­1499
  • 9.­1529
  • 9.­1588
  • 9.­1651
  • 9.­1719
  • 9.­1722
  • 9.­1763
  • 9.­1843
  • 9.­1856
  • 9.­1862-1865
  • 9.­1897
  • 9.­1908
  • 9.­1916-1918
  • 9.­1934
  • 9.­2011
  • 9.­2075-2076
  • 9.­2091
  • 9.­2178
  • 9.­2204
  • 9.­2210
  • 9.­2217
  • 9.­2271
  • 9.­2307
  • 9.­2453
  • 9.­2456
  • 9.­2471
  • 11.­85
  • 11.­94
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­112
  • 11.­123
  • 11.­125
  • 11.­127-128
  • 11.­130-131
  • 11.­135-136
  • 11.­178
  • n.­467
g.­418

Munigāthā

Wylie:
  • thub pa’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • munigāthā

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­419

Mūrdhnāta

Wylie:
  • spyi bo skyes
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱི་བོ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • mūrdhnāta

Another name for Māndhātṛ, a wheel-turning king who was the Buddha in a former life. See also n.­571.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­9-10
  • 9.­143
g.­420

Naḍadaryā

Wylie:
  • sbubs can
Tibetan:
  • སྦུབས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • naḍadaryā

A yakṣiṇī. See also n.­444.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­256
g.­421

Naḍera

Wylie:
  • sbu bu can
Tibetan:
  • སྦུ་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • naḍera

A place near Vairambhya in Śūrasena.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­119-120
  • n.­444
g.­422

Nadī-Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • chu klung ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ཀླུང་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • nadī-kāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1822-1824
  • n.­987
g.­423

Nāḍikā

Wylie:
  • sbu bu can
Tibetan:
  • སྦུ་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • nāḍikā

A yakṣiṇī. See also n.­444.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­256
  • n.­444
g.­424

Nādikā

Wylie:
  • sgra can
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • nādikā

A village.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­206-209
  • 3.­211-213
  • 3.­218
  • 3.­226
  • n.­166
  • g.­44
  • g.­81
  • g.­130
  • g.­221
  • g.­272
  • g.­294
  • g.­300
  • g.­445
  • g.­537
  • g.­620
  • g.­681
  • g.­685
  • g.­760
  • g.­761
  • g.­762
g.­425

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 154 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­3
  • 2.­31
  • 2.­34-39
  • 2.­287
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320-323
  • 2.­356-357
  • 2.­359-360
  • 2.­364-365
  • 2.­374-375
  • 2.­379
  • 2.­383-384
  • 2.­389-391
  • 2.­399-402
  • 2.­404
  • 2.­416-417
  • 2.­420-422
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­51-52
  • 3.­109
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­142
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­32
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­225-228
  • 7.­230
  • 7.­233-234
  • 7.­239
  • 7.­249
  • 7.­251-253
  • 7.­259
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­270-271
  • 8.­71
  • 8.­194
  • 9.­47
  • 9.­205-211
  • 9.­420-421
  • 9.­535
  • 9.­544-549
  • 9.­551
  • 9.­553-554
  • 9.­557
  • 9.­560-561
  • 9.­563-564
  • 9.­566
  • 9.­584
  • 9.­1217-1219
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1538
  • 9.­2458
  • 9.­2466
  • 10.­49-52
  • 10.­54
  • 11.­14
  • 11.­21
  • 11.­32
  • 11.­34-36
  • n.­41
  • n.­101
  • n.­108-109
  • n.­114
  • n.­128
  • n.­153
  • n.­343
  • n.­401
  • n.­423
  • n.­429
  • n.­443
  • n.­636
  • n.­645
  • n.­878-879
  • n.­1139
  • g.­34
  • g.­56
  • g.­123
  • g.­199
  • g.­200
  • g.­203
  • g.­207
  • g.­241
  • g.­261
  • g.­319
  • g.­367
  • g.­379
  • g.­380
  • g.­411
  • g.­431
  • g.­507
  • g.­591
  • g.­635
  • g.­643
  • g.­655
  • g.­664
  • g.­684
  • g.­708
g.­426

Nagarabindu

Wylie:
  • thigs pa can
Tibetan:
  • ཐིགས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • nagarabindu

A city in Kosala.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2509-2511
  • 9.­2516
  • 9.­2521-2523
g.­427

nagna

Wylie:
  • tshan po che
Tibetan:
  • ཚན་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • nagna

A kind of person who possesses superhuman strength.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­102-103
  • 7.­118
  • 7.­120-121
  • 9.­342
  • 9.­1301
  • 9.­1307
  • 9.­1342
  • 9.­1344
g.­428

Nairañjanā

Wylie:
  • nai rany+dza na
Tibetan:
  • ནཻ་རཉྫ་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • nairañjanā

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1818
g.­429

Naitarī

Wylie:
  • yul dbang ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་དབང་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • naitarī

A country.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­243
g.­430

Nālandā

Wylie:
  • na lan da
Tibetan:
  • ན་ལན་ད།
Sanskrit:
  • nālandā

A village in Magadha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­54-55
  • n.­120
  • n.­129
  • g.­525
g.­431

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A herdsman. (3) A nāga king.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­357
  • 7.­25
  • 8.­249-253
  • 8.­259-262
  • 8.­267-268
  • 8.­271
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1538-1539
  • 9.­2037-2038
  • 9.­2051-2053
  • n.­109
  • n.­525
  • n.­529
  • n.­539
  • n.­636
  • n.­983
  • g.­215
g.­432

Nandana Grove

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba’i tshal
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བའི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandanavana

A forest of Indra.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­262
  • 9.­575
  • 9.­1141
  • 11.­116
g.­433

Nandika

Wylie:
  • dga’ yod
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • nandika

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1726-1727
  • 9.­1737-1738
  • 9.­1740
g.­434

Nandika Kapphiṇa

Wylie:
  • dga’ yod gnas brtan ka pi na
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ཡོད་གནས་བརྟན་ཀ་པི་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A disciple of the Buddha. The Tibetan instance of dga’ yod gnas brtan ka pi na, which would render the name “Nandika Kapphiṇa,” is read in the Sanskrit source as brāhmaṇa­kapphiṇas sthaviraḥ, “the elder Brāhmaṇa­kapphiṇa.” This figure seems to be identical to Brāhmaṇa­kapphiṇa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­180
g.­435

Nandīpāla

Wylie:
  • dga’ skyong
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • nandīpāla

A potter.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1485
  • 9.­2390
  • 9.­2392-2394
  • 9.­2396
  • 9.­2398-2404
  • 9.­2406
  • 9.­2414-2415
  • 9.­2417-2421
  • 9.­2423
  • 9.­2425-2427
  • 9.­2432-2434
  • 9.­2498
  • n.­1055
  • n.­1058
g.­436

Nandivardhana

Wylie:
  • dga’ ’phel
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་འཕེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandivardhana

A country or town.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­250
  • g.­93
g.­437

nandyāvarta

Wylie:
  • g.yung drung ’khyil pa
Tibetan:
  • གཡུང་དྲུང་འཁྱིལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandyāvarta

An auspicious symbol, which is also called triratna or nandipada.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­141
  • 7.­230
g.­438

Naṅgā

Wylie:
  • nang ga
Tibetan:
  • ནང་ག
Sanskrit:
  • naṅgā

A river.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-639
  • 9.­685-687
g.­439

Nārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa

Major deity in the pantheon of the classical Indian religious traditions, he is famous for his strength.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­102-104
  • 8.­24
  • n.­223
  • n.­462
g.­440

Narendra

Wylie:
  • mi dbang
Tibetan:
  • མི་དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • narendra

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1429
g.­441

Naṭa

Wylie:
  • gar mkhan
Tibetan:
  • གར་མཁན།
Sanskrit:
  • naṭa

One of the two brothers in Mathurā who were predicted by the Buddha to build a monastery in the future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­5
g.­442

Naṭabhaṭika

Wylie:
  • gar mkhan dpa’ bo
Tibetan:
  • གར་མཁན་དཔའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • naṭabhaṭika

A monastery in Mathurā predicted by the Buddha to be built a hundred years after his nirvāṇa.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­5-6
g.­443

never-returner

Wylie:
  • mi ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anāgāmin

A person who has attained the third of the four stages of spiritual achievement and is considered to be free from future rebirth in the realm of desire.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­303
  • 2.­309
  • 2.­315
  • 3.­210-211
  • 7.­30
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­321-323
  • 9.­329
  • 11.­37
  • n.­1151-1152
g.­444

New Village

Wylie:
  • grong gsar
Tibetan:
  • གྲོང་གསར།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village. See also n.­339.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­263
  • n.­339
g.­445

Nikaṭa

Wylie:
  • nye ba
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • nikaṭa

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­446

Nīlabhūti

Wylie:
  • sngor gyur
Tibetan:
  • སྔོར་གྱུར།
Sanskrit:
  • nīlabhūti

A brahmin.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • 8.­19-21
  • 8.­62
g.­447

Nimi

Wylie:
  • mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • nimi

A wheel-turning king who is a descendant of Mahādeva and a former life of the Buddha.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­48-55
  • 4.­57-61
  • 9.­443-450
  • 9.­452-456
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­465
  • n.­194
  • n.­200
  • n.­202-203
  • n.­643
  • n.­687
  • n.­692-695
  • n.­697
g.­448

Nimindhara

Wylie:
  • mu khyud ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • nimindhara

One of the seven golden mountains.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-196
  • n.­632
g.­449

Nirgrantha Jñātiputra

Wylie:
  • gcer bu pa gnyen gyi bu
Tibetan:
  • གཅེར་བུ་པ་གཉེན་གྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirgrantha jñātiputra

One of the six teachers at the time of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­59
  • 3.­61
g.­450

Nirmāṇarati

Wylie:
  • ’phrul dga’
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲུལ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarati

A class of gods in the fifth of the six heavens in the desire realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
  • 9.­1238
g.­451

North Pañcāla

Wylie:
  • byang phyogs kyi lnga len pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ལྔ་ལེན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • uttarapañcāla

One of the two kings of the country of Pañcāla.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­534
  • 9.­536
  • 9.­538
  • 9.­540
  • 9.­542-543
  • 9.­546
  • g.­151
g.­452

Nūpuraka

Wylie:
  • rkang rgyan ldan
Tibetan:
  • རྐང་རྒྱན་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • nūpuraka

A son of King Ikṣuvāku.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­28
g.­453

Nyagrodha

Wylie:
  • n+ya gro d+ha
Tibetan:
  • ནྱ་གྲོ་དྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • nyagrodha

A brahmin.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2392
g.­454

Nyagrodhikā

Wylie:
  • n+ya gro d+ha
Tibetan:
  • ནྱ་གྲོ་དྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • nyagrodhikā

A village.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­275-276
  • 6.­286
g.­455

once-returner

Wylie:
  • lan gcig phyir ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • ལན་གཅིག་ཕྱིར་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sakṛdāgāmin

A person who has attained the second of the four stages of spiritual achievement and is considered to be reborn in the realm of desire only one more time.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­212
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­319-321
  • 9.­329
  • 11.­57-58
g.­456

Otalā

Wylie:
  • o ta la
Tibetan:
  • ཨོ་ཏ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • otalā

A village.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­78-79
  • 8.­83-84
  • 8.­95
  • n.­481
  • g.­457
g.­457

Otalā Forest

Wylie:
  • o ta la’i nags
Tibetan:
  • ཨོ་ཏ་ལའི་ནགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A forest near Otalā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­78
  • 8.­83
  • n.­481
g.­458

Otalāyana

Wylie:
  • o ta la’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཨོ་ཏ་ལའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • otalāyana

A brahmin.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­78
  • 8.­83-84
  • 8.­92-94
  • n.­481
g.­459

outer robe

Wylie:
  • snam sbyar
Tibetan:
  • སྣམ་སྦྱར།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅghāṭī

One of the three robes of a Buddhist monastic, which is worn on occasions such as almsbegging and the community’s formal meeting.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­213-214
  • 2.­304-305
  • 3.­234
  • 6.­98
  • 7.­31
  • 8.­117
  • 8.­132-133
  • 9.­1451
  • 9.­1531
  • 9.­1533
g.­460

Padmottara

Wylie:
  • pad ma dam pa
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmottara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1465
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2272
g.­461

Paiṅgika

Wylie:
  • ser skya’i bu
Tibetan:
  • སེར་སྐྱའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • paiṅgika

A young brahmin.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­242-243
  • 3.­246
  • 3.­249-257
  • n.­174
g.­462

Palgyi Lhünpo

Wylie:
  • dpal gyi lhun po
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་གྱི་ལྷུན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A member of the Tibetan translation group of the Vinayavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­6
g.­463

Pālitakūṭa

Wylie:
  • brtsegs skyong
Tibetan:
  • བརྩེགས་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pālitakūṭa

A village. See also n.­436

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­249
g.­464

Paltsek

Wylie:
  • dpal brtsegs
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་བརྩེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Paltsek (eighth to early ninth century), from the village of Kawa north of Lhasa, was one of Tibet’s preeminent translators. He was one of the first seven Tibetans to be ordained by Śāntarakṣita and is counted as one of Guru Rinpoché’s twenty-five close disciples. In a famous verse by Ngok Lotsawa Loden Sherab, Kawa Paltsek is named along with Chokro Lui Gyaltsen and Zhang (or Nanam) Yeshé Dé as part of a group of translators whose skills were surpassed only by Vairotsana.

He translated works from a wide variety of genres, including sūtra, śāstra, vinaya, and tantra, and was an author himself. Paltsek was also one of the most important editors of the early period, one of nine translators installed by Tri Songdetsen (r. 755–797/800) to supervise the translation of the Tripiṭaka and help catalog translated works for the first two of three imperial catalogs, the Denkarma (ldan kar ma) and the Samyé Chimpuma (bsam yas mchims phu ma). In the colophons of his works, he is often known as Paltsek Rakṣita (rak+Shi ta).

In this text:

One of the proofreaders of the Tibetan translation of the Vinayavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­6
g.­465

Pañcāla

Wylie:
  • lnga len
Tibetan:
  • ལྔ་ལེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcāla

A country.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­534
  • g.­67
  • g.­451
  • g.­602
g.­466

Pāñcika

Wylie:
  • lnga len
  • lngas rtsen
Tibetan:
  • ལྔ་ལེན།
  • ལྔས་རྩེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāñcika

A general of yakṣas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­114
  • 9.­612-613
  • 11.­5
g.­467

Pāpā

Wylie:
  • sdig can
Tibetan:
  • སྡིག་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāpā

A city.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 4.­92
  • 4.­113
  • 11.­198-201
  • 11.­205-207
  • 11.­212-214
  • n.­1125
  • n.­1179
g.­468

Para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

Wylie:
  • gzhan ’phrul dbang byed
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་འཕྲུལ་དབང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

A class of gods who inhabit the highest of the six heavens of the desire realm. The inhabitants enjoy objects created by others, then dispose of them themselves.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­469

Parārthadarśin

Wylie:
  • don dam gzigs pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་དམ་གཟིགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • parārthadarśin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1442
  • 9.­1477
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­931
g.­470

Parasol

Wylie:
  • gdugs lta bu
Tibetan:
  • གདུགས་ལྟ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • chatra

A mango grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­56
g.­471

Pārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • pha rol ’gro byed
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་འགྲོ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • pārāyaṇa

A lost verse text, which was possibly a Mūla­sarvāstivādin counterpart of the Pārāyanavagga of the Suttanipāta in the Pāli canon and included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­472

Parīttābha

Wylie:
  • ’od chung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttābha

The fourth heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­473

Parīttaśubha

Wylie:
  • dge chung
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttaśubha

A class of gods who inhabit the seventh heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­474

Pāriyātraka

Wylie:
  • yongs ’du sa brtol
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་འདུ་ས་བརྟོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • pāriyātraka

Name of a forest of kovidāra trees possessed by the Thirty-Three Gods.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­218
  • 9.­220
g.­475

pastry

Wylie:
  • snum khur
Tibetan:
  • སྣུམ་ཁུར།
Sanskrit:
  • apūpa

The term is also rendered in this translation as “apūpa.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2116
  • 9.­2119
  • 9.­2122-2123
  • g.­40
g.­476

Pāṭalaka Shrine

Wylie:
  • dmar bu can gyi mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • དམར་བུ་ཅན་གྱི་མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṭalakaṃ caityaṃ

A shrine in Pāṭali Village.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­82-83
  • 3.­96
g.­477

Pāṭali

Wylie:
  • dmar bu can
Tibetan:
  • དམར་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṭali

A village which eventually became Pāṭaliputra, the capital of Magadha.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­76
  • 3.­81-83
  • 3.­94-96
  • 3.­98-100
  • 3.­105-106
  • n.­120
  • n.­129
  • g.­476
g.­478

Pataṅgā

Wylie:
  • phye ma lab
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱེ་མ་ལབ།
Sanskrit:
  • pataṅgā

A river.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-639
  • 9.­685-687
g.­479

Pauṣkarasāri

Wylie:
  • pad ma’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • པད་མའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pauṣkarasāri

A brahmin.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­10-13
  • 6.­19
  • 6.­146
  • 6.­157
  • 6.­160-161
  • 6.­164
  • 6.­167
  • 6.­170-177
  • g.­22
g.­480

perfume chamber

Wylie:
  • dri gtsang khang
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་གཙང་ཁང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhakuṭī

The special private dwelling of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­289-290
g.­481

Phalaka

Wylie:
  • spang leb can
Tibetan:
  • སྤང་ལེབ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • phalaka

A hunter.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­551
  • 9.­581
  • 9.­584-585
  • 9.­657
g.­482

phāṇita

Wylie:
  • bu ram gyi dbu ba
Tibetan:
  • བུ་རམ་གྱི་དབུ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • phāṇita

Thickened sugarcane juice.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • n.­35
  • n.­1103
  • g.­217
g.­483

Pilinda

Wylie:
  • pi lin da
Tibetan:
  • པི་ལིན་ད།
Sanskrit:
  • pilinda

A short form of “Pilindavatsa,” a monk.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­484
g.­484

Pilindavatsa

Wylie:
  • pi lin da’i bu
Tibetan:
  • པི་ལིན་དའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • pilindavatsa

A monk. Also referred to as “Pilinda.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­71
  • 1.­98
  • g.­483
g.­485

Piṇḍavaṃśa

Wylie:
  • smyug sbams
Tibetan:
  • སྨྱུག་སྦམས།
Sanskrit:
  • piṇḍavaṃśa

A wheel-turning king in the past.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­302
  • 8.­313
  • n.­559
  • n.­566
  • g.­719
g.­486

Piṇḍola­bharadvāja

Wylie:
  • bha ra dwa dza bsod snyoms len
Tibetan:
  • བྷ་ར་དྭ་ཛ་བསོད་སྙོམས་ལེན།
Sanskrit:
  • piṇḍola­bharadvāja

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1689-1690
  • 9.­1701-1703
  • n.­973
g.­487

Pīṭha

Wylie:
  • khri’u brtsegs
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲིའུ་བརྩེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • pīṭha

A mendicant who is converted by the Buddha. See also n.­344.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­265
  • 6.­271-272
  • n.­344
  • n.­346
g.­488

place for what is allowable

Wylie:
  • rung ba’i gnas
Tibetan:
  • རུང་བའི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpikaśālā

For an explanation of this term, see 10.­2–10.­22. See also Yamagiwa 2001.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2602
  • 10.­13-16
  • 10.­19-22
  • n.­1080
g.­489

poṣadha

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • poṣadha

A meeting of the community of monks held twice a month to recite the vinaya rules and confirm that the community is properly functioning in accordance with them.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­2-3
  • 8.­149
  • 9.­952
  • 9.­955
  • 9.­1217
  • 9.­1246-1248
  • n.­1080
g.­490

Potana

Wylie:
  • skem byed
Tibetan:
  • སྐེམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • potana

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1351
g.­491

Powerful

Wylie:
  • nus pa can
Tibetan:
  • ནུས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A country.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­397
  • 2.­405
g.­492

Prabhadrikā

Wylie:
  • rab tu bzang ldan
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་བཟང་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhadrikā

A river. See also n.­362.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­34
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­181
g.­493

Prabhākara

Wylie:
  • ’od byed
Tibetan:
  • འོད་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhākara

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2270
  • 9.­2290-2292
  • 9.­2504
  • n.­1033
g.­494

Prabhāsa

Wylie:
  • ’od ldan
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhāsa

A king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1356-1358
  • 9.­1380
  • 9.­1383
  • 9.­1407
  • 9.­1499
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­928
  • n.­940
g.­495

Prabodhana

Wylie:
  • sad mdzad
Tibetan:
  • སད་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • prabodhana

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1469
  • 9.­1506
g.­496

Prajāpati

Wylie:
  • skye dgu’i bdag po
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུའི་བདག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajāpati

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­276
  • 3.­302
g.­497

Pramokṣa

Wylie:
  • rab grol
Tibetan:
  • རབ་གྲོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • pramokṣa

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
g.­498

Praṇāda

Wylie:
  • sgra snyan dbyangs
  • rab sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་སྙན་དབྱངས།
  • རབ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • praṇāda

(1) A buddha in the past (sgra snyan dbyangs). (2) A king who was Mahāpraṇāda’s father (rab sgrogs).

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­146
  • 3.­150
  • 3.­153
  • 3.­157-158
  • 9.­1414
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­589
g.­499

Prasenajit

Wylie:
  • gsal rgyal
Tibetan:
  • གསལ་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • prasenajit

The king of Kosala.

Located in 71 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­27
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­46-49
  • 2.­68
  • 6.­10
  • 6.­146-147
  • 6.­180-183
  • 6.­186-189
  • 6.­193-196
  • 6.­220-223
  • 6.­225
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­229
  • 6.­232-233
  • 6.­235-237
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­97-98
  • 9.­100
  • 9.­106
  • 9.­108-110
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­125-126
  • 9.­128-129
  • 9.­137
  • 9.­139
  • 9.­1402
  • 9.­1524
  • 10.­55
  • n.­321
  • n.­329
  • n.­568-570
  • n.­572
  • n.­574
  • n.­613
  • n.­616
  • n.­619
  • n.­622
  • n.­687
  • n.­690
  • n.­697
  • n.­940
  • n.­960
  • g.­60
  • g.­731
g.­500

praskandin

Wylie:
  • rab gnon
Tibetan:
  • རབ་གནོན།
Sanskrit:
  • praskandin

A kind of person who possesses superhuman strength.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­102-103
  • 7.­118
  • 7.­120-121
  • 9.­1301
  • 9.­1307
  • 9.­1342
  • 9.­1344
g.­501

prastha

Wylie:
  • bre’u chung
Tibetan:
  • བྲེའུ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • prastha

A measure of volume.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­136
  • 8.­142
  • 9.­8
  • 9.­1572
  • 9.­1582
  • 10.­121
g.­502

prātimokṣa

Wylie:
  • so sor thar pa
Tibetan:
  • སོ་སོར་ཐར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prātimokṣa

The collection of monastic rules, which is supposed to be recited at the formal meeting of monastics every fortnight.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­58
  • g.­541
g.­503

Pratyeka­brahman

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa so so
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ་སོ་སོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyeka­brahman

An independent Brahman.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­273
  • 3.­299
g.­504

Prāvārika

Wylie:
  • dgag dbye can
Tibetan:
  • དགག་དབྱེ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • prāvārika

A mango forest.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­55
g.­505

primary defilement

Wylie:
  • nyon mongs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉོན་མོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kleśa

The afflictions that hold one back from awakening, often listed as desire (rāga), anger (pratigha), pride (māna), ignorance (avidyā), wrong views (kudṛṣti), and indecision (vicikitsā).

Located in 60 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­16
  • 2.­24
  • 2.­275
  • 2.­315
  • 2.­343
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­204
  • 4.­105
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­120-130
  • 6.­132-133
  • 6.­173
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­106
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­118
  • 8.­268
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­36
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­594
  • 9.­1044
  • 9.­1048
  • 9.­1050-1051
  • 9.­1379
  • 9.­1581
  • 9.­1593
  • 9.­1633
  • 9.­1638
  • 9.­1661
  • 9.­1698
  • 9.­1990
  • 9.­2039
  • 9.­2055
  • 9.­2213
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2355
  • 9.­2534
  • 11.­57
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­151
  • 11.­155
  • n.­369
  • g.­338
  • g.­640
g.­506

pukkasa

Wylie:
  • kla klo
Tibetan:
  • ཀླ་ཀློ།
Sanskrit:
  • pukkasa

One of the lower social classes that are outside, and beneath, the four castes.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­460
  • 9.­836
  • 9.­910
g.­507

Punarvasuka

Wylie:
  • nab so
Tibetan:
  • ནབ་སོ།
Sanskrit:
  • punarvasuka

A nāga. See also n.­442.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­251-253
  • 7.­255
  • n.­441
g.­508

Puṇyaprasava

Wylie:
  • bsod nams skyes
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprasava

One of the levels in the highest heaven of the realm of form; also the name of the gods living there.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­509

Purāṇa

Wylie:
  • rnying pa
Tibetan:
  • རྙིང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • purāṇa

A lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­48
  • n.­591
g.­510

Pūraṇa Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung rdzogs byed
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་རྫོགས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • pūraṇa kāśyapa

One of the six teachers at the time of the Buddha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­58
  • 3.­61
  • 4.­106
g.­511

Pūrṇa

Wylie:
  • gang po
  • gang ba
  • rdzogs ldan
Tibetan:
  • གང་པོ།
  • གང་བ།
  • རྫོགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇa

(1) A disciple of the Buddha from Sūrpāraka (gang po). (2) A disciple of the Buddha from Kuṇḍopadhāna (gang po). (3) A haṃsa (gang ba). (4) A buddha in the past (rdzogs ldan).

Located in 137 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­103-104
  • 2.­110-113
  • 2.­118
  • 2.­121-123
  • 2.­126-128
  • 2.­130-131
  • 2.­134
  • 2.­137
  • 2.­140-142
  • 2.­145
  • 2.­147-156
  • 2.­158-161
  • 2.­163-165
  • 2.­167-168
  • 2.­170-171
  • 2.­175-176
  • 2.­179-180
  • 2.­182
  • 2.­184-198
  • 2.­200
  • 2.­203-207
  • 2.­209
  • 2.­211-213
  • 2.­215-222
  • 2.­224
  • 2.­226
  • 2.­228
  • 2.­230-234
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­238
  • 2.­250-256
  • 2.­258-260
  • 2.­262-263
  • 2.­267
  • 2.­272
  • 2.­274-276
  • 2.­279
  • 2.­283-286
  • 2.­289-291
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­343-344
  • 2.­347
  • 9.­1222-1223
  • 9.­1225
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­60
  • n.­80
  • n.­84
  • n.­92
  • n.­420
  • n.­699
  • g.­92
  • g.­94
  • g.­95
  • g.­96
  • g.­145
  • g.­610
  • g.­676
g.­512

Pūrṇamanoratha

Wylie:
  • gang po re skong
Tibetan:
  • གང་པོ་རེ་སྐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇamanoratha

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1462
g.­513

Pūrṇamukha

Wylie:
  • bzhin rgyas
Tibetan:
  • བཞིན་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇamukha

(1) The parrot of Āmrapālī. (2) A haṃsa who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­218
  • 3.­222
  • 3.­224-225
  • 9.­1222-1223
  • 9.­1225
  • 9.­1234
g.­514

Rāhula

Wylie:
  • sgra can zin
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཅན་ཟིན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhula

The son of the Buddha. Also referred to as “Rāhulabhadra.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2025-2026
  • 9.­2035-2037
  • n.­232
  • g.­515
g.­515

Rāhulabhadra

Wylie:
  • sgra can zin bzang po
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་ཅན་ཟིན་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhulabhadra

(1) Another name of Rāhula. (2) The son of a future Buddha whose name is Śākyamuni.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • g.­514
g.­516

Rājagṛha

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i khab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་ཁབ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājagṛha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient capital of Magadha prior to its relocation to Pāṭaliputra during the Mauryan dynasty, Rājagṛha is one of the most important locations in Buddhist history. The literature tells us that the Buddha and his saṅgha spent a considerable amount of time in residence in and around Rājagṛha‍—in nearby places, such as the Vulture Peak Mountain (Gṛdhrakūṭaparvata), a major site of the Mahāyāna sūtras, and the Bamboo Grove (Veṇuvana)‍—enjoying the patronage of King Bimbisāra and then of his son King Ajātaśatru. Rājagṛha is also remembered as the location where the first Buddhist monastic council was held after the Buddha Śākyamuni passed into parinirvāṇa. Now known as Rajgir and located in the modern Indian state of Bihar.

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­70
  • 2.­40-41
  • 2.­45
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­355-356
  • 2.­375
  • 2.­390-391
  • 2.­393
  • 2.­396
  • 2.­405
  • 2.­409-410
  • 2.­416-417
  • 2.­421
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­4
  • 3.­7-8
  • 3.­10
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­15
  • 3.­17-19
  • 3.­22-23
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­28
  • 3.­35
  • 3.­53
  • 6.­265
  • 6.­275
  • 9.­1621
  • 9.­1727
  • 9.­1859
  • 9.­1862-1863
  • 9.­1905
  • 10.­54
  • n.­314
  • n.­343
  • n.­450
  • n.­935
  • g.­71
  • g.­134
  • g.­278
g.­517

Rājyavardhana

Wylie:
  • rgyal srid ’phel
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་སྲིད་འཕེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājyavardhana

An elephant. See also n.­776.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­723
  • 9.­728
  • n.­776
g.­518

Rājyavardhana

Wylie:
  • rgyal srid ’phel ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་སྲིད་འཕེལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājyavardhana

A city.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1430
  • n.­912
g.­519

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­47
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­631
  • 9.­636
  • 9.­679
  • 9.­684
  • 9.­1779
  • g.­520
g.­520

rākṣasī

Wylie:
  • srin mo
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasī

A female rākṣasa, a class of flesh-eating demons.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­635
  • 9.­638
  • 9.­683
  • 9.­686
  • 9.­950
  • 9.­954
  • 9.­961
  • 9.­963
  • n.­444
  • n.­822
g.­521

Rāṣṭrapāla

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor skyong
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྐྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • rāṣṭrapāla

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 74 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­50
  • 7.­52
  • 7.­55-75
  • 7.­77-80
  • 7.­82-83
  • 7.­85-86
  • 7.­92-96
  • 7.­98-100
  • 7.­102-112
  • 7.­114
  • 7.­116-119
  • 7.­121-123
  • 7.­125-127
  • 7.­129-131
  • 7.­146
  • 9.­1875-1876
  • 9.­1902-1904
  • n.­366
  • n.­370
  • n.­983
  • n.­992
g.­522

Ratnacūḍa

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnacūḍa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1464
  • 9.­1506
g.­523

Ratnaśaila

Wylie:
  • rin chen ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśaila

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1455
  • 9.­1506
g.­524

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར།
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­178
  • 3.­183
  • 3.­185
  • 3.­187-201
  • 9.­1412
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­158
  • n.­907-908
  • g.­153
  • g.­715
g.­525

Reed Merchant

Wylie:
  • ’dam bu’i tshong pa
Tibetan:
  • འདམ་བུའི་ཚོང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

(1) A wandering mendicant. (2) A mendicant living in Nālandā.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­56-58
  • 3.­60
  • 3.­64
  • 3.­74-75
g.­526

Reṇu

Wylie:
  • rdul phran
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ་ཕྲན།
Sanskrit:
  • reṇu

One of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1281
  • 9.­1284
  • 9.­1289-1293
  • 9.­1296-1297
  • 9.­1299-1300
  • 9.­1304
  • 9.­1324-1326
  • 9.­1344
  • 9.­1350
  • n.­896
g.­527

resin

Wylie:
  • trang chu
Tibetan:
  • ཏྲང་ཆུ།
Sanskrit:
  • jatu

Five kinds of resin that are used as medicines.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­15
g.­528

Retuka

Wylie:
  • re tu ka
Tibetan:
  • རེ་ཏུ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village or town. See also n.­414.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­222
  • g.­157
g.­529

Revata

Wylie:
  • nam gru
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་གྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • revata

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83
  • 1.­86
  • 1.­91-92
  • 9.­2292-2293
  • 9.­2324-2325
  • 9.­2504
  • n.­36
  • g.­530
g.­530

Revata the Doubter

Wylie:
  • nam gru som nyi can
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་གྲུ་སོམ་ཉི་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • kāṅkṣārevata

An nickname of Revata, a disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­83
g.­531

Reviving

Wylie:
  • yang sos
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་སོས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjīva

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­532

Roca

Wylie:
  • ’od ldan
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • roca

An uncle of Ānanda.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­198
  • 11.­202
  • 11.­204-207
  • 11.­212-214
  • n.­1180
g.­533

Rohiṇī

Wylie:
  • snar ma
Tibetan:
  • སྣར་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • rohiṇī

The wife of the Moon.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­663
g.­534

Rohitaka

Wylie:
  • ro hi ta ka
Tibetan:
  • རོ་ཧི་ཏ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • rohitaka

A village or town.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 7.­200
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­271
  • n.­128
  • n.­253
g.­535

Roruka

Wylie:
  • ma rungs pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་རུངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • roruka

A city.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1352
g.­536

Ṛṣi Gargā Pond

Wylie:
  • drang srong gar ga’i rdzing
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་གར་གའི་རྫིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gargā puṣkariṇī

A pond in Campā

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­32
  • 2.­38-39
g.­537

rṣi Guṃjika’s abode

Wylie:
  • drang srong sgra sgrogs kyi gnas
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་སྒྲ་སྒྲོགས་ཀྱི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṃjikāvasatha

A place near Nādikā, a village in the country of Vṛji.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­221
g.­538

Ṛṣidatta

Wylie:
  • drang srong sbyin
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣidatta

A lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­48
  • n.­591
g.­539

Ṛṣivadana

Wylie:
  • drang srong smra ba
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་སྨྲ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣivadana

A park near Vārāṇasī where the Buddha gave the first sermon.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 3.­267
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2350
  • 9.­2408
g.­540

Rudanī

Wylie:
  • ngud mo
Tibetan:
  • ངུད་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rudanī

A river.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-639
  • 9.­685-687
  • n.­752
g.­541

rule of training

Wylie:
  • bslab pa’i gzhi
Tibetan:
  • བསླབ་པའི་གཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • sikṣāpada

The prātimokṣa rules for monks and nuns, ten rules for novices, six rules for female probationers, and five rules for laypeople.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­85
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­322
  • 2.­358
  • 2.­386
  • 6.­58
  • 7.­220
  • 7.­231-234
  • 7.­248
  • 8.­82
  • 8.­246
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­298
  • 9.­40
  • 9.­328-329
  • 10.­98
  • 10.­105
  • 11.­32-33
  • 11.­35-36
  • n.­423
  • n.­496
  • n.­1107
g.­542

Śacī

Wylie:
  • bde sogs
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་སོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śacī

The wife of Indra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­89
  • 9.­592
g.­543

sadāmatta

Wylie:
  • rtag tu myos
Tibetan:
  • རྟག་ཏུ་མྱོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sadāmatta

“Always Excited,” a class of divine beings who live on Mount Sumeru.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­205
  • 9.­212-213
  • n.­638
  • n.­645
g.­544

Śādvalā

Wylie:
  • gsing ma
Tibetan:
  • གསིང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śādvalā

A village or town.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­248
g.­545

saffron

Wylie:
  • ngur smrig
Tibetan:
  • ངུར་སྨྲིག
Sanskrit:
  • kāṣāya

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­201
  • 2.­215
  • 4.­88
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­57
  • 7.­50
  • 7.­100
  • 7.­104-108
  • 7.­110
  • 7.­112-113
  • 7.­117
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­242
  • 8.­248
  • 8.­260
  • 9.­1039-1041
  • 9.­1046
  • 9.­1081
  • 9.­1083
  • 9.­1258
  • 9.­1260
  • 9.­1322
  • 9.­1333
  • 9.­1338-1344
  • 9.­2252
  • 11.­49-50
  • 11.­82
g.­546

Sahā World

Wylie:
  • mi mjed
Tibetan:
  • མི་མཇེད།
Sanskrit:
  • sahāloka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name for our world system, the universe of a thousand million worlds, or trichiliocosm, in which the four-continent world is located. Each trichiliocosm is ruled by a god Brahmā; thus, in this context, he bears the title of Sahāṃpati, Lord of Sahā. The world system of Sahā, or Sahālokadhātu, is also described as the buddhafield of the Buddha Śākyamuni where he teaches the Dharma to beings.

The name Sahā possibly derives from the Sanskrit √sah, “to bear, endure, or withstand.” It is often interpreted as alluding to the inhabitants of this world being able to endure the suffering they encounter. The Tibetan translation, mi mjed, follows along the same lines. It literally means “not painful,” in the sense that beings here are able to bear the suffering they experience.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­49
  • 6.­51
  • 8.­266-267
  • 9.­1309
  • 9.­1323-1324
  • g.­104
g.­547

Saikata

Wylie:
  • bye ma skyes
Tibetan:
  • བྱེ་མ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • saikata

A monk.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­61-63
  • 1.­67-69
g.­548

Śaila

Wylie:
  • ri bo
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śaila

(1) A ṛṣi. (2) A ṛṣi who is a nephew of Kaineya.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­46-52
  • 11.­68
  • 11.­71
  • 11.­109
  • 11.­112
  • 11.­115
  • 11.­118-119
  • 11.­122
  • 11.­125-126
  • 11.­133
  • 11.­135-136
  • 11.­141
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­177
g.­549

Śailagāthā

Wylie:
  • ri gnas pa’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • རི་གནས་པའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śailagāthā

A verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins and preserved in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­198
  • n.­73
  • n.­1126
g.­550

Śaivala

Wylie:
  • dpal skyed
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་སྐྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • śaivala

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1767-1768
  • 9.­1783
  • 9.­1787-1789
g.­551

Sāketā

Wylie:
  • gnas bcas
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བཅས།
Sanskrit:
  • sāketā

A country mentioned in the story of the physician Ātreya and the story of King Māndhātṛ.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­71
  • 9.­9
  • 9.­16
  • 9.­149
  • n.­568-569
g.­552

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the gods in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three (trāyastriṃśa). Alternatively known as Indra, the deity that is called “lord of the gods” dwells on the summit of Mount Sumeru and wields the thunderbolt. The Tibetan translation brgya byin (meaning “one hundred sacrifices”) is based on an etymology that śakra is an abbreviation of śata-kratu, one who has performed a hundred sacrifices. Each world with a central Sumeru has a Śakra. Also known by other names such as Kauśika, Devendra, and Śacipati.

Located in 105 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 3.­146-148
  • 3.­150-151
  • 3.­157-158
  • 3.­160
  • 3.­183
  • 3.­185-187
  • 3.­291
  • 3.­317
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­51-54
  • 4.­58-60
  • 4.­88-89
  • 8.­142
  • 8.­266-267
  • 9.­84-85
  • 9.­88
  • 9.­90
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­95
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­174
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­180
  • 9.­191
  • 9.­195
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­235-237
  • 9.­239-240
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­258-260
  • 9.­337-339
  • 9.­347
  • 9.­392-393
  • 9.­396
  • 9.­444
  • 9.­446-449
  • 9.­453-454
  • 9.­456
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­811
  • 9.­813
  • 9.­824-826
  • 9.­829
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­895
  • 9.­902-903
  • 9.­905-907
  • 9.­930-931
  • 9.­937
  • 9.­1099
  • 9.­1129
  • 9.­1135
  • 9.­1203-1204
  • 9.­1523
  • 9.­1852
  • 9.­2190
  • 10.­75
  • 11.­5
  • n.­625
  • n.­629
  • n.­632
  • n.­643
  • n.­654
  • n.­675
  • n.­694
  • n.­716
  • n.­793
  • n.­803
  • g.­247
  • g.­303
  • g.­390
g.­553

Śakuna

Wylie:
  • la nye can
Tibetan:
  • ལ་ཉེ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakuna

A king in the past. Also referred to as “Mahāśakuni.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­337
  • g.­362
g.­554

Śākya

Wylie:
  • shAkya
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Name of the ancient tribe in which the Buddha was born as a prince; their kingdom was based to the east of Kośala, in the foothills near the present-day border of India and Nepal, with Kapilavastu as its capital.

Located in 65 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 2.­39
  • 2.­201
  • 3.­30
  • 5.­3
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­18-24
  • 6.­32
  • 6.­38
  • 6.­141
  • 6.­242
  • 6.­276
  • 7.­175
  • 7.­183
  • 7.­198
  • 8.­39
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­92
  • 9.­78
  • 9.­1390
  • 9.­1605
  • 9.­1619
  • 9.­1697
  • 9.­1735
  • 9.­1774
  • 9.­1968
  • 9.­1987
  • 9.­1991
  • 9.­2016
  • 9.­2047
  • 9.­2049
  • 9.­2070
  • 9.­2129-2130
  • 9.­2134-2135
  • 9.­2145
  • 9.­2164
  • 9.­2217
  • 9.­2257-2258
  • 9.­2264
  • 9.­2266
  • 9.­2317
  • 9.­2441
  • 9.­2444
  • 9.­2490
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­84
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­117
  • 11.­220
  • n.­250
  • n.­1065
  • g.­245
  • g.­292
g.­555

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

(1) The present Buddha. (2) A buddha in the past. (3) A buddha in the future.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­173
  • 8.­110
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1386
  • 9.­1388
  • 9.­1392
  • 9.­1394
  • 9.­1408
  • 9.­1421
  • 9.­1443
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2106
  • 9.­2223
  • 11.­35
  • n.­157
  • n.­916
  • g.­200
  • g.­359
  • g.­384
  • g.­393
  • g.­417
  • g.­515
  • g.­554
  • g.­626
  • g.­631
g.­556

Sālā

Wylie:
  • sa la
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sālā

A village.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­71
  • 4.­73-75
  • 4.­78
  • 9.­2345
  • 9.­2351
  • n.­208
  • n.­1042
g.­557

Sālabalā

Wylie:
  • sa la stobs
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལ་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sālabalā

A village. See also n.­567.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­6
  • n.­567
g.­558

Sālibalā

Wylie:
  • sa la’i stobs
Tibetan:
  • ས་ལའི་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • sālibalā

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­7
  • n.­567
g.­559

śālmali trees

Wylie:
  • shal ma li
Tibetan:
  • ཤལ་མ་ལི།
Sanskrit:
  • śālmali

Bombax heptaphyllum or Salmalia malabarica (a lofty and thorny tree).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­638
  • 9.­686
g.­560

samādhi

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

In this text:

Also rendered in this translation as “meditation.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1576
  • n.­955
  • n.­1009
  • g.­394
g.­561

samāpatti

Wylie:
  • snyoms par ’jug pa
Tibetan:
  • སྙོམས་པར་འཇུག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • samāpatti

A kind of meditative concentration.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1576
  • n.­955
g.­562

Saṃdhāna

Wylie:
  • ’dum byed
Tibetan:
  • འདུམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃdhāna

A householder who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­918-920
  • 9.­923
  • 9.­926-927
  • 9.­930
  • 9.­933
  • 9.­937
g.­563

Śamitāri

Wylie:
  • dgra zhi mdzad pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་ཞི་མཛད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śamitāri

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1447
  • 9.­1506
g.­564

Saṃjaya

Wylie:
  • yang dag rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjaya

A young Brahmin, son of Lucky.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­193-195
  • 6.­232-234
  • g.­347
g.­565

Saṃjayī Vairaṭṭīputra

Wylie:
  • smra ’dod kyi bu mo’i bu yang dag rgyal ba can
Tibetan:
  • སྨྲ་འདོད་ཀྱི་བུ་མོའི་བུ་ཡང་དག་རྒྱལ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃjayī vairaṭṭīputra

One of the six teachers at the time of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­59
g.­566

Sāṃkāśya

Wylie:
  • gsal ba
Tibetan:
  • གསལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāṃkāśya

A city where the Buddha descended from the heaven of the Thirty-Three gods.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1526
g.­567

saṃsāra’s ever-revolving five cycles

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba’i ’khor lo cha lnga pa g.yo ba dang mi g.yo ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བའི་འཁོར་ལོ་ཆ་ལྔ་པ་གཡོ་བ་དང་མི་གཡོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The five realms of gods, humans, animals, spirits, and hell-denizens. “Ever-revolving” is an adjective applied to saṃsāra with its constant fluctuations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­306
g.­568

Saṃyuktāgama

Wylie:
  • yang dag par ldan pa’i lung
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་ལྡན་པའི་ལུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃyuktāgama

The Connected Discourses, one of the four divisions of the Sūtrapiṭaka.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • n.­186
  • n.­240-241
  • n.­344
  • n.­355
  • n.­361
  • n.­481
  • g.­648
  • g.­649
g.­569

Śaṅkara

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • śaṅkara

An epithet of Śiva.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­247
g.­570

Śaṅkha

Wylie:
  • dung
Tibetan:
  • དུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śaṅkha

(1) A king in the future. (2) A ṛṣi.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­168-172
  • 3.­195
  • 9.­1561
  • 9.­1565
  • 9.­1567-1570
  • n.­152-153
  • g.­111
  • g.­733
g.­571

Saptaparṇa

Wylie:
  • lo ma bdun pa
Tibetan:
  • ལོ་མ་བདུན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • saptaparṇa

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­178
  • n.­314
g.­572

Śara

Wylie:
  • mda’ can
Tibetan:
  • མདའ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • śara

A yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­76
g.­573

Sāraka

Wylie:
  • sran can
Tibetan:
  • སྲན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sāraka

A hunter.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­551
g.­574

Sarayū

Wylie:
  • sar yu
Tibetan:
  • སར་ཡུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarayū

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­227
g.­575

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A disciple of a buddha in the past. (3) A disciple of a Buddha in the future.

Located in 50 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­97
  • 1.­99
  • 8.­141-142
  • 8.­196-197
  • 8.­230
  • 8.­238
  • 8.­259-260
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­1386
  • 9.­1531-1533
  • 9.­1535-1538
  • 9.­1540-1541
  • 9.­1543
  • 9.­1550
  • 9.­1559
  • 9.­1565
  • 9.­1570
  • 9.­1576-1577
  • 9.­1597
  • 9.­1608-1610
  • 9.­2383
  • 9.­2387
  • 10.­47
  • 10.­49-50
  • 10.­53
  • 10.­56
  • 11.­57-59
  • 11.­64-65
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­180
  • n.­117
  • n.­496
  • g.­687
g.­576

śarkarā

Wylie:
  • sha kha ra
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཁ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • śarkarā

Candied sugar.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 2.­133-134
  • 10.­101
  • n.­1103
g.­577

Sarpadāsa

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • sarpadāsa

A disciple of the Buddha. Note that this name rendered as sprul khol in the Degé Kangyur.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1958-1959
  • 9.­1987-1989
g.­578

Sarvābhibhū

Wylie:
  • thams cad zil gnon
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་ཟིལ་གནོན།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvābhibhū

A buddha in the past.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­263-264
  • 9.­266
  • 9.­268
  • 9.­1463
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2293
  • 9.­2480
g.­579

Sarvajñādeva

Wylie:
  • sarba dz+nyA de ba
Tibetan:
  • སརྦ་ཛྙཱ་དེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvajñādeva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to traditional accounts, the Kashmiri preceptor Sarvajñādeva was among the “one hundred” paṇḍitas invited by Trisong Detsen (r. 755–797/800) to assist with the translation of the Buddhist scriptures into Tibetan. Sarvajñādeva assisted in the translation of more than twenty-three works, including numerous sūtras and the first translations of Śāntideva’s Bodhicaryāvatāra and Nāgārjuna’s Suhṛllekha. Much of this work was likely carried out in the first years of the ninth century and may have continued into the reign of Ralpachen (ral pa can), who ascended the throne in 815 and died in 838 or 841 ᴄᴇ.

In this text:

One of the translators of the Tibetan Vinayavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­6
g.­580

Sarvaṃdada

Wylie:
  • thams cad gtong
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་གཏོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvaṃdada

A name given to Viśvantara, a prince who was the Buddha in a former life. See also n.­775.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­720
  • 9.­725
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­844
  • 9.­848
  • 9.­852
  • 9.­869
  • 9.­873
  • 9.­890
  • n.­773
  • n.­775
g.­581

Sarvārtha­siddha

Wylie:
  • don kun sgrub pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་ཀུན་སྒྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvārtha­siddha

A buddha in the past.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1456
  • 9.­1476
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­931
g.­582

Śastrabhū

Wylie:
  • ral gris ’tsho
Tibetan:
  • རལ་གྲིས་འཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śastrabhū

One of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1350
g.­583

Satyadṛś

Wylie:
  • bden pa mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་པ་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • satyadṛś

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­584

Sauvīra

Wylie:
  • stang zil can
Tibetan:
  • སྟང་ཟིལ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sauvīra

A country.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1352
g.­585

sauvīraka

Wylie:
  • skyur khu
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱུར་ཁུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sauvīraka

Sour gruel.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­97-98
g.­586

scabies

Wylie:
  • g.yan pa’i nad
Tibetan:
  • གཡན་པའི་ནད།
Sanskrit:
  • kacchūroga

Any cutaneous disease.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­38
g.­587

Scream

Wylie:
  • ngu ’bod
Tibetan:
  • ངུ་འབོད།
Sanskrit:
  • raurava

One of the eight hot hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
  • 9.­1731
g.­588

self-awakened one

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyekabuddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 87 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 2.­315
  • 3.­123
  • 3.­125
  • 3.­130-131
  • 3.­273
  • 3.­296
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­322
  • 4.­22
  • 6.­280-283
  • 7.­151-152
  • 7.­159
  • 8.­9-13
  • 8.­15-17
  • 9.­69
  • 9.­120-123
  • 9.­302
  • 9.­406-410
  • 9.­920
  • 9.­922-923
  • 9.­926-928
  • 9.­930-933
  • 9.­937
  • 9.­1576
  • 9.­1582
  • 9.­1598
  • 9.­1614
  • 9.­1728
  • 9.­1773
  • 9.­1917
  • 9.­1924
  • 9.­1934
  • 9.­2010
  • 9.­2042
  • 9.­2055
  • 9.­2090
  • 9.­2102
  • 9.­2120
  • 9.­2347-2351
  • 9.­2377
  • 9.­2382
  • 9.­2470
  • 9.­2587-2589
  • 9.­2592
  • 9.­2595
  • 10.­122
  • 10.­124
  • 10.­131
  • 10.­140
  • n.­608
  • n.­667
  • n.­1067
  • g.­139
  • g.­611
  • g.­642
  • g.­646
g.­589

Sena

Wylie:
  • sde can
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sena

A minister, brother of Susena.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1016
  • n.­843
  • g.­647
g.­590

sense sphere

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­344
  • 2.­352
  • 3.­214-215
  • 3.­265
  • 8.­246
  • 8.­276
  • 9.­403
g.­591

Separating

Wylie:
  • dgar ba
Tibetan:
  • དགར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A nāga.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­249
g.­592

seven limbs of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi yan lag bdun
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཡན་ལག་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta bodhyaṅgāni

Part of the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­8
  • 8.­88-89
  • 11.­146
  • n.­1163
g.­593

seven treasures

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna bdun
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta ratnāni

Seven kinds of treasures of a wheel-turning king, which are the precious chakra, elephant, horse, jewel, woman, householder, and minister.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­116
  • 3.­118
  • 3.­168
  • 3.­172
  • 4.­36
  • 6.­11
  • 8.­148
  • 9.­151
  • 9.­171
  • 9.­176-177
  • 9.­179-180
  • 9.­182-183
  • 9.­193-194
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­249
  • 9.­275-276
  • 9.­305
  • 9.­426
  • 9.­617
  • 9.­2311
  • 11.­140
  • n.­453
  • n.­503
  • n.­667
  • n.­674
  • n.­1163
g.­594

Śibi

Wylie:
  • shi bi
Tibetan:
  • ཤི་བི།
Sanskrit:
  • śibi

A king who is the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1491
g.­595

Sikatin

Wylie:
  • bye ma can
Tibetan:
  • བྱེ་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sikatin

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­14
  • n.­228
g.­596

Śikhin

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • śikhin

A name common to thirty buddhas in the past. See also n.­912.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1430
  • 9.­1432
  • 9.­1434
  • 9.­1481
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­912
g.­597

Siṃha

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha

(1) A buddha in the past. (2) A general.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1427
  • 10.­24
  • n.­929
g.­598

Sītā

Wylie:
  • si ta
Tibetan:
  • སི་ཏ།
Sanskrit:
  • sītā

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1529
g.­599

Śiva

Wylie:
  • zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śiva

Major deity in the pantheon of the classical Indian religious traditions.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 9.­569
  • 9.­978
  • 9.­1135
  • n.­716
  • n.­830
  • g.­253
  • g.­569
g.­600

six perfections

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa drug
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣaṭ pāramitāḥ

The practice of the bodhisattva, which consists of giving, morality, patience, effort, concentration, and wisdom.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­745
  • 9.­1497
  • 10.­75
g.­601

Śobhita

Wylie:
  • mdzes ldan
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • śobhita

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1630-1631
  • 9.­1635
  • 9.­1647-1649
g.­602

South Pañcāla

Wylie:
  • lho phyogs kyi lnga len pa
Tibetan:
  • ལྷོ་ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ལྔ་ལེན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dakṣiṇapañcāla

One of the two kings of the country of Pañcāla.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­534
  • 9.­536-537
  • 9.­541
  • 9.­543
  • 9.­558
g.­603

śramaṇa

Wylie:
  • dge sbyong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śramaṇa

A term used broadly to denote a spiritual practitioner.

Located in 168 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­62
  • 2.­53-54
  • 2.­201
  • 2.­234
  • 2.­296
  • 3.­60-61
  • 3.­74
  • 3.­86
  • 3.­91
  • 3.­96
  • 3.­227
  • 4.­74-75
  • 4.­78
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­111
  • 6.­3
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­76-96
  • 6.­136-139
  • 6.­155
  • 6.­180
  • 6.­186
  • 6.­192
  • 6.­197
  • 6.­220-221
  • 6.­223-225
  • 6.­227
  • 6.­233
  • 6.­242
  • 6.­271
  • 6.­282
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­24
  • 7.­71
  • 7.­145
  • 7.­162-163
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­170
  • 7.­172
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­176
  • 7.­178
  • 8.­18-19
  • 8.­62-64
  • 8.­83-84
  • 8.­92
  • 8.­95
  • 8.­113-114
  • 8.­120-121
  • 8.­123
  • 8.­132-134
  • 8.­192
  • 8.­235-236
  • 8.­246
  • 8.­277
  • 8.­282
  • 8.­297
  • 9.­78
  • 9.­114-115
  • 9.­301
  • 9.­515
  • 9.­522
  • 9.­535
  • 9.­540
  • 9.­568
  • 9.­578
  • 9.­757
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­839
  • 9.­894
  • 9.­910
  • 9.­1508
  • 9.­1510
  • 9.­1512-1516
  • 9.­1598
  • 9.­1625
  • 9.­1707-1708
  • 9.­1729
  • 9.­1758-1759
  • 9.­1772
  • 9.­1803-1804
  • 9.­1913
  • 9.­1990
  • 9.­2091
  • 9.­2122
  • 9.­2198
  • 9.­2321
  • 9.­2385-2386
  • 9.­2396-2397
  • 9.­2472
  • 9.­2480
  • 9.­2522-2523
  • 9.­2527-2528
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­68
  • 10.­71
  • 10.­82-83
  • 10.­89
  • 10.­95
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­139
  • 11.­220
  • n.­34
  • n.­267
  • n.­323
  • n.­481
  • n.­667
  • n.­806
  • n.­1162
g.­604

Śrāvastī

Wylie:
  • mnyan yod
Tibetan:
  • མཉན་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvastī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

During the life of the Buddha, Śrāvastī was the capital city of the powerful kingdom of Kośala, ruled by King Prasenajit, who became a follower and patron of the Buddha. It was also the hometown of Anāthapiṇḍada, the wealthy patron who first invited the Buddha there, and then offered him a park known as Jetavana, Prince Jeta’s Grove, which became one of the first Buddhist monasteries. The Buddha is said to have spent about twenty-five rainy seasons with his disciples in Śrāvastī, thus it is named as the setting of numerous events and teachings. It is located in present-day Uttar Pradesh in northern India.

Located in 61 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­23
  • 1.­37
  • 1.­52
  • 1.­60
  • 1.­82-83
  • 1.­90-91
  • 1.­96
  • 2.­26-27
  • 2.­44-46
  • 2.­83
  • 2.­195
  • 2.­202
  • 2.­207
  • 2.­232
  • 2.­263-264
  • 3.­6-7
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­17
  • 6.­238-239
  • 6.­244
  • 6.­248-249
  • 7.­65
  • 7.­70
  • 7.­169
  • 9.­17-18
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­1508
  • 9.­1526-1527
  • 9.­1930
  • 9.­2506-2507
  • 10.­2-3
  • 10.­27
  • 10.­33
  • 10.­36
  • 10.­39
  • 10.­41
  • 10.­44
  • 10.­46
  • 10.­49
  • 10.­53-55
  • 10.­57
  • 10.­68
  • 11.­217
  • n.­561
g.­605

Śreṇya Bimbisāra

Wylie:
  • bzo sbyangs gzugs can snying po
Tibetan:
  • བཟོ་སྦྱངས་གཟུགས་ཅན་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śreṇya bimbisāra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The king of Magadha and a great patron of the Buddha. His birth coincided with the Buddha’s, and his father, King Mahāpadma, named him “Essence of Gold” after mistakenly attributing the brilliant light that marked the Buddha’s birth to the birth of his son by Queen Bimbī (“Goldie”). Accounts of Bimbisāra’s youth and life can be found in The Chapter on Going Forth (Toh 1-1, Pravrajyāvastu).

King Śreṇya Bimbisāra first met with the Buddha early on, when the latter was the wandering mendicant known as Gautama. Impressed by his conduct, Bimbisāra offered to take Gautama into his court, but Gautama refused, and Bimbisāra wished him success in his quest for awakening and asked him to visit his palace after he had achieved his goal. One account of this episode can be found in the sixteenth chapter of The Play in Full (Toh 95, Lalitavistara). There are other accounts where the two meet earlier on in childhood; several episodes can be found, for example, in The Hundred Deeds (Toh 340, Karmaśataka). Later, after the Buddha’s awakening, Bimbisāra became one of his most famous patrons and donated to the saṅgha the Bamboo Grove, Veṇuvana, at the outskirts of the capital of Magadha, Rājagṛha, where he built residences for the monks. Bimbisāra was imprisoned and killed by his own son, the prince Ajātaśatru, who, influenced by Devadatta, sought to usurp his father’s throne.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­41-44
  • 2.­361
  • 2.­363-364
  • 2.­376
  • 9.­1859-1860
  • 9.­2019
  • 9.­2021
  • 10.­55
  • 11.­46-47
  • n.­123
  • n.­173
  • g.­17
  • g.­266
  • g.­697
g.­606

Śreṣṭhin

Wylie:
  • gtso bo
Tibetan:
  • གཙོ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śreṣṭhin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1446
  • 9.­1506
g.­607

Śrīsaṃbhava

Wylie:
  • dpal ’byung
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śrīsaṃbhava

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1415
  • 9.­1506
g.­608

Śroṇāparāntaka

Wylie:
  • gro bzhin skyes gnas pa’i yul gyi mtha’
  • gro bzhin skyes gnas pa’i mtha’
Tibetan:
  • གྲོ་བཞིན་སྐྱེས་གནས་པའི་ཡུལ་གྱི་མཐའ།
  • གྲོ་བཞིན་སྐྱེས་གནས་པའི་མཐའ།
Sanskrit:
  • śroṇāparāntaka

A country.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­221-230
  • 2.­232-233
  • 2.­253
  • n.­80
g.­609

Śrughnā

Wylie:
  • yul srug na
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་སྲུག་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • śrughnā

A country.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­161-162
g.­610

Stavakarṇin

Wylie:
  • rgya skegs kyi rna rgyan can
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་སྐེགས་ཀྱི་རྣ་རྒྱན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • stavakarṇin

Another name of Bhavatrāta, a half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­109
  • 2.­283
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­317
g.­611

Stavārha

Wylie:
  • bstod ’os
Tibetan:
  • བསྟོད་འོས།
Sanskrit:
  • stavārha

A self-awakened one in the future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­151
g.­612

Sthālisugandha

Wylie:
  • snod dri zhim
Tibetan:
  • སྣོད་དྲི་ཞིམ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthālisugandha

The name of Prince Kuśa disguised as a cook.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­371
g.­613

Sthavira

Wylie:
  • gnas brtan
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བརྟན།
Sanskrit:
  • sthavira

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1801-1802
  • 9.­1812-1814
  • n.­1000
g.­614

Sthaviragāthā

Wylie:
  • gnas brtan pa’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བརྟན་པའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthaviragāthā

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­615

Sthavirīgāthā

Wylie:
  • gnas brtan ma’i tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བརྟན་མའི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthavirīgāthā

A lost verse text possibly included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­616

Sthūlakoṣṭhaka

Wylie:
  • bang mdzod stug po can
Tibetan:
  • བང་མཛོད་སྟུག་པོ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sthūlakoṣṭhaka

A village in the country of Kuru.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­48-49
  • 7.­51-52
  • 7.­65
  • 7.­70-71
  • 7.­74-75
  • 7.­94-95
  • 7.­98
  • 7.­102
  • 7.­110
  • 7.­112
  • 9.­1880
  • 9.­1883
  • n.­374
  • g.­617
g.­617

Sthūlakoṣṭhaka Forest

Wylie:
  • bang mdzod stug po can gyi tshal
Tibetan:
  • བང་མཛོད་སྟུག་པོ་ཅན་གྱི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A forest near Sthūlakoṣṭhaka, a village in the country of Kuru.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­48-49
  • 7.­70
  • 7.­92-94
  • n.­374
g.­618

sthūlātyaya offense

Wylie:
  • ltung ba sbom po
Tibetan:
  • ལྟུང་བ་སྦོམ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthūlātyaya

The third gravest type of offense for a monk or nun, which requires confession in the presence of another monk or nun. Attempting one of the two gravest offenses, pārājika and saṅghāvaśeṣa, constitutes this category. For instance, if a monk attempts to kill a person and does not succeed, his offense is categorised as sthūlātyaya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­15
g.­619

stream-enterer

Wylie:
  • rgyun du zhugs pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་དུ་ཞུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • srotāpanna

A person who has attained the first of the four stages of spiritual achievement.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­213
  • 9.­318-319
  • 9.­329
g.­620

Subhadra

Wylie:
  • shin tu bzang
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • subhadra

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­621

Śubhakṛtsna

Wylie:
  • dge rgyas
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • śubhakṛtsna

A class of gods who inhabit the ninth heaven of the realm of form.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­622

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • shin du mthong ba
  • shin tu mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་དུ་མཐོང་བ།
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

A class of gods who inhabit the fourth of the “pure abodes.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­623

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • blta na sdug
Tibetan:
  • བལྟ་ན་སྡུག
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1418
  • 9.­1506
g.­624

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • blta na sdug
Tibetan:
  • བལྟ་ན་སྡུག
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

(1) One of the seven golden mountains. (2) The city of the Thirty-Three Gods.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-196
  • 9.­225-226
  • 9.­228
  • n.­632
  • n.­641
g.­625

Sudatta

Wylie:
  • rab sbyin
Tibetan:
  • རབ་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • sudatta

Another name of Anāthapiṇḍada.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­273
g.­626

Śuddhodana

Wylie:
  • zas gtsang
Tibetan:
  • ཟས་གཙང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhodana

(1) A king, the Buddha’s father. (2) The father of a future buddha named Śākyamuni.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­5
  • 5.­11
  • 9.­130
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­2220-2221
g.­627

Sudhana

Wylie:
  • nor bzangs
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • sudhana

A prince and a king who were the Buddha in former lives.

Located in 38 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­527
  • 9.­531
  • 9.­580
  • 9.­590-592
  • 9.­595-598
  • 9.­601-602
  • 9.­604
  • 9.­611-612
  • 9.­614
  • 9.­616
  • 9.­624-625
  • 9.­631
  • 9.­642
  • 9.­674
  • 9.­690
  • 9.­694
  • 9.­696
  • 9.­700
  • 9.­703-708
  • 9.­712-713
  • n.­498
  • n.­867-868
  • g.­409
g.­628

Sudharmā

Wylie:
  • chos bzang
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sudharmā

The meeting hall of the Thirty-Three Gods.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­49
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­58
  • 9.­222
  • 9.­224
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­444
  • 9.­446
  • 9.­453
  • n.­642
g.­629

śūdra

Wylie:
  • dmangs rigs
Tibetan:
  • དམངས་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śūdra

One of the four castes, that of commoners or servants.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­212
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­836
  • 9.­910
  • 11.­50
  • g.­131
g.­630

Sudṛśa

Wylie:
  • gya nom snang ba
Tibetan:
  • གྱ་ནོམ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudṛśa

A class of gods who inhabit the third of the “pure abodes.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­631

sugata

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the standard epithets of the buddhas. A recurrent explanation offers three different meanings for su- that are meant to show the special qualities of “accomplishment of one’s own purpose” (svārthasampad) for a complete buddha. Thus, the Sugata is “well” gone, as in the expression su-rūpa (“having a good form”); he is gone “in a way that he shall not come back,” as in the expression su-naṣṭa-jvara (“a fever that has utterly gone”); and he has gone “without any remainder” as in the expression su-pūrṇa-ghaṭa (“a pot that is completely full”). According to Buddhaghoṣa, the term means that the way the Buddha went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su) and where he went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su).

In this text:

Here it is used as an epithet for the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­74
  • 2.­346
  • 3.­78
  • 3.­140
  • 3.­242
  • 3.­251
  • 3.­262
  • 3.­267
  • 4.­66
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­57
  • 7.­5
  • 7.­218
  • 7.­261
  • 7.­264
  • 8.­73
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­210
  • 8.­232
  • 8.­301
  • 9.­46
  • 9.­110
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­270
  • 9.­1642
  • 9.­1897
  • 9.­2158
  • 9.­2179
  • 9.­2504
  • n.­1067
g.­632

Sujāta

Wylie:
  • legs ’khrungs
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་འཁྲུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • sujāta

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1437
  • 9.­1506
g.­633

Sumāgadhā

Wylie:
  • ma ga dhA bzang mo
Tibetan:
  • མ་ག་དྷཱ་བཟང་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumāgadhā

A pond. See also n.­345.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­265
  • n.­345
g.­634

Sumanas

Wylie:
  • sna ma’i me tog
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་མའི་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • sumanas

(1) A disciple of the Buddha. (2) A buddha in the past.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1438
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1649
  • 9.­1663-1666
g.­635

Sundara

Wylie:
  • rab mdzes
Tibetan:
  • རབ་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sundara

A nāga king.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­391
  • 2.­399-400
  • 2.­402
  • 2.­404
  • 2.­416-417
  • 2.­420
g.­636

Sundarikā

Wylie:
  • mdzes ma
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sundarikā

A female mendicant who falsely accuses the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2352
  • 9.­2361
  • 9.­2474
  • 9.­2479
g.­637

Sunetra

Wylie:
  • spyan mdzes
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sunetra

(1) A buddha in the past. (2) A non-Buddhist teacher, an ascetic.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1237-1240
  • 9.­1279
  • 9.­1419
  • 9.­1436
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­894
g.­638

Sunny

Wylie:
  • nyi ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A woman in Sunrise, sister of Beautiful. See also n.­319.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­188-190
  • g.­75
g.­639

Sunrise

Wylie:
  • ’char ka
Tibetan:
  • འཆར་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village or town in Kosala. See also n.­317.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­179-180
  • 6.­189
  • n.­314
  • n.­316
  • g.­75
  • g.­285
  • g.­638
g.­640

supernormal knowledge

Wylie:
  • mngon par shes pa
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་ཤེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhi­jñā

The six modes of supernormal cognition or ability, namely, clairvoyance, clairaudience, knowledge of the minds of others, remembrance of past lives, the ability to perform miracles, and the knowledge of the destruction of all mental defilements. The first five are considered mundane or worldly and can be attained to some extent by non-Buddhist yogis as well as Buddhist arhats and bodhisattvas. The sixth is considered to be supramundane and can be attained only by Buddhist yogis.

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­23-24
  • 2.­215
  • 2.­277-278
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­120-130
  • 6.­132
  • 8.­60
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­242
  • 8.­248
  • 9.­152
  • 9.­204
  • 9.­413
  • 9.­1100
  • 9.­1133
  • 9.­1195-1197
  • 9.­1243
  • 9.­1253
  • 9.­1785
  • 9.­1941
  • 9.­2023
  • 9.­2074
  • 9.­2107
  • 9.­2165
  • 9.­2214
  • 9.­2267
  • 9.­2365
  • 9.­2476
  • 11.­59
  • 11.­64
  • 11.­104
  • 11.­159
  • n.­293
  • n.­626
  • g.­671
g.­641

Suprabuddha

Wylie:
  • shin tu blo gsa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་བློ་གས།
Sanskrit:
  • suprabuddha

A king and the Buddha’s maternal grandfather (according to Sbhv).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­3
  • n.­232
  • g.­150
g.­642

Supraṇihita

Wylie:
  • shin tu legs smon
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་ལེགས་སྨོན།
Sanskrit:
  • supraṇihita

A future self-awakened one.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­280
g.­643

Supratiṣṭhita

Wylie:
  • rab brtan
  • shin tu rab gnas
Tibetan:
  • རབ་བརྟན།
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རབ་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

(1) A nāga king (rab brtan). (2) The king of banyan trees (shin tu rab gnas).

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1257
  • 10.­49-51
  • 10.­54
  • g.­379
  • g.­380
g.­644

Śūrasena

Wylie:
  • dpa’ sde
Tibetan:
  • དཔའ་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • śūrasena

A country.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­2
  • 8.­18
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­119-120
  • g.­9
  • g.­421
g.­645

Sūrpāraka

Wylie:
  • slo ma lta bu
Tibetan:
  • སློ་མ་ལྟ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrpāraka

A city.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 2.­156
  • 2.­166
  • 2.­168
  • 2.­193-195
  • 2.­258
  • 2.­269-270
  • 2.­274
  • 2.­280
  • 2.­282-283
  • 2.­292
  • 2.­312-313
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­320-321
  • g.­92
  • g.­94
  • g.­95
  • g.­96
  • g.­145
  • g.­511
  • g.­610
  • g.­676
g.­646

Suruci

Wylie:
  • legs smon
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་སྨོན།
Sanskrit:
  • suruci

A self-awakened one.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2377
  • 9.­2470
g.­647

Susena

Wylie:
  • sde bzangs
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • susena

A minister, brother of Sena.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1016-1017
  • n.­843
  • g.­589
g.­648

Sūtra of the Parable of Pole Climbing

Wylie:
  • shing ’dzeg gi shing lta bu’i mdo
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་འཛེག་གི་ཤིང་ལྟ་བུའི་མདོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A sūtra in the section of the path in the Saṃyuktāgama, which corresponds to SĀc 619, SN 47.19, etc.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­14
g.­649

Sūtra of the Parable of the Axe

Wylie:
  • ste’u lta bu’i mdo
Tibetan:
  • སྟེའུ་ལྟ་བུའི་མདོ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A sūtra in the section of the aggregates in the Saṃyuktāgama, which corresponds to SĀc 263, SN 22.101, etc.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­2
g.­650

Suvādin

Wylie:
  • legs gsung
  • gsung snyan
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་གསུང་།
  • གསུང་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • suvādin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1467
  • 9.­1506
g.­651

Suvarṇaprastha

Wylie:
  • gser gyi bre
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་བྲེ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇaprastha

A village or town.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­8
g.­652

Suvarṇāvabhāsa

Wylie:
  • gser du snang ba
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་དུ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇāvabhāsa

A peacock who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­230
  • 11.­232
g.­653

Svāgata

Wylie:
  • legs ’ongs
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་འོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • svāgata

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1703-1704
  • 9.­1719
  • 9.­1723-1726
  • g.­168
g.­654

Śvapāka

Wylie:
  • khyi ’tshed
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱི་འཚེད།
Sanskrit:
  • śvapāka

An outcaste tribe.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­419
g.­655

Śvāsa

Wylie:
  • dbugs ’byin
Tibetan:
  • དབུགས་འབྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śvāsa

A nāga.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­32-36
g.­656

Svāti

Wylie:
  • sa ga
Tibetan:
  • ས་ག
Sanskrit:
  • svāti

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1904-1905
  • 9.­1930-1932
  • 11.­218
  • 11.­224
  • 11.­226-227
  • 11.­232
  • 11.­234
g.­657

Śyāma

Wylie:
  • ljang gu
Tibetan:
  • ལྗང་གུ
Sanskrit:
  • śyāma

A brahmin youth who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1107-1109
  • 9.­1112
  • 9.­1115-1117
  • 9.­1119-1124
  • 9.­1126
  • 9.­1129-1130
g.­658

take formal possession of

Wylie:
  • byin gyis rlob pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱིན་གྱིས་རློབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • adhiṣṭhā-

The formal act of making something one’s own through pronouncement before another monastic.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­22
  • 1.­28-32
  • 1.­98
  • 1.­100-101
  • 10.­108-110
  • 11.­39-41
  • n.­1110
  • n.­1147
g.­659

Tamasā Forest

Wylie:
  • ta ma sa’i tshal
Tibetan:
  • ཏ་མ་སའི་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • tamasāvana

A forest in Mount Uśīra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­215
  • 7.­271
g.­660

Tamonuda

Wylie:
  • mun ’joms pa
  • mun sel
Tibetan:
  • མུན་འཇོམས་པ།
  • མུན་སེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • tamonuda

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1426
  • 9.­1506
g.­661

Tapanī

Wylie:
  • gdungs
Tibetan:
  • གདུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • tapanī

A river.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-639
  • 9.­685-687
  • n.­750
g.­662

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequently used synonym for buddha. According to different explanations, it can be read as tathā-gata, literally meaning “one who has thus gone,” or as tathā-āgata, “one who has thus come.” Gata, though literally meaning “gone,” is a past passive participle used to describe a state or condition of existence. Tatha­(tā), often rendered as “suchness” or “thusness,” is the quality or condition of things as they really are, which cannot be conveyed in conceptual, dualistic terms. Therefore, this epithet is interpreted in different ways, but in general it implies one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past, or one who has manifested the supreme awakening dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence. It is also often used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 107 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­67
  • 2.­211
  • 2.­214
  • 2.­256
  • 2.­305
  • 2.­318
  • 2.­346
  • 3.­115
  • 3.­197
  • 3.­200-201
  • 3.­214
  • 3.­245
  • 3.­250-255
  • 3.­267
  • 4.­9-11
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­34-35
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­97
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­104-107
  • 4.­113
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­15
  • 6.­57
  • 6.­202-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­290
  • 6.­293
  • 7.­31
  • 7.­54
  • 7.­113
  • 7.­117
  • 7.­122
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­130
  • 7.­150
  • 7.­164
  • 7.­271
  • 8.­83
  • 8.­110
  • 8.­117
  • 8.­139
  • 8.­143-144
  • 8.­146
  • 8.­185
  • 8.­188
  • 8.­211
  • 8.­213
  • 8.­231-232
  • 8.­238
  • 9.­64
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­1503
  • 9.­1576
  • 9.­1592
  • 9.­1646
  • 9.­1659
  • 9.­2308
  • 9.­2328
  • 9.­2337
  • 9.­2339
  • 9.­2346
  • 9.­2353
  • 9.­2363
  • 9.­2367
  • 9.­2382
  • 9.­2384
  • 9.­2389
  • 9.­2437
  • 9.­2440
  • 9.­2442
  • 9.­2444
  • 9.­2446
  • 9.­2451
  • 9.­2503
  • 10.­65-66
  • 11.­35
  • 11.­50
  • 11.­77
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­166
  • n.­524
  • n.­934
  • n.­938
g.­663

ten powers

Wylie:
  • stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśa balāni

Ten kinds of a buddha’s cognitive power.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 11.­90
  • n.­464
g.­664

the nāga of Campā

Wylie:
  • yul tsam pa’i klu
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ཙམ་པའི་ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • cāmpeyo nāgaḥ

A nāga.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­33
  • 2.­37-39
g.­665

thirty-seven aspects of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs sum bcu rtsa bdun gyi chos
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས་སུམ་བཅུ་རྩ་བདུན་གྱི་ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta­triṃśad­bodhi­pakṣa­dharmāḥ

Thirty-seven kinds of practices to be accomplished by those who seek awakening.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­123
  • 8.­15
  • n.­188
  • g.­173
  • g.­179
  • g.­180
  • g.­183
  • g.­184
  • g.­189
  • g.­592
g.­666

Thirty-Three

Wylie:
  • sum bcu rtsa gsum
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་བཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trāyastriṃśa

The heaven of the desire realm just above the heaven of the Four Great Kings atop Sumeru.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1238
g.­667

Thirty-Three Gods

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum pa’i lha rnams
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ་པའི་ལྷ་རྣམས།
Sanskrit:
  • devās trayastriṃśāḥ

A class of gods who inhabit the heaven of the desire realm just above the heaven of the Four Great Kings atop Sumeru.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­99
  • 3.­111
  • 3.­240
  • 3.­261
  • 3.­264
  • 3.­269-270
  • 4.­19
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­53
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­88-89
  • 6.­224-225
  • 7.­230
  • 8.­194
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­123
  • 9.­192-193
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­216
  • 9.­218
  • 9.­220
  • 9.­222
  • 9.­224-225
  • 9.­232-234
  • 9.­237
  • 9.­245-246
  • 9.­249
  • 9.­258-260
  • 9.­269
  • 9.­273
  • 9.­444
  • 9.­446
  • 9.­448
  • 9.­453
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­811
  • 9.­826
  • 9.­1584
  • 9.­1995
  • 9.­2276
  • 9.­2312
  • 9.­2537
  • n.­632
  • n.­636
  • n.­642
  • n.­645
  • n.­655
  • g.­474
  • g.­566
  • g.­624
  • g.­628
g.­668

those undergoing training

Wylie:
  • slob pa
Tibetan:
  • སློབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śaikṣa

Those who belong to any of the first to seventh of the eight stages of spiritual achievement, the eighth being that of an arhat, who needs no further training.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­273
  • 3.­296
  • 3.­299
  • 3.­322
  • 6.­7
  • 7.­34
  • 8.­110
g.­669

three bases

Wylie:
  • gnas gsum
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trīṇi sthānāni

Body, speech, and mind.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­270
g.­670

three unshared applications of mindfulness

Wylie:
  • ma ’dres pa gsum dang dran pa nye bar gzhag pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་འདྲེས་པ་གསུམ་དང་དྲན་པ་ཉེ་བར་གཞག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • trīṇi āveṇikāni smṛtyupasthānāni

Mental attitudes peculiar to the Buddha, which are being neither pleased nor displeased whether an audience is responsive, unresponsive, or a mixture of both.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­22
g.­671

threefold knowledge

Wylie:
  • rig pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • རིག་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tisro vidyāḥ

Three supernormal knowledges: the knowledge of divine sight, the knowledge of former lives, and the knowledge of the extinction of impurity.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­236
  • 9.­1796
  • 9.­1994
  • 9.­2002
  • 9.­2321
g.­672

Timisikā

Wylie:
  • ’gran zla ma
Tibetan:
  • འགྲན་ཟླ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • timisikā

A yakṣiṇī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­77
g.­673

Tiṣya

Wylie:
  • skar rgyal
  • rgyal
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་རྒྱལ།
  • རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • tiṣya

A buddha in the past. See also n.­915.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1478-1479
  • 9.­1506
  • n.­915-916
g.­674

Tomara

Wylie:
  • mda’ bo che
Tibetan:
  • མདའ་བོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • tomara

A brahmin who was the chief priest of Vaiśālī.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­29
  • 3.­31-32
  • 3.­35-39
  • 3.­41-47
g.­675

Toyikā

Wylie:
  • chu mangs
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་མངས།
Sanskrit:
  • toyikā

The place where the Buddha showed the skeleton of the Buddha Kāśyapa to monks.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­41-42
  • 9.­70
  • n.­561
  • n.­584
g.­676

Trapukarṇin

Wylie:
  • zha nye’i rna rgyan can
Tibetan:
  • ཞ་ཉེའི་རྣ་རྒྱན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • trapukarṇin

Another name of Bhavanandin, a half brother of Pūrṇa from Sūrpāraka.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­109
  • 2.­283
  • 2.­313
  • 2.­317
g.­677

Triśaṅku

Wylie:
  • phur bu gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕུར་བུ་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • triśaṅku

A king who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­413
  • 9.­416
  • 9.­419
  • 9.­423
  • n.­814
g.­678

Tuṣita

Wylie:
  • dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tuṣita

A class of gods in the desire realm among whom the Bodhisattva is supposed to be born in his penultimate life, before that in which he attains full awakening.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
  • 9.­83
  • 9.­87
  • 9.­96-97
  • 9.­1238
  • 9.­2216
g.­679

Udāna

Wylie:
  • ched du brjod pa
Tibetan:
  • ཆེད་དུ་བརྗོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • udāna

A verse text possibly included in the lost Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­198
g.­680

Ulkāmukha

Wylie:
  • skar mda’i gdong
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མདའི་གདོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ulkāmukha

A son of King Ikṣuvāku.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­28
g.­681

Upacāru

Wylie:
  • nye mdzes
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • upacāru

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­682

Upagupta

Wylie:
  • nye sbas
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་སྦས།
Sanskrit:
  • upagupta

A monk who was predicted by the Buddha to appear in the future.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­6-7
  • 8.­17
  • n.­456
  • g.­222
g.­683

Upālin

Wylie:
  • nye ba ’khor
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བ་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • upālin

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2227-2228
  • 9.­2268-2269
  • 9.­2504
  • 10.­105-106
  • 10.­110-111
  • n.­1033
  • g.­196
g.­684

Upananda

Wylie:
  • nye dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upananda

A nāga king.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­357
  • 7.­25
  • 9.­1530
  • 9.­1538-1539
  • n.­109
  • n.­636
  • g.­215
g.­685

Upāriṣṭa

Wylie:
  • nye bar yid ’ong
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བར་ཡིད་འོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • upāriṣṭa

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­686

Upasena

Wylie:
  • nye sde
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • upasena

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2086-2087
  • 9.­2110-2112
g.­687

Upatiṣya

Wylie:
  • nye rgyal
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • upatiṣya

Another name of Śāriputra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­168
g.­688

Upendra

Wylie:
  • nye dbang po
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • upendra

The younger brother of Indra.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 2.­236
  • 2.­306
  • n.­40
g.­689

Upoṣadha

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong ’phags
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • upoṣadha

A king, the father of King Māndhātṛ.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2-3
  • 9.­9-12
  • 9.­142-143
  • 9.­145-146
  • n.­562-563
g.­690

Urumuṇḍa

Wylie:
  • ri bo rtse mthon
Tibetan:
  • རི་བོ་རྩེ་མཐོན།
Sanskrit:
  • urumuṇḍa

A mountain.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­5
  • 8.­9-10
  • 8.­12
g.­691

Uruvilvā

Wylie:
  • lteng rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ལྟེང་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • uruvilvā

A river on the banks of which the Buddha engaged in ascetic practice before his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­2500
g.­692

Uruvilvā-Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • lteng rgyas ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ལྟེང་རྒྱས་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • uruvilvā-kāśyapa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1814
  • 9.­1822-1824
  • n.­987
g.­693

Utkaṭā

Wylie:
  • shas che ba
Tibetan:
  • ཤས་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • utkaṭā

A village.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­10
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­15
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­38-39
  • 6.­157
g.­694

Uttara

Wylie:
  • dam pa
  • bla ma
Tibetan:
  • དམ་པ།
  • བླ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • uttara

(1) A buddha in the past (dam pa). (2) A young brahmin who was the Buddha in a former life (bla ma).

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­110
  • 9.­1445
  • 9.­1485
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­2391-2392
  • 9.­2394-2395
  • 9.­2397-2401
  • 9.­2403-2407
  • 9.­2435
  • 11.­35
  • n.­493
  • n.­1055
  • n.­1145
g.­695

Vāgīśa

Wylie:
  • ngag dbang
Tibetan:
  • ངག་དབང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vāgīśa

A disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1679
  • 9.­1687-1689
g.­696

Vaibhiḍiṅgī

Wylie:
  • bai bhi Ting gi
Tibetan:
  • བཻ་བྷི་ཊིང་གི
Sanskrit:
  • vaibhiḍiṅgī

A town.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2390
  • 9.­2392
  • 9.­2394
  • 9.­2407
  • 9.­2414-2415
  • 9.­2420
g.­697

Vaidehī

Wylie:
  • lus ’phags ma
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་འཕགས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaidehī

The wife of King Bimbisāra and mother of Ajātaśatru.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­4
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­13-15
  • 3.­19-22
  • 3.­26-27
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­37-38
  • 3.­41
  • 3.­48-50
  • 3.­52-53
  • 3.­107-108
  • 3.­134-136
g.­698

Vairambhya

Wylie:
  • yul dgra mtha’
  • dgra mtha’
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་དགྲ་མཐའ།
  • དགྲ་མཐའ།
Sanskrit:
  • vairambhya

A country.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­112
  • 8.­119-120
  • 8.­122
  • 8.­132-135
  • 8.­139
  • 8.­142
  • 8.­189
  • 8.­193
  • 8.­196
  • 8.­205
  • 8.­223
  • 8.­230
  • 8.­238
  • 9.­2383
  • 9.­2387
  • 9.­2493
  • n.­496
  • n.­512
  • n.­521
  • n.­1053
  • g.­421
g.­699

Vairaṭṭasiṃha

Wylie:
  • smra ’dod kyi seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སྨྲ་འདོད་ཀྱི་སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • vairaṭṭasiṃha

A brahmin.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2523-2528
  • 9.­2532-2536
  • n.­1073
g.­700

Vaiśālī

Wylie:
  • yangs pa can
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśālī

The city of the Licchavis.

Located in 61 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­71
  • 3.­28-32
  • 3.­35-36
  • 3.­38
  • 3.­41-43
  • 3.­45-46
  • 3.­53
  • 3.­108
  • 3.­134-136
  • 3.­218-219
  • 3.­223
  • 3.­229-231
  • 3.­239-241
  • 3.­246
  • 3.­248-249
  • 3.­264-265
  • 3.­272
  • 3.­298
  • 4.­3-4
  • 6.­259
  • 9.­152
  • 9.­2153
  • 9.­2538-2541
  • 9.­2565
  • 9.­2567
  • 9.­2574
  • 9.­2597-2599
  • 10.­23-24
  • n.­114
  • n.­126
  • n.­170
  • n.­177
  • g.­68
  • g.­335
  • g.­339
  • g.­674
g.­701

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa

One of the Four Great Kings and god of wealth.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­92
  • 3.­22
  • 9.­610
  • 9.­613
  • 9.­918
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­15-16
  • 11.­22-23
  • 11.­27
  • 11.­36
  • n.­1140
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­702

vaiśya

Wylie:
  • rje’u rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྗེའུ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśya

One of the four castes, that of merchants.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­21
  • 6.­199-204
  • 6.­208
  • 6.­211
  • 9.­460
  • 9.­836
  • 11.­50
  • g.­131
g.­703

Vajraka

Wylie:
  • rdo rje can
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • vajraka

A mountain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­631
  • 9.­679
g.­704

Vajrapāṇi

Wylie:
  • lag na rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • ལག་ན་རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapāṇi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Vajrapāṇi means “Wielder of the Vajra.” In the Pali canon, he appears as a yakṣa guardian in the retinue of the Buddha. In the Mahāyāna scriptures he is a bodhisattva and one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha.” In the tantras, he is also regarded as an important Buddhist deity and instrumental in the transmission of tantric scriptures.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­36-37
  • 7.­207-208
  • 7.­213-214
  • 7.­225
  • 7.­227-228
  • 7.­235
  • 7.­238-239
  • 7.­266-267
  • 7.­271
  • 10.­97
  • n.­253
  • n.­403
  • n.­424
  • n.­429
  • n.­445
  • n.­447
g.­705

Vakkalin

Wylie:
  • shing gos can
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་གོས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • vakkalin

A ṛṣi who became the Buddha’s disciple. See also n.­100.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­308-309
  • 2.­311
  • n.­100
g.­706

Vakṣu

Wylie:
  • pa k+Shu
Tibetan:
  • པ་ཀྵུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vakṣu

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1529
g.­707

Valaya

Wylie:
  • gdu bu can
Tibetan:
  • གདུ་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • valaya

A village or town. See also n.­335.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­260
  • n.­335
g.­708

Valguka

Wylie:
  • grog mkhar
Tibetan:
  • གྲོག་མཁར།
Sanskrit:
  • valguka

A nāga king.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­356-357
  • 2.­360
  • 2.­364
  • 2.­375
  • 2.­379
  • n.­128
g.­709

Vāmadeva

Wylie:
  • g.yon phyogs lha
Tibetan:
  • གཡོན་ཕྱོགས་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • vāmadeva

A ṛṣi in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­141
g.­710

Vāmaka

Wylie:
  • g.yon phyogs
Tibetan:
  • གཡོན་ཕྱོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vāmaka

A ṛṣi in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­141
g.­711

Vana

Wylie:
  • nags ldan
Tibetan:
  • ནགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • vana

A yakṣa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­76
g.­712

Vārāṇasī

Wylie:
  • bA rA Na sI
Tibetan:
  • བཱ་རཱ་ཎ་སཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • vārāṇasī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Also known as Benares, one of the oldest cities of northeast India on the banks of the Ganges, in modern-day Uttar Pradesh. It was once the capital of the ancient kingdom of Kāśi, and in the Buddha’s time it had been absorbed into the kingdom of Kośala. It was an important religious center, as well as a major city, even during the time of the Buddha. The name may derive from being where the Varuna and Assi rivers flow into the Ganges. It was on the outskirts of Vārāṇasī that the Buddha first taught the Dharma, in the location known as Deer Park (Mṛgadāva). For numerous episodes set in Vārāṇasī, including its kings, see The Hundred Deeds, Toh 340.

Located in 65 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­71
  • 2.­346
  • 3.­170
  • 3.­267-268
  • 7.­154-155
  • 8.­270
  • 8.­286
  • 8.­296
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­414
  • 9.­422
  • 9.­916-918
  • 9.­920
  • 9.­933
  • 9.­968
  • 9.­1000
  • 9.­1016
  • 9.­1106
  • 9.­1134
  • 9.­1156
  • 9.­1159
  • 9.­1162
  • 9.­1185
  • 9.­1195
  • 9.­1208
  • 9.­1224
  • 9.­1226-1227
  • 9.­1232
  • 9.­1352
  • 9.­1561-1562
  • 9.­1751
  • 9.­1768
  • 9.­2044
  • 9.­2141
  • 9.­2228
  • 9.­2241
  • 9.­2243
  • 9.­2347
  • 9.­2364-2366
  • 9.­2368
  • 9.­2407-2408
  • 9.­2585
  • 9.­2588
  • 10.­117
  • 10.­119-120
  • 10.­122
  • 10.­133-134
  • 11.­78
  • 11.­233
  • g.­146
  • g.­539
g.­713

Varśākāra

Wylie:
  • dbyar byed
Tibetan:
  • དབྱར་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • varśākāra

The chief minister of Magadha.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­96-100
  • 3.­104-106
g.­714

Varuṇa

Wylie:
  • chu lha
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa

A god.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 9.­569
  • 9.­978
  • 9.­1135
  • n.­716
g.­715

Vāsava

Wylie:
  • gos sbyin
  • nor lha
Tibetan:
  • གོས་སྦྱིན།
  • ནོར་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • vāsava

(1) A king at the time of the Buddha Ratnaśikhin (gos sbyin). (2) A god (nor lha).

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­246
  • 3.­176
  • 3.­178
  • 3.­180
  • 3.­182
  • 3.­184-185
  • 3.­187-188
  • 3.­190-196
  • 9.­569
  • n.­158
  • n.­830
g.­716

Vasiṣṭha

Wylie:
  • gnas ’jog
Tibetan:
  • གནས་འཇོག
Sanskrit:
  • vasiṣṭha

(1) A ṛṣi in the past. (2) The brother of Bharadvāja, a disciple of the Buddha Vipaśyin. (3) The family name of an old ascetic.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­141
  • 9.­769
  • 9.­2354-2357
  • 9.­2359-2360
  • 9.­2480
  • g.­718
g.­717

Vāsiṣṭha

Wylie:
  • gnas ’jog
Tibetan:
  • གནས་འཇོག
Sanskrit:
  • vāsiṣṭha

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1471
  • 9.­1506
g.­718

Vāsiṣṭha

Wylie:
  • gnas ’jog
Tibetan:
  • གནས་འཇོག
Sanskrit:
  • vāsiṣṭha

The word Vāsiṣṭha, lit. “the descendant of Vasiṣṭha (an ancient ṛṣi),” is used “in polite address to anyone without regard to ancestry” (BHSD q.v.).

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­247-248
  • 4.­93
  • 4.­95
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­104-107
  • 4.­110
  • 7.­179
  • 9.­2542
  • 9.­2566
g.­719

Velāma

Wylie:
  • dus dpog
Tibetan:
  • དུས་དཔོག
Sanskrit:
  • velāma

(1) A brahmin living in the country of King Piṇḍavaṃśa. (2) A brahmin who is the Buddha in a past life.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­313-315
  • 9.­308
  • 9.­314-316
  • 9.­329
  • 9.­331
  • 9.­334
  • 9.­1491
  • n.­557
  • n.­559
  • n.­668
g.­720

Vemacitra

Wylie:
  • thags zangs ris
Tibetan:
  • ཐགས་ཟངས་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • vemacitra

The king of asuras.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­22
g.­721

Veṇu

Wylie:
  • ’od ma can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇu

A village.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­2-4
g.­722

Veṇuyaṣṭikā

Wylie:
  • ’od ma’i dbyug pa can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མའི་དབྱུག་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇuyaṣṭikā

The residence of a king.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­77
  • n.­120
  • n.­129
g.­723

Verses of the Ṛṣi

Wylie:
  • gtsug lag khang gi tshigs su bcad pa
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ལག་ཁང་གི་ཚིགས་སུ་བཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ārṣā gāthā

A series of verses that were supposed to prevent dangers.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­94
g.­724

Vetranadī

Wylie:
  • ’od ma can gyi klung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མ་ཅན་གྱི་ཀླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vetranadī

A river.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­637-638
  • 9.­640
  • 9.­685-686
  • 9.­688
g.­725

viḍālapada

Wylie:
  • pho sum gang
Tibetan:
  • ཕོ་སུམ་གང་།
Sanskrit:
  • viḍālapada

A measure of weight.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­260
g.­726

Videha

Wylie:
  • lus ’phags
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • videha

(1) A country. (2) The continent in the east.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­118
  • 4.­33
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­70-71
  • 9.­175-177
  • 9.­179
  • 9.­182
  • 9.­193
  • 9.­246
  • 9.­258
  • 9.­444
  • 9.­446
  • 9.­1004-1005
  • 9.­1008-1009
  • 9.­1016
  • 9.­1033
  • 9.­1352
  • 9.­2026
  • n.­206
  • n.­629
  • g.­398
g.­727

Vidyākaraprabha

Wylie:
  • bid+yA ka ra pra b+ha
Tibetan:
  • བིདྱཱ་ཀ་ར་པྲ་བྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidyākaraprabha

One of the translators and proofreaders of the Tibetan Vinayavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya from India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • i.­6
g.­728

Vimala

Wylie:
  • dri med
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vimala

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1468
  • 9.­1506
g.­729

Vinataka

Wylie:
  • rnam par ’dud
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་འདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • vinataka

One of the seven golden mountains.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-196
  • n.­632
g.­730

Vipaśyin

Wylie:
  • rnam par gzigs
  • rnam gzigs
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གཟིགས།
  • རྣམ་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vipaśyin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­232-233
  • 8.­238
  • 9.­270-271
  • 9.­273
  • 9.­1480
  • 9.­1506
  • 9.­1651
  • 9.­1667
  • 9.­1681
  • 9.­1790
  • 9.­1842-1843
  • 9.­1854
  • 9.­1858
  • 9.­2038
  • 9.­2176
  • 9.­2180
  • 9.­2354
  • 9.­2385
  • 9.­2387
  • 9.­2491
  • n.­918
  • g.­88
  • g.­716
g.­731

Virūḍhaka

Wylie:
  • ’phags skyes po
  • lus ’phags po
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་སྐྱེས་པོ།
  • ལུས་འཕགས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • virūḍhaka

(1) A general, son of King Prasenajit. (2) One of the Four Great Kings. The Tib. lus ’phags po is probably erroneous; see n.­321 and n.­329.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 6.­193
  • 6.­220-221
  • 6.­234
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­2490
  • 11.­13
  • 11.­16
  • 11.­18-19
  • 11.­25
  • 11.­36
  • n.­321
  • n.­329
  • n.­590
  • n.­960
  • n.­1139
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­732

Virūpākṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi bzang
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • virūpākṣa

One of the Four Great Kings.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • 11.­14
  • 11.­16
  • 11.­20-21
  • 11.­26
  • 11.­36
  • n.­1140
  • g.­185
  • g.­187
g.­733

Viśākhā

Wylie:
  • sa ga
Tibetan:
  • ས་ག
Sanskrit:
  • viśākhā

The chief consort of King Śaṅkha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­172
  • n.­1069
g.­734

Viśākhā Mṛgāramātā

Wylie:
  • ri dags ’dzin gyi ma sa ga
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་འཛིན་གྱི་མ་ས་ག
Sanskrit:
  • viśākhā mṛgāramātā

A lay follower of the Buddha.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­48
  • 9.­2507-2508
  • g.­413
g.­735

Viṣṇu

Wylie:
  • khyab ’jug
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱབ་འཇུག
Sanskrit:
  • viṣṇu

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­2190
  • g.­226
g.­736

Viśvabhū

Wylie:
  • thams cad skyob
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་སྐྱོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvabhū

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1482
  • 9.­1506
g.­737

Viśvabhuj

Wylie:
  • sna tshogs za
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་ཚོགས་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvabhuj

One of the seven kings mentioned in the story of Govinda.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1350
g.­738

Viśvakarman

Wylie:
  • las thams cad pa
Tibetan:
  • ལས་ཐམས་ཅད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvakarman

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­160-161
g.­739

Viśvāmitra

Wylie:
  • thams cad kyi bshes gnyen
  • sna tshogs bshes
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་ཀྱི་བཤེས་གཉེན།
  • སྣ་ཚོགས་བཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvāmitra

(1) A king in the past (thams cad kyi bshes gnyen). (2) A rṣi in the past (sna tshogs bshes).

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­141
  • 9.­715
  • 9.­728
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­842-843
  • 9.­846-848
  • 9.­855
  • 9.­857
  • 9.­883
  • n.­773
  • g.­741
g.­740

Viśvantara

Wylie:
  • thams cad sgrol
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་སྒྲོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvantara

A prince who was the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 48 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­717
  • 9.­719
  • 9.­721
  • 9.­724
  • 9.­728-729
  • 9.­748-749
  • 9.­751
  • 9.­753
  • 9.­757
  • 9.­759
  • 9.­763
  • 9.­769-770
  • 9.­788
  • 9.­816
  • 9.­835
  • 9.­839
  • 9.­843
  • 9.­846
  • 9.­848-851
  • 9.­855-857
  • 9.­868
  • 9.­872
  • 9.­883-885
  • 9.­889
  • 9.­913
  • n.­769
  • n.­775
  • n.­778
  • n.­781-782
  • n.­785
  • n.­791
  • n.­802
  • n.­813
  • g.­255
  • g.­319
  • g.­351
  • g.­580
g.­741

Viśvapurī

Wylie:
  • thams cad ces bya ba’i grong rdal
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་ཅེས་བྱ་བའི་གྲོང་རྡལ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvapurī

The city of King Viśvāmitra.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­715
  • 9.­842
  • 9.­849
  • 9.­883-884
  • 9.­907
g.­742

Vṛji

Wylie:
  • spong byed
Tibetan:
  • སྤོང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛji

A country.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­204
  • 3.­207
  • 3.­218
  • 3.­230-231
  • 3.­239
  • 4.­3-4
  • 4.­73
  • 9.­2538-2540
  • n.­166
  • g.­221
  • g.­537
g.­743

Vuṭaka

Wylie:
  • spong byed
Tibetan:
  • སྤོང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vuṭaka

A name assumed by Prince Kuśa, the Buddha in a former life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­367
g.­744

Water Born

Wylie:
  • chu skyes
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A prince who was the Buddha in a former life. See also n.­869.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1146-1151
  • g.­416
g.­745

Water Jar

Wylie:
  • ril ba spyi blugs
Tibetan:
  • རིལ་བ་སྤྱི་བླུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

The name of a sitting place built for the Buddha in the northern region.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­224
g.­746

Water Lily

Wylie:
  • ut+pala ltar gas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཨུཏྤལ་ལྟར་གས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • utpala

One of the eight cold hells.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­57
  • 4.­18
g.­747

Wearing a Black Costume

Wylie:
  • nag po’i cha byad ’chang
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོའི་ཆ་བྱད་འཆང་།
Sanskrit:
  • —

An elephant.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­54
g.­748

wheel-turning king

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ideal monarch or emperor who, as the result of the merit accumulated in previous lifetimes, rules over a vast realm in accordance with the Dharma. Such a monarch is called a cakravartin because he bears a wheel (cakra) that rolls (vartate) across the earth, bringing all lands and kingdoms under his power. The cakravartin conquers his territory without causing harm, and his activity causes beings to enter the path of wholesome actions. According to Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa, just as with the buddhas, only one cakravartin appears in a world system at any given time. They are likewise endowed with the thirty-two major marks of a great being (mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa), but a cakravartin’s marks are outshined by those of a buddha. They possess seven precious objects: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the wish-fulfilling gem, the queen, the general, and the minister. An illustrative passage about the cakravartin and his possessions can be found in The Play in Full (Toh 95), 3.3–3.13.

Vasubandhu lists four types of cakravartins: (1) the cakravartin with a golden wheel (suvarṇacakravartin) rules over four continents and is invited by lesser kings to be their ruler; (2) the cakravartin with a silver wheel (rūpyacakravartin) rules over three continents and his opponents submit to him as he approaches; (3) the cakravartin with a copper wheel (tāmracakravartin) rules over two continents and his opponents submit themselves after preparing for battle; and (4) the cakravartin with an iron wheel (ayaścakravartin) rules over one continent and his opponents submit themselves after brandishing weapons.

Located in 84 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 2.­256
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­116
  • 3.­131
  • 3.­168
  • 3.­175
  • 3.­191
  • 3.­194-197
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­36
  • 4.­46
  • 6.­11-12
  • 6.­276
  • 6.­284
  • 6.­292
  • 8.­148-151
  • 8.­153-154
  • 8.­156-173
  • 8.­179-181
  • 8.­184
  • 8.­187
  • 8.­197-198
  • 8.­315
  • 9.­275
  • 9.­305
  • 9.­426
  • 9.­437
  • 9.­440
  • 9.­463
  • 9.­527
  • 9.­531
  • 9.­570
  • 9.­971
  • 9.­973-974
  • 9.­1136
  • 11.­93
  • 11.­139
  • n.­48
  • n.­193
  • n.­197-198
  • n.­453
  • n.­501
  • n.­503
  • n.­674
  • n.­1163
  • g.­356
  • g.­366
  • g.­381
  • g.­419
  • g.­447
  • g.­485
  • g.­593
  • g.­749
g.­749

wheel-turning king of power

Wylie:
  • stobs kyi ’khor los sgyur ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ཀྱི་འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bala­cakravartin

A kind of inferior wheel-turning king.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­61
  • 4.­22
  • 9.­396
  • 9.­400
  • 9.­410
g.­750

Where There Is a City

Wylie:
  • grong khyer can
Tibetan:
  • གྲོང་ཁྱེར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A city. See also n.­341.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­264
  • n.­340
g.­751

Where There Is a Well

Wylie:
  • khron pa can
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོན་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­82-83
g.­752

Where There Is Cotton

Wylie:
  • shing bal gyi ’da’ ba can
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་བལ་གྱི་འདའ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­6
g.­753

Where There Is Ground

Wylie:
  • sa can
Tibetan:
  • ས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A village. See also n.­337.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­261
g.­754

wind illness

Wylie:
  • rlung nad
Tibetan:
  • རླུང་ནད།
Sanskrit:
  • vāyvābādhika

A disease caused by an imbalance of wind as one of the humors of the body.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­24
  • 1.­97
  • 2.­76
  • 7.­121
  • 8.­141
  • 9.­1386-1387
  • 9.­2445
  • 9.­2451
g.­755

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 102 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­243-244
  • 2.­246
  • 2.­253-254
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­51
  • 6.­36-37
  • 7.­200-202
  • 7.­204
  • 7.­207-208
  • 7.­213-214
  • 7.­216-217
  • 7.­220
  • 7.­222-223
  • 7.­225
  • 7.­227-228
  • 7.­235
  • 7.­238
  • 7.­240
  • 7.­248
  • 7.­250
  • 7.­259
  • 7.­266
  • 8.­31-32
  • 8.­47
  • 8.­66-72
  • 8.­76-77
  • 8.­114
  • 8.­194
  • 9.­16
  • 9.­149
  • 9.­175
  • 9.­178
  • 9.­181
  • 9.­184
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­192
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­217
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­225
  • 9.­239
  • 9.­610
  • 9.­612-613
  • 9.­636
  • 9.­641
  • 9.­684
  • 9.­689
  • 9.­1024
  • 9.­1028
  • 9.­1528
  • 9.­1778
  • 9.­1916
  • 10.­97
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­15
  • 11.­23
  • n.­403
  • n.­411
  • n.­424
  • n.­436
  • n.­445
  • n.­471
  • n.­473-475
  • n.­634
  • n.­638
  • g.­35
  • g.­39
  • g.­66
  • g.­157
  • g.­164
  • g.­171
  • g.­176
  • g.­198
  • g.­212
  • g.­220
  • g.­370
  • g.­466
  • g.­572
  • g.­704
  • g.­711
  • g.­756
g.­756

yakṣiṇī

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin mo
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣiṇī

Female yakṣas, a class of semidivine beings that haunt or protect natural places and cities. They can be malevolent or benevolent, and are known for bestowing wealth and worldly boons.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­241
  • 7.­256-257
  • 7.­259-260
  • 7.­265
  • 8.­76-77
  • g.­21
  • g.­126
  • g.­329
  • g.­420
  • g.­423
  • g.­672
g.­757

Yāma

Wylie:
  • ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

A class of gods who inhabit the third of the six heavens of the desire realm, characterized by freedom from difficulty.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­58
  • 4.­19
g.­758

Yama

Wylie:
  • gshin rje
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • yama

The god of death.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­427-428
  • 9.­431
  • 9.­433-434
  • n.­198
g.­759

Yamunā

Wylie:
  • ya mu na
Tibetan:
  • ཡ་མུ་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • yamunā

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­227
g.­760

Yaśas

Wylie:
  • grags pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśas

(1) A disciple of the Buddha who was a son of a wealthy householder. (2) A disciple of the Buddha whose right hand was impaired. (3) A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
  • 9.­1740-1741
  • 9.­1765-1767
  • 9.­1824-1825
  • 9.­1839-1841
  • n.­987
g.­761

Yaśodatta

Wylie:
  • grags byin
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśodatta

A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
g.­762

Yaśottara

Wylie:
  • grags mchog
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • yaśottara

(1) A buddha in the past. (2) A lay brother living in Nādikā.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­208-210
  • 9.­1466
  • 9.­1506
g.­763

Yavana

Wylie:
  • yul nas can
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་ནས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • yavanaviṣaya

A country of Greeks.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1545
  • 9.­1547
  • 9.­1572
g.­764

Yijing

Wylie:
  • —
Tibetan:
  • —
Sanskrit:
  • —

A seventh-century Chinese Buddhist monk, who studied in Nālandā monastery in India and translated many texts including the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • n.­186
  • n.­424
  • n.­485
  • n.­603
  • n.­1078
  • n.­1088
g.­765

yojana

Wylie:
  • dpag tshad
Tibetan:
  • དཔག་ཚད།
Sanskrit:
  • yojana

An Indian measure of distance equal to 16,000 cubits, or about 4.5 miles (7.4 km), or approximately 4000 fathoms (Rangjung Yeshe Dictionary).

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­264
  • 2.­270
  • 2.­274
  • 3.­19
  • 8.­169
  • 9.­205
  • 9.­225-226
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­289-290
  • 9.­293
  • 9.­298
  • 9.­717
  • 9.­743
  • 9.­1005
  • 9.­1446
  • 9.­2277
  • 9.­2318
  • 10.­97
  • n.­642
  • n.­783-784
g.­766

Yugandhara

Wylie:
  • gnya’ shing ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • གཉའ་ཤིང་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yugandhara

One of the seven golden mountains.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­195-197
  • n.­632
0
    You are downloading:

    The Chapter on Medicines

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). Translated by Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-glossary.Copy
    84000. The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). Translated by Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-glossary.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). (Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-glossary.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Chapters on Monastic Discipline
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy